Contents

Mitsubishi A500 FR-B3-NH-37K Inverter Instruction Manual PDF

1 of 235
1 of 235

Summary of Content for Mitsubishi A500 FR-B3-NH-37K Inverter Instruction Manual PDF

PRESSURE-RESISTANT, EXPLOSION-PROOF MOTOR DRIVING INVERTER IN

STR U

C TIO

N M

A N

UA L

FR-B, B3

PRESSURE-RESISTANT,EXPLOSION-PROOF MOTOR DRIVING INVERTER

FR-B, B3 INSTRUCTION MANUAL

OUTLINE

PARAMETERS

SPECIFICATIONS

INSTALLATION AND WIRING

PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

Chapter 6

OPTIONS Chapter 7

Chapter 5

Chapter 4

Chapter 3

Chapter 2

Chapter 1

OPERATION/ CONTROL

IB (NA) 0600011-B (0311) MEE Printed in Japan Specifications subject to change without notice.

HEAD OFFICE:MITSUBISHI DENKI BLDG MARUNOUCHI TOKYO 100-8310

FR-B-750 to 45K(200V CLASS) FR-B-750 to 55K(400V CLASS)

(A500 SPECIFICATIONS)

Variable torque type

Running pressure-resistant, explosion-proof

motors under V/F control

Constant torque type (Non-low acoustic noise or low acoustic noise)

FR-B3-(H)400 to 37K FR-B3-N(H)400 to 37K Running pressure-resistant, explosion-

proof motors under advanced magnetic

flux vector control

(Setting of offline auto tuning is required.

Refer to Chapter 3.)

A - 1

Thank you for choosing this Mitsubishi Pressure-Resistant, Explosion-Proof Motor Driving Inverter. This instruction manual gives handling information and precautions for use of this equipment. Incorrect handling might cause an unexpected fault. Before using the inverter, please read this manual carefully to use the equipment to its optimum. Please forward this manual to the end user.

This section is specifically about safety matters Do not attempt to install, operate, maintain or inspect the inverter until you have read through this instruction manual and appended documents carefully and can use the equipment correctly. Do not use the inverter until you have a full knowledge of the equipment, safety information and instructions. In this instruction manual, the safety instruction levels are classified into WARNING and CAUTION.

Assumes that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in death or severe injury.

Assumes that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in medium or slight injury, or may cause physical damage only.

Note that the CAUTION level may lead to a serious consequence according to conditions. Please follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personnel safety.

CAUTION

WARNING

A - 2

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

1. Electric Shock Prevention WARNING

While power is on or when the inverter is running, do not open the front cover. You may get an electric shock.

Do not run the inverter with the front cover removed. Otherwise, you may access the exposed high- voltage terminals or the charging part of the circuitry and get an electric shock.

If power is off, do not remove the front cover except for wiring or periodic inspection. You may access the charged inverter circuits and get an electric shock.

Before starting wiring or inspection, switch power off, wait for more than at least 10 minutes and check for the presence of any residual voltage with a meter (check chapter 2 for further details.) etc.

Earth the inverter. Any person who is involved in the wiring or inspection of this equipment should be fully competent to do

the work. Always install the inverter before wiring. Otherwise, you may get an electric shock or be injured. Operate the switches with dry hands to prevent an electric shock. Do not subject the cables to scratches, excessive stress, heavy loads or pinching. Otherwise, you may

get an electric shock. Do not change the cooling fan while power is on. To do so will invite a hazardous condition.

2. Fire Prevention CAUTION

Mount the inverter on an incombustible surface. Installing the inverter directly on or near a combustible surface could lead to a fire.

If the inverter has become faulty, switch off the inverter power. A continuous flow of large current could cause a fire.

Do not connect a resistor directly to the DC terminals P, N. This could cause a fire.

3. Injury Prevention CAUTION

Apply only the voltage specified in the instruction manual to each terminal to prevent damage etc. Ensure that the cables are connected to the correct terminals. Otherwise, damage etc. may occur. Always make sure that polarity is correct to prevent damage etc. After the inverter has been operating for a relativly long period of time, do not touch the inverter as it

may be hot and you may get burnt.

A - 3

4. Additional instructions Also note the following points to prevent an accidental failure, injury, electric shock, etc.:

(1) Transportation and installation CAUTION

Since the inverter is non-explosion-proof, always install it in a non-hazardous place. When carrying products, use correct lifting gear to prevent injury.

Do not stack the inverter boxes higher than the number recommended. Ensure that installation position and material can withstand the weight of the inverter. Install

according to the information in the Instruction Manual. Do not operate if the inverter is damaged or has parts missing. Do not hold the inverter by the front cover; it may fall off. Do not stand or rest heavy objects on the inverter. Check the inverter mounting orientation is correct. Prevent screws, wire fragments, conductive bodies, oil or other flammable substances from entering

the inverter. Do not drop the inverter, or subject it to impact. Use the inverter under the following environmental conditions:

Ambient temperature -10C to +50C (non-freezing) (-10C to +40C when using the dirt-protection structure attachment)

Ambient humidity 90%RH or less (non-condensing) Storage temperature -20C to +65C* Ambience Indoors (free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt)

En vi

ro nm

en t

Altitude, vibration Maximum 1000m above sea level for standard operation. 5.9 m/s2 or less (conforming to JIS C0911)

*Temperatures applicable for a short time, e.g. in transit.

(2) Wiring CAUTION

Do not fit capacitive equipment such as a power factor correction capacitor, radio noise filter or surge suppressor to the output of the inverter.

The connection orientation of the output cables U, V, W to the motor will affect the direction of rotation of the motor.

(3) Trial run CAUTION

Run the FR-B3 under advanced magnetic flux vector control. Check all parameters, and ensure that the machine will not be damaged by a sudden start-up.

(4) Operation CAUTION

Since this inverter is used in combination with the Mitsubishi inverter-driven, pressure-resistant, explosion-proof motor, note the driven motor used with the inverter.

Note that this inverter cannot be used with the Mitsubishi increased-safety, explosion-proof motor. When you have chosen the retry function, stay away from the equipment as it will restart suddenly

after an alarm stop. The [STOP] key is valid only when the appropriate function setting has been made. Prepare an

emergency stop switch separately.

A - 4

CAUTION Make sure that the start signal is off before resetting the inverter alarm. A failure to do so may restart

the motor suddenly. The load used should be a three-phase induction motor only. Connection of any other electrical

equipment to the inverter output may damage the equipment. Do not modify the inverter. The electronic overcurrent protection does not guarantee protection of the motor from overheating. Do not use a magnetic contactor on the inverter input for frequent starting/stopping of the inverter. Use a noise filter to reduce the effect of electromagnetic interference. Otherwise nearby electronic

equipment may be affected. Take measures to suppress harmonics. Otherwise power harmonics from the inverter may

heat/damage the power capacitor and generator. When parameter clear or all clear is performed, each parameter returns to the factory setting. Re-set

the required parameters before starting operation. The inverter can be easily set for high-speed operation. Before changing its setting, examine the

performance of the motor and machine. In addition to the inverter's holding function, install a holding device to ensure safety. Before running an inverter which had been stored for a long period, always perform inspection and

test operation.

(5) Emergency stop CAUTION

Provide a safety backup such as an emergency brake which will prevent the machine and equipment from hazardous conditions if the inverter fails.

(6) Maintenance, inspection and parts replacement CAUTION

Do not carry out a megger (insulation resistance) test on the control circuit of the inverter.

(7) Disposing of the inverter CAUTION

Treat as industrial waste.

(8) General instructions Many of the diagrams and drawings in this instruction manual show the inverter without a cover, or partially open. Never run the inverter like this. Always replace the cover and follow this instruction manual when operating the inverter.

CONTENTS

I

1 OUTLINE 1

1.1 Pre-Operation Information .........................................................................................................................................1 1.1.1 Precautions for operation ...................................................................................................................................1

1.2 Basic Configuration ...................................................................................................................................................2 1.2.1 Basic configuration .............................................................................................................................................2

1.3 Structure ....................................................................................................................................................................3 1.3.1 Appearance and structure ..................................................................................................................................3 1.3.2 Removal and reinstallation of the front cover .....................................................................................................4 1.3.3 Removal and reinstallation of the operation panel .............................................................................................6

2 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 7

2.1 Installation .................................................................................................................................................................7 2.1.1 Instructions for installation ..................................................................................................................................7

2.2 Wiring ........................................................................................................................................................................9 2.2.1 Terminal connection diagram .............................................................................................................................9 2.2.2 Wiring of the main circuit ..................................................................................................................................12 2.2.3 Wiring of the control circuit ...............................................................................................................................19 2.2.4 Connection to the PU connector.......................................................................................................................22 2.2.5 Connection of stand-alone option units ............................................................................................................25 2.2.6 Design information............................................................................................................................................29

2.3 Other Wiring ............................................................................................................................................................30 2.3.1 Power harmonics ..............................................................................................................................................30 2.3.2 Japanese harmonic suppression guidelines.....................................................................................................31 2.3.3 Inverter-generated noises and reduction techniques .......................................................................................34 2.3.4 Leakage currents and countermeasures ..........................................................................................................37 2.3.5 Peripheral devices ............................................................................................................................................38

3 OPERATION/CONTROL 40

3.1 Pre-Operation Information .......................................................................................................................................40 3.1.1 Devices and parts to be prepared for operation ...............................................................................................40 3.1.2 Power on...........................................................................................................................................................42

3.2 About the Control Panel ..........................................................................................................................................43 3.2.1 Names and functions of the operation panel (FR-DU04)..................................................................................43 3.2.2 Monitor display changed by pressing the [MODE] key .....................................................................................44 3.2.3 Monitoring mode...............................................................................................................................................44 3.2.4 Frequency setting mode ...................................................................................................................................44 3.2.5 Parameter setting mode ...................................................................................................................................45 3.2.6 Operation mode................................................................................................................................................45 3.2.7 Help mode ........................................................................................................................................................46 3.2.8 Copy mode .......................................................................................................................................................47

3.3 Operation.................................................................................................................................................................48 3.3.1 Pre-operation checks........................................................................................................................................48 3.3.2 External operation mode (Operation using external input signals) ..................................................................49 3.3.3 PU operation mode (Operation using the operation panel (FR-DU04))...........................................................50 3.3.4 Combined operation mode (Operation using the external input signals and PU)............................................51

C on

te nt

s

II

4 PARAMETERS 52

4.1 Parameter List .........................................................................................................................................................52 4.1.1 Parameter list ...................................................................................................................................................52 4.1.2 List of Parameters Classified by Purpose of Use .............................................................................................61 4.1.3 Parameters recommended to be set by the user..............................................................................................62

4.2 Parameter Function Details .....................................................................................................................................63 4.2.1 Output frequency range (Pr. 1, Pr. 2) ...............................................................................................................63 4.2.2 Multi-speed operation (Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239) .......................................................64 4.2.3 Acceleration/deceleration time (Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 20, Pr. 21, Pr. 44, Pr. 45, Pr. 110, Pr. 111) ..........................66 4.2.4 Electronic overcurrent protection (Pr. 9) ...........................................................................................................68 4.2.5 DC dynamic brake (Pr.10, Pr. 11, Pr.12) ..........................................................................................................69 4.2.6 Starting frequency (Pr. 13)................................................................................................................................70 4.2.7 Jog operation (Pr. 15, Pr. 16) ...........................................................................................................................71 4.2.8 MRS input selection (Pr. 17).............................................................................................................................72 4.2.9 Stall prevention (Pr. 22, Pr. 23, Pr. 66, Pr. 148, Pr. 149, Pr. 154) ....................................................................73 4.2.10Multi-speed input compensation (Pr. 28) ..........................................................................................................74 4.2.11Acceleration/deceleration pattern (Pr. 29, Pr. 140 to Pr. 143) ..........................................................................75 4.2.12Regenerative function selection (Pr. 30, Pr. 70) ...............................................................................................76 4.2.13Frequency jump (Pr. 31 to Pr. 36) ....................................................................................................................78 4.2.14Speed display (Pr. 37, Pr. 144).........................................................................................................................79 4.2.15Up-to-frequency sensitivity (Pr. 41) ..................................................................................................................80 4.2.16Output frequency detection (Pr. 42, Pr. 43, Pr. 50, Pr. 116).............................................................................80 4.2.17Second/third stall prevention (Pr. 48, Pr. 49, Pr. 114, Pr. 115).........................................................................82 4.2.18Monitor display/FM, AM terminal function selection (Pr. 52 to Pr. 54, Pr. 158) ................................................83 4.2.19Monitoring reference (Pr. 55, Pr. 56) ................................................................................................................86 4.2.20Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure (Pr. 57, Pr. 58, Pr. 162 to Pr. 165)..................................87 4.2.21Remote setting function selection (Pr. 59)........................................................................................................89 4.2.22Intelligent mode selection (Pr. 60) ....................................................................................................................90 4.2.23 Acceleration/deceleration reference current (Pr. 61 to Pr. 64) ........................................................................92 4.2.24Retry function (Pr. 65, Pr. 67 to Pr. 69) ............................................................................................................93 4.2.25Applied motor (Pr. 71).......................................................................................................................................94 4.2.26PWM carrier frequency (Pr. 72, Pr. 240) ..........................................................................................................96 4.2.27Voltage input (Pr. 73)........................................................................................................................................97 4.2.28Input filter time constant (Pr. 74) ......................................................................................................................98 4.2.29Reset selection/PU disconnection detection/PU stop selection (Pr. 75) .........................................................98 4.2.30Alarm code output selection (Pr. 76) ..............................................................................................................101 4.2.31Parameter Write Inhibit Selection (Pr. 77) ......................................................................................................102 4.2.32Reverse rotation prevention selection (Pr. 78) ...............................................................................................103 4.2.33Operation mode selection (Pr. 79)..................................................................................................................104 4.2.34Motor constants (Pr. 80, Pr. 81, Pr. 89) ..........................................................................................................107 4.2.35Offline auto tuning function (Pr. 82 to Pr. 84, Pr. 90 to Pr. 94, Pr. 96) ...............................................................108 4.2.36Computer link operation (Pr. 117 to Pr. 124) ..................................................................................................113 4.2.37PID control (Pr. 128 to Pr. 134) ......................................................................................................................125 4.2.38Output current detection function (Pr. 150, Pr. 151) .......................................................................................132 4.2.39Zero current detection (Pr. 152, Pr. 153) ........................................................................................................133 4.2.40RT signal activated condition selection (Pr. 155)............................................................................................134 4.2.41Stall prevention function and current limit function (Pr. 156) ..........................................................................134 4.2.42OL signal output timer (Pr. 157)......................................................................................................................136 4.2.43User group selection (Pr. 160, Pr. 173 to Pr. 176)..........................................................................................137

III

4.2.44Watt-hour meter clear/actual operation hour meter clear (Pr. 170, Pr. 171) .................................................138 4.2.45Input terminal function selection (Pr. 180 to Pr. 186) .....................................................................................139 4.2.46Output terminal function selection (Pr. 190 to Pr. 195)...................................................................................142 4.2.47User's initial value setting (Pr. 199) ................................................................................................................144 4.2.48Programmed operation function (Pr. 200 to Pr. 231)......................................................................................145 4.2.49Cooling fan operation selection (Pr. 244) .......................................................................................................149 4.2.50Stop selection (Pr. 250) ..................................................................................................................................150 4.2.51Output phase failure protection selection (Pr. 251) ........................................................................................151 4.2.52Override bias/gain (Pr. 252, Pr. 253) ..............................................................................................................151 4.2.53Power failure-time deceleration-to-stop function (Pr. 261 to Pr. 266)............................................................152 4.2.54Stop-on-Contact, Load torque high-speed frequency selection (Pr. 270).......................................................153 4.2.55High-speed frequency control (Pr. 271 to Pr. 274) .........................................................................................154 4.2.56Stop-on-contact control function (Pr. 275, Pr. 276) ........................................................................................157 4.2.57Brake sequence function (Pr. 278 to Pr. 285).................................................................................................161 4.2.58Droop control (Pr. 286, Pr. 287)......................................................................................................................165 4.2.59Meter (frequency meter) calibration (Pr. 900, Pr. 901) ...................................................................................166 4.2.60Frequency setting voltage (current) bias and gain (Pr. 902 to Pr. 905) .........................................................168 4.2.61Buzzer control (Pr. 990)..................................................................................................................................173

5 PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 174

5.1 Errors (Alarms) ......................................................................................................................................................174 5.1.1 Error (alarm) definitions ..................................................................................................................................174 5.1.2 To know the operating status at the occurrence of an alarm..........................................................................182 5.1.3 Correspondences between digital and actual characters ...............................................................................182 5.1.4 Alarm code output ..........................................................................................................................................183 5.1.5 Resetting the inverter......................................................................................................................................183

5.2 Troubleshooting.....................................................................................................................................................184 5.2.1 Motor remains stopped...................................................................................................................................184 5.2.2 Motor rotates in opposite direction..................................................................................................................184 5.2.3 Speed greatly differs from the setting.............................................................................................................184 5.2.4 Acceleration/deceleration is not smooth.........................................................................................................184 5.2.5 Motor current is large......................................................................................................................................184 5.2.6 Speed does not increase................................................................................................................................185 5.2.7 Speed varies during operation........................................................................................................................185 5.2.8 Operation mode is not changed properly........................................................................................................185 5.2.9 Operation panel (FR-DU04) display is not provided .......................................................................................185 5.2.10POWER lamp is not lit ....................................................................................................................................185 5.2.11Parameter write cannot be performed ............................................................................................................185

5.3 Precautions for Maintenance and Inspection ........................................................................................................186 5.3.1 Precautions for maintenance and inspection..................................................................................................186 5.3.2 Check items....................................................................................................................................................186 5.3.3 Periodic inspection .........................................................................................................................................186 5.3.4 Insulation resistance test using megger .........................................................................................................187 5.3.5 Pressure test ..................................................................................................................................................187 5.3.6 Daily and Periodic Inspection .........................................................................................................................187 5.3.7 Replacement of parts .....................................................................................................................................190 5.3.8 Inverter replacement.......................................................................................................................................191 5.3.9 Measurement of main circuit voltages, currents and power ...........................................................................192

C on

te nt

s

IV

6 SPECIFICATIONS 194

6.1 Standard Specifications.........................................................................................................................................194 6.1.1 Model specifications .......................................................................................................................................194 6.1.2 Specifications common to the FR-B series.....................................................................................................196 6.1.3 Model specifications .......................................................................................................................................197 6.1.4 Specifications common to the FR-B3 series...................................................................................................199 6.1.5 Outline drawings .............................................................................................................................................201

7 OPTIONS 205

7.1 Option List .............................................................................................................................................................205 7.1.1 Stand-alone options........................................................................................................................................205 7.1.2 Inboard dedicated options ..............................................................................................................................207

APPENDICES 208

Appendix 1 Data Code List ..........................................................................................................................................208

1

CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE

This chapter gives information on the basic "outline" of this product. Always read the instructions in this chapter before using the equipment.

1.1 Pre-Operation Information........................................1 1.2 Basic Configuration..................................................2 1.3 Structure ..................................................................3

DU Operation panel (FR-DU04)

PU Operation panel (FR-DU04) and parameter unit (FR-PU04)

Inverter Mitsubishi pressure-resistant, explosion-proof motor driving inverter FR-B, B3 series

Pr. Parameter number

PU operation Operation using the PU (FR-DU04/FR-PU04)

External operation Operation using the control circuit signals

Combined operation Operation using both the PU (FR-DU04/FR-PU04) and external operation

FR-B (A200E) Mitsubishi pressure-resistant, explosion-proof motor driving inverter FR-B (A200E specifications) series

Chapter 1

Chapter 2

Chapter 3

Chapter 4

Chapter 5

Chapter 6

Chapter 7

1.1 Pre-Operation Information OUTLINE

1

1 OUTLINE1.1 Pre-Operation Information

1.1.1 Precautions for operation Incorrect handling might cause the inverter to operate improperly, its life to be reduced considerably, or at the worst, the inverter to be damaged. Handle the inverter properly in accordance with the information in each section as well as the precautions and instructions of this manual to use it correctly. This manual is written for the FR-B, B3 series pressure-resistant, explosion-proof motor driving inverters. For handling information on the parameter unit (FR-PU04), inboard options, stand-alone options, etc., refer to the corresponding manuals.

(1) Unpacking and product check Unpack the inverter and check the capacity plate on the front cover and the rating plate on the inverter side face to ensure that the product agrees with your order and the inverter is intact. Since this inverter is used with the Mitsubishi inverter-driven pressure-resistant, explosion-proof motor, especially note the driven motor used with the inverter. (It should be noted that this inverter can not be used with the Mitsubishi increased-safety, explosion-proof motor.)

1) Inverter type

FR-B-3700/

MITSUBISHI MODEL

INVERTER

FR-B-3700 INPUT :

OUTPUT :

SERIAL :

XXXXX

XXXXX

PASSED

Capacity plate

Inverter type Serial number

Capacity plate Rating plate

Rating plate

Input rating

Output rating

Serial number

Inverter type

FR-B3 series inverter type

Low acoustic noise

-FR B3 -

200V

400VH

3700

N

Inverter capacity

Symbol Noise Level None Non-low acoustic noise

Symbol Voltage Class

None

Note: To know the voltage class of the FR-B series, confirm it with the input rating given on the rating plate.

2) Accessory Instruction manual

If you have found any discrepancy, damage, etc., please contact your sales representative.

(2) Preparations of instruments and parts required for operation

Instruments and parts to be prepared depend on how the inverter is operated. Prepare equipment and parts as necessary. (Refer to page 40.)

(3) Installation

To operate the inverter with high performance for a long time, install the inverter in a proper place, in the correct direction, and with proper clearances. (Refer to page 7.)

(4) Wiring

Connect the power supply, motor and operation signals (control signals) to the terminal block. Note that incorrect connection may damage the inverter and peripheral devices. (See page 9.)

1.2 Basic Configuration OUTLINE

2

1.2 Basic Configuration

1.2.1 Basic configuration The following devices are required to operate the inverter. Proper peripheral devices must be selected and correct connections made to ensure proper operation. Incorrect system configuration and connections can cause the inverter to operate improperly, its life to be reduced considerably, and in the worst case, the inverter to be damaged. Please handle the inverter properly in accordance with the information in each section as well as the precautions and instructions of this manual. (For connections of the peripheral devices, refer to the corresponding manuals.)

Name Description

Power supply Use the power supply within the permissible power supply specifications of the inverter. (Refer to page 194.)

Earth leakage circuit breaker (ELB) or no-fuse breaker (NFB)

The breaker should be selected with care since a large inrush current flows in the inverter at power on. (Refer to page 38.)

Magnetic contactor

The magnetic contactor need not be provided. When installed, do not use it to start or stop the inverter. It might reduce the inverter life. (Refer to page 38.)

Reactors

The reactors must be used when the power factor is to be improved or the inverter is installed near a large power supply system (1000kVA or more and wiring distance within 10m). Make selection carefully.

Inverter

The inverter life is influenced by ambient temperature. The ambient temperature should be as low as possible within the permissible range. This must be noted especially when the inverter is installed in an enclosure. (Refer to page 7.)

Incorrect wiring might lead to inverter damage. The control signal lines should be kept away from the main circuit to protect them from noise. (Refer to page 9.)

Devices connected to the output

Do not connect a power capacitor, surge suppressor or radio noise filter to the output side.

(MC)

Ground

DC reactor (FR-BEL)

Ground

(NFB) or

(ELB)

AC reactor (FR-BAL)

Ground

To prevent an electric shock, always ground the motor and inverter. The ground wiring from the power line of the inverter as an induction noise reduction technique is recommended to be run by returning it to the ground terminal of the inverter. (Refer to page 36)

Japanese Harmonic Suppression Guideline

The "harmonic suppression guideline for household appliances and general-purpose products" was issued by the Ministry of International Trade and Industry in September, 1994. This guideline applies to the FR-B, B3-750 to 3700 (200V class). By connection of the power factor improving reactor (FR-BEL or FR-BAL), this product conforms to the "harmonic suppression technique for transistorized inverters (input current 20A or less)" set forth by the Japan Electrical Manufactures' Association.

1

1.3 Structure OUTLINE

3

1.3 Structure

1.3.1 Appearance and structure

(1) Front view

POWER lamp ALARM lamp

Operation panel (FR-DU04)

Brake resistor* (Fitted to the back)

Accessory cover

Wiring port cover for option

Front cover

Rating plate

Capacity plate

(2) Without front cover

Wiring cover

PU connector (Provided with modular jack type relay connector) (For use with RS-485 cable for communication)

Modular jack type relay connector compartment

Inboard option mounting position

Control circuit terminal block Main circuit terminal block

*7.5K or less inverters are equipped with an inboard brake resistor.

OUTLINE

4

1.3.2 Removal and reinstallation of the front cover

FR-B-750 to 11K (200V class), FR-B-750 to 7.5K (400V class) FR-B3-(N)400 to 11K, FR-B3-(N)H400 to 7.5K Removal

1) Hold both sides of the front cover top and push the front cover down. 2) Hold down the front cover and pull it toward you to remove. (The front cover may be removed with the PU (FR-DU04/FR-PU04) on.)

Front cover Inverter

Catch

Reinstallation 1) Insert the catches at the bottom of the front cover into the sockets of the inverter. 2) Using the catches as supports, securely press the front cover against the inverter. Note: When the operation panel is mounted and the front cover is removed, remove the operation

panel before reinstalling the front cover.

FR-B-15K, 22K (200V class), FR-B-15K, 22K (400V class) FR-B3-(N)15K to 22K, FR-B3-(N)H11K to 22K Removal

1) Remove the installation screw at top of the front cover. 2) Hold both ends of the front cover top. 3) Pull the front cover toward you to remove. (The front cover may be removed with the PU (FR-DU04/FR-PU04) on.)

Reinstallation 1) Insert the catches at the front cover bottom into the sockets of the inverter. 2) Using the catches as supports, securely press the front cover against the inverter. 3) Fix the front cover with the top screw. Note: When the operation panel is mounted on the front cover removed, remove the operation panel

before reinstalling the front cover.

1

OUTLINE

5

FR-B-30K to 45K (200V class), FR-B-37K, 55K (400V class) FR-B3-(N)30K to 37K, FR-B3-(N)H30K to 37K Removal

1) Remove the front cover mounting screws.

Reinstallation 1) Fix the front cover with the mounting screws.

Note: 1. Make sure that the front cover has been reinstalled securely. 2. The same serial number is printed on the capacity plate of the front cover and the rating plate of

the inverter. Before reinstalling the front cover, check the serial number to ensure that the cover removed is reinstalled to the inverter from where it was removed.

OUTLINE

6

1.3.3 Removal and reinstallation of the operation panel

To ensure safety, remove and reinstall the operation panel after switching power off.

Removal Hold down the top button of the operation panel and pull the operation panel toward you to remove.

Removal Reinstallation

To reinstall, insert straight and mount securely.

Reinstallation using the connection cables 1) Remove the operation panel. 2) Disconnect the modular jack type relay connector. (Place the disconnected modular jack type relay connector in the modular jack type relay connector compartment.)

Modular jack type relay connector compartment Modular jack type relay connector

3) Securely plug one end of the connection cable into the PU connector (modular jack type relay connector) of the inverter and the other end into the operation panel. (For the connection cable, refer to page 22.)

Note: Install the operation panel only when the front cover is on the inverter.

1

MEMO

2

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION AND WIRING

This chapter gives information on the basic "installation and wiring" of this product. Always read the instructions in this chapter before using the equipment.

2.1 Installation................................................................ 7 2.2 Wiring ...................................................................... 9 2.3 Other Wiring.............................................................30

Chapter 1

Chapter 2

Chapter 3

Chapter 4

Chapter 5

Chapter 6

Chapter 7

2.1 Installation INSTALLATION AND WIRING

7

2 INSTALLATION AND WIRING2.1 Installation

Since the inverter is non-explosion-proof, always install it in a non-hazardous place.

2.1.1 Instructions for installation 1) Handle the unit carefully.

The inverter uses plastic parts. Handle it gently to protect it from damage. Also, hold the unit with even strength and do not apply too much strength to the front cover alone.

2) Install the inverter in a place where it is immune to vibration. (5.9 m/s2 or less) Also note the cart, press, etc.

3) Note on ambient temperature The inverter life is under great influence of ambient temperature. In the place of installation, ambient temperature must be within the permissible range (-10C to 50C). Check that the ambient temperature is within that range in the positions shown in figure 3).

4) Install the inverter on a non-combustible surface. The inverter will be very hot (maximum about 150C). Install it on a non-combustible surface (e.g. metal). Also leave sufficient clearances around the inverter.

5) Avoid high temperature and high humidity. Avoid direct sunlight and places of high temperature and high humidity.

6) The amount of heat generated in an enclosure can be reduced considerably by placing the heat sink outside the enclosure.

Note: 1. Use the option (FR-A5CN ) for installation. The mounting area should be cut to the panel cutting dimensions.

2. The cooling section outside the enclosure has the cooling fan. Do not use the inverter in any environment where it is exposed to waterdrops, oil mist, dust, etc.

7) Avoid places where the inverter is exposed to oil mist, flammable gases, fluff, dust, dirt etc. Install the inverter in a clean place or inside a "totally enclosed" panel which does not accept any suspended matter.

8) Note the cooling method when the inverter is installed in an enclosure. When two or more inverters are installed or a ventilation fan is mounted in an enclosure, the inverters and ventilation fan must be installed in proper positions with extreme care taken to keep the ambient temperatures of the inverters below the permissible value. If they are installed in improper positions, the ambient temperatures of the inverters will rise and ventilation effect will be reduced.

9) Install the inverter securely with screws or bolts in the vertical direction.

3) Note on ambient temperature

Measurement position

Measurement position

5cm5cm

5cm

4) Clearances around the inverter

10cm or more

5c m

o r m

or e

* Leave sufficient clearances above and under the inverter to ensure adequate ventilation.

Cooling fan built in the inverter

Cooling air

5c m

o r m

or e

*

10cm or more

*: 1cm or more for model 3.7K or less These clearances are also necessary for changing the cooling fan.

INSTALLATION AND WIRING

8

8) For installation in an enclosure Ventilation fan

(Correct example)

Position of Ventilation Fan

Inveter Inveter Inveter

(Correct example) (Incorrect example)

Built-in cooling fan

Inveter Inveter

Inveter

Accommodation of two or more inverters

(Incorrect example)

9) Vertical mounting

(1) Wiring cover and handling (22K or less)

1) When cable conduits are not connected Cut the protective bushes of the wiring cover with nippers or a cutter before running the cables.

Wiring cover

Protective bush

WARNING Do not remove the protective bushes. Otherwise, the cable sheathes may be scratched by the wiring cover edges, resulting in a short circuit or ground fault.

2) When cable conduits are connected Remove the corresponding protective bushes and connect the cable conduits.

2

2.2 Wiring INSTALLATION AND WIRING

9

2.2 Wiring

2.2.1 Terminal connection diagram

NFB

R S T

R1 S1

PC

STF

STR

STOP

RH

RM

RL

JOG

RT

MRS

RES

AU

CS

SD

10E(+10V)

10(+5V)

2

5

2 3

1

1

4 (4 to 20mADC)

Frequency setting potentiometer 1/2W1k

RUN

SU

IPF

OL

FU

SE

FM

SD

IM

A

B

C

U V

W

P1

P

PX

PR

N

+

()

(+)AM

5

R

Ground

Main circuit terminal

Control circuit input terminal Control circuit output terminal

3-phase AC power supply

Jumper

24VDC power output and external transistor common (Contact input common for source logic)

Forward rotation start

Reverse rotation start

Start self-holding selection

High

Middle

Low

Jog mode

Second acceleration/deceleration time selection

Output stop

Reset

Current input selection

Selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure

(Contact input common for sink logic)

Control input signals (No voltage input allowed)

Frequency setting signals (Analog)

Common

Auxiliary input

Current input

0 to 5VDC 0 to 10VDCSelected

(Analog common)

0 to 5VDC 0 to 10VDC

Selected

*

*

Motor (Note)

Ground

Jumper Remove this jumper when using FR-BEL.

Jumper Don't remove.

Alarm detection

Running

Up to frequency

Instantaneous power failure

Overload

Frequency detection

Open collector output common Common to sink and source

Open collector outputs

Meter (e.g. frequency meter)

Moving-coil type 1mA full-scale

Analog signal output (0 to 10VDC)

Multi-speed selection

PU connector (RS-485)

* Terminals PR and PX are provided for 7.5K or less.

Note: It is mandatory to use the Mitsubishi pressure-resistant, explosion-proof motor with the inverter which has been approved for combination by the Labor Ministry's explosion-proof certification. Therefore, always use the Mitsubishi pressure-resistant, explosion-proof motor in combination with its approved driving inverter.

INSTALLATION AND WIRING

10

(1) Description of main circuit terminals Symbol Terminal Name Description

R, S, T AC power input Connect to the commercial power supply. Keep these terminals open when using the high power factor converter (FR-HC) (Note).

U, V, W Inverter output Connect a three-phase squirrel-cage motor.

R1, S1 Power supply for control circuit

Connected to the AC power supply terminals R and S. To retain the alarm display or alarm output or when using the high power factor converter (FR-HC) (Note), remove the jumpers from terminals R-R1 and S-S1, and input external power to these terminals.

P, PR Brake resistor connection Disconnect the jumper from terminals PR-PX and connect the optional brake resistor (FR-ABR) (Note) across terminals P-PR.

P, N Brake unit connection Connect the optional FR-BU brake unit (Note), power return converter (FR-RC) (Note) or high power factor converter (FR-HC) (Note).

P, P1 Power factor improving DC reactor connection

Disconnect the jumper from terminals P-P1 and connect the optional power factor improving reactor (FR-BEL).

PR, PX Built-in brake circuit connection

When the jumper is connected across terminals PX-PR (factory setting), the built-in brake circuit is valid. (Provided for 7.5K or less.)

Ground For grounding the inverter chassis. Must be earthed.

Note : When using this option, the explosion-proof certification test is required separately. It should be noted that the test is not required when the high power factor converter (FR-HC) is used for power factor improvement. (It cannot be used with the FR-B series.)

(2) Description of control circuit terminals Type Symbol Terminal Name Description

STF Forward rotation start

Turn on the STF signal to start forward rotation and turn it off to stop. Acts as a programmed operation start signal in the programmed operation mode. (Turn on to start and turn off to stop.)

STR Reverse rotation start Turn on the STR signal to start reverse rotation and turn it off to stop.

When the STF and STR signals are turned on simultaneously, the stop command is given.

STOP Start self-holding selection Turn on the STOP signal to select the self-holding of the start signal.

RH, RM, RL Multi-speed selection Use the RH, RM and RL signals as appropriate to select multiple speeds.

JOG JOG mode selection Turn on the JOG signal to select jog operation (factory setting). Jog operation can be performed with the start signal (STF or STR).

RT Second acceleration/ deceleration time selection

Turn on the RT signal to select the second acceleration/ deceleration time.

Input terminal function selection (Pr. 180 to Pr. 186) change terminal functions.

MRS Output stop Turn on the MRS signal (20ms or longer) to stop the inverter output. Used to shut off the inverter output to bring the motor to a stop by the magnetic brake.

RES Reset Used to reset the protective circuit activated. Turn on the RES signal for more than 0.1 second, then turn it off.

AU Current input selection

Only when the AU signal is turned on, the inverter can be operated with the 4-20mADC frequency-setting signal.

CS Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure selection

With the CS signal on, restart can be made automatically when the power is restored after an instantaneous power failure. Note that this operation requires restart parameters to be set. When the inverter is shipped from the factory, it is set to disallow restart.

Input terminal function selection (Pr. 180 to Pr. 186) change terminal functions.

SD Contact input common (sink)

Common to the contact input terminals and terminal FM. Common output terminal for 24VDC 0.1A power (PC terminal).

In pu

t s ig

na ls

C on

ta ct

s, e

.g . s

ta rt

(S TF

), st

op (S

TO P)

e tc

.

PC

24VDC power and external transistor common Contact input common (source)

When transistor output (open collector output), such as a programmable controller, is connected, connect the external power supply common for transistor output to this terminal to prevent a fault caused by leakage current. This terminal can be used as a 24VDC, 0.1A power output. When source logic has been selected, this terminal serves as a contact input common.

2

INSTALLATION AND WIRING

11

Type Symbol Terminal Name Description

10E 10VDC, permissible load current 10mA

10

Frequency setting power supply 5VDC, permissible load current

10mA

When the frequency setting potentiometer is connected in the factory-set state, connect it to terminal 10. When it is connected to terminal 10E, change the input specifications of terminal 2.

2 Frequency setting (voltage)

By entering 0 to 5VDC (0 to 10VDC), the maximum output frequency is reached at 5V (or 10V) and I/O are proportional. Use Pr. 73 to switch between input 0-5VDC (factory setting) and 0-10VDC. Input resistance 10k. Maximum permissible voltage 20V.

4 Frequency setting (current)

By entering 4 to 20mADC, the maximum output frequency is reached at 20mA and I/O are proportional. This input signal is valid only when the AU signal is on. Input resistance 250. Maximum permissible current 30mA.

1 Auxiliary frequency setting

By entering 0 to 5VDC or 0 to 10VDC, this signal is added to the frequency setting signal of terminal 2 or 4. Switch between input 0 to 5VDC and 0 to 10VDC (factory setting) from the operation panel. Input resistance 10k. Maximum permissible voltage 20V.

An al

og

Fr eq

ue nc

y se

tti ng

5 Frequency setting input common

Common to the frequency setting signal (terminal 2, 1 or 4) and analog output terminal AM. Do not earth.

C on

ta ct

A, B, C Alarm output

1 contact output indicating that the output has been stopped by the inverter protective function activated. 200VAC 0.3A, 30VDC 0.3A. Alarm: discontinuity across B-C (continuity across A-C), normal: continuity across B-C (discontinuity across A-C).

RUN Inverter running

Switched low when the inverter output frequency is equal to or higher than the starting frequency (factory set to 0.5Hz, variable). Switched high during stop or DC dynamic brake operation (*2). Permissible load 24VDC 0.1A.

SU Up to frequency

Switched low when the output frequency has reached within 10% of the set frequency (factory setting, variable). Switched high during acceleration, deceleration or stop (*2). Permissible load 24VDC 0.1A.

OL Overload alarm Switched low when the stall prevention function has caused stall prevention to be activated. Switched high when stall prevention is reset (*2). Permissible load 24VDC 0.1A.

IPF Instantaneous power failure

Switched low when instantaneous power failure or undervoltage protection is activated (*2). Permissible load 24VDC 0.1A.

FU Frequency detection

Switched low when the output frequency has reached or exceeded the detection frequency set as appropriate. Switched high when below the detection frequency (*2). Permissible load 24VDC 0.1A

Output terminal function selection (Pr. 190 to Pr. 195) change terminal functions.

O pe

n co

lle ct

or

SE Open collector output common Common to the RUN, SU, OL, IPF and FU terminals.

Pu ls

e

FM For meter Factory setting of output item:

Frequency permissible load current 1mA 1440 pulses/second at 60Hz

O ut

pu t s

ig na

ls

An al

og

AM Analog signal output

One selected from 16 monitoring items, such as output frequency, is output. (*3) The output signal is proportional to the magnitude of each monitoring item.

Factory setting of output item: Frequency output signal 0 to 10VDC Permissible load current 1mA

C om

m un

ic at

io n

R S-

48 5

PU connector

With the operation panel connector, communication can be made through RS-485. Conforming Standard : EIA Standard RS-485 Transmission format : Multi-drop link Communication speed : Maximum 19200 baud rates Overall length : 500m

*1: Terminals PR and PX are provided for the FR-B-750 to 7.5K and FR-B3-(N)(H)400 to 7.5K. *2: Low indicates that the open collector-outputting transistor is on (conducts). High indicates that the

transistor is off (does not conduct). *3: Not output while the inverter is reset.

INSTALLATION AND WIRING

12

2.2.2 Wiring of the main circuit (1) Wiring instructions

1) Crimping terminals with insulation sleeves are recommended for use with the power and motor cables. 2) Cut the protective bushes of the wiring cover when running the cables. (22K or less) 3) Power must not be applied to the output terminals (U, V, W) of the inverter. Otherwise the inverter will be

damaged. 4) After wiring, wire off-cuts must not be left in the inverter.

Wire off-cuts can cause an alarm, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean. When drilling mounting holes in a control box etc., exercise care to prevent chips and other foreign matter from entering the inverter.

5) Use cables of the recommended size for wiring to make the voltage drop 2% or less. If the wiring distance is long between the inverter and motor, a main circuit cable voltage drop will cause the motor torque to decrease especially at the output of a low frequency. (The selection example at the wiring length of 20m is given on page 16.)

6) The overall wiring length should be 500m maximum. Especially for long distance wiring, the overcurrent protection may be misactivated or the devices connected to the output side may misoperate or become faulty under the influence of a charging current due to the stray capacitance of the wiring. Therefore, the maximum overall wiring length should be as indicated in the following table. (For connection of two or more motors, the explosion-proof certification test has not been conducted.)

Inverter Capacity 0.4K 0.75K 1.5K or more FR-B, B3 (Non-low acoustic noise mode) 300m 500m 500m FR-B3-N (Low acoustic noise mode) 200m 300m 500m

Overall wiring length (1.5K or more)

500m maximum

7) Do not remove the jumper across terminals PR-PX except when connecting the brake unit or power return converter.

8) Electromagnetic wave interference The input/output (main circuit) of the inverter includes harmonic components, which may interfere with the communication devices (such as AM radios) used near the inverter. In this case, install the FR-BIF optional radio noise filter (for use in the input side only) or FR-BSF01 or FR-BLF line noise filter to minimize interference.

9) Do not install a power capacitor, surge suppressor or radio noise filter (FR-BIF option) in the output side of the inverter. This will cause the inverter to trip or the capacitor and surge suppressor to be damaged. If any of the above devices are installed, immediately remove them. (If the FR-BIF radio noise filter is connected, switching power off during motor operation may result in E.UVT. In this case, connect the radio noise filter in the primary side of the electromagnetic contactor.)

10) When rewiring after operation, make sure that the POWER lamp has gone off, and when more than 10 minutes have elapsed after power-off, check with a meter that the voltage is zero. After that, start rewiring work. For some time after power-off, there is a dangerous voltage in the capacitor.

2

INSTALLATION AND WIRING

13

11) Use the space on the left-hand side of the main circuit terminal block to run the cables for connection of the control circuit power terminals R1, S1 of the FR-B-11K (200V class) or FR-B3-(N)11K.

N

U V W

P1

R1 S1

P

Screw size (M5)

Connection cable

Charge lamp

TR S

Notes on Grounding

Leakage currents flow in the inverter. To prevent an electric shock, the inverter and motor must be grounded.

Use the dedicated ground terminal to ground the inverter. (Do not use the screw in the case, chassis, etc.)

(Unit: mm2) Ground Cable GaugeMotor Capacity 200V class 400V class

3.7 kW or less 3.5 2 5.5 kW, 7.5 kW 5.5 3.5 11 kW to 15 kW 14 8 18.5 kW to 37kW 22 14 45 kW, 55 kW 38 22

The ground cable should be as thick as possible. Its gauge should be equal to or larger than those indicated in the following table. The grounding point should be as near as possible to the inverter to minimize the ground cable length.

Ground the motor on the inverter side using one wire of the 4-core cable.

INSTALLATION AND WIRING

14

(2) Terminal block layout

In the main circuit of the inverter, the terminals are arranged as shown below: 1) 200V class

FR-B-750 FR-B3-(N)400, 750

R S T U V W PR

R1 S1 N P1 P PX

Jumper

Screw size (M4)

Charge lamp Screw size (M4)

FR-B-15K, 22K FR-B3-(N)15K, 18.5K, 22K

R S T U V W N P1 P

R S

R1 S1

Screw size 15K (M6) 18.5K, 22K (M8)

Jumper

Charge lamp

Screw size (M4)

Screw size (M6)

FR-B-1500, 2200, 3700 FR-B3-(N)1500, 2200, 3700

R

R1

S T U V W PR

S1

N P1 P

PX

Jumper

Screw size (M4) Charge lamp

Screw size (M4)

FR-B-30K FR-B3-(N)30K

R S T U V W

R1 S1

N P1 P

R S

Charge lamp Screw size (M4)

Screw size (M8)

Screw size (M6) Jumper

FR-B-5.5K, 7.5K FR-B3-(N)5.5K, 7.5K

R S T U V W

N P1 P PR PX

R1

R

S1

S

Charge lamp

Screw size (M5)

Screw size (M4)

JumpersScrew size (M5)

FR-B-37K, 45K FR-B3-(N)37K

R S T U V W

R1 S1

N P1 P

R S

Charge lamp Screw size (M4)

Screw size (M10)

Screw size (M8) Jumper

FR-B-11K FR-B3-(N)11K

R

N

S T U V W

P1 P

R1

R

S1

SCharge lamp

Screw size (M4)

Jumper

Screw size (M5)

Screw size (M5)

2

INSTALLATION AND WIRING

15

2) 400V class

FR-B-750, 1500, 2200, 3700 FR-B3-(N)H400, 750, 1500, 2200, 3700

Jumper

Charge lamp

Screw size (M4)

R T U V W N P1 P PR

R1

S

S1 PX

Screw size (M4)

FR-B-15K, 22K FR-B3-(N)H11K, 15K, 18.5K, 22K

Jumper

Charge lamp

Screw size (M4)R1

R T U V W N P1 PS

S1

Screw size (M6)

Screw size (M6)

R S

FR-B-7.5K FR-B3-(N)H5.5K, 7.5K

Jumpers

Charge lamp

Screw size (M4)

R1

R T U V WS

S1

N P1 P PR PX Screw size (M4)

Screw size (M4)

R S

FR-B3-(N)H30K

R T U V W N P1 PS

Jumper

Charge lamp

R1 S1

Screw size (M6)

R S

Screw size (M4)

Screw size (M6)

FR-B-37K, 55K FR-B3-(N)H37K

R1 S1

R S

R T U V W N P1 PS

Jumper

Charge lamp

Screw size (M8)

Screw size (M4)

Screw size (M8)

INSTALLATION AND WIRING

16

(3) Cables, crimping terminals, etc.

The following table lists the cables and crimping terminals used with the inputs (R, S, T) and outputs (U, V, W) of the inverter and the torques for tightening the screws:

1) 200V class Cables (Note 1)Crimping Terminals mm2 AWGApplicable Inverter

Type Terminal Screw

Size Tightening Torque

Nm R, S, T U, V, W R, S, T U, V, W R, S, T U, V, W

FR-B-750 to 2200, FR-B3-(N)400 to 2200 M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 14 14

FR-B-3700, FR-B3-(N)3700 M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 3.5 3.5 12 12

FR-B-5.5K, FR-B3-(N)5.5K M5 2.5 5.5-5 5.5-5 5.5 5.5 10 10

FR-B-7.5K, FR-B3-(N)7.5K M5 2.5 14-5 8-5 14 8 6 8

FR-B-11K, FR-B3-(N)11K M5 2.5 14-5 14-5 14 14 6 6

FR-B-15K, FR-B3-(N)15K M6 4.4 22-6 22-6 22 22 4 4

FR-B-22K, FR-B3-(N)18.5K, 22K M8 7.8 38-8 38-8 38 38 2 2

FR-B-30K, FR-B3-(N)30K M8 7.8 60-8 60-8 60 60 1/0 1/0

FR-B-37K, FR-B3-(N)37K M10 14.7 100-10 100-10 100 100 4/0 4/0

FR-B-45K M10 14.7 100-10 100-10 100 100 4/0 4/0

2) 400V class Cables (Note 1)Crimping Terminals mm2 AWGApplicable Inverter

Type Terminal Screw

Size Tightening Torque

Nm R, S, T U, V, W R, S, T U, V, W R, S, T U, V, W

FR-B-750 to 3700, FR-B3-(N)H400 to 3700 M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 14 14

FR-B3-(N)H5.5K M4 1.5 5.5-4 2-4 3.5 2 12 14 FR-B-7.5K, FR-B3-(N)H7.5K M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 3.5 3.5 12 12

FR-B3-(N)H11K M6 4.4 5.5-6 5.5-6 5.5 5.5 10 10 FR-B-15K FR-B3-(N)H15K, 18.5K M6 4.4 14-6 8-6 14 8 6 8

FR-B-22K, FR-B3-(N)H22K M6 4.4 22-6 14-6 22 14 4 6

FR-B3-(N)H30K M6 4.4 22-6 22-6 22 22 4 4 FR-B-37K FR-B3-(N)H37K M8 7.8 38-8 22-8 38 22 2 4

FR-B-55K M8 7.8 60-8 60-8 60 60 1/0 1/0

Note: 1. The cables used should be 75C copper cables. 2. Tighten the terminal screws to the specified torques.

Undertightening can cause a short or misoperation. Overtightening can cause the screws and unit to be damaged, resulting in a short or misoperation.

2

INSTALLATION AND WIRING

17

(4) Connection of the power supply and motor

Ground

Ground

Ground terminal

Power supply

U V W

U V W Motor

No-fuse breaker

The power supply cables must be connected to R, S, T . If they are connected to U, V, W, the inverter will be damaged. Phase sequence need not be matched.

Connect the motor to U, V, W. In the above connection, turning on the forward rotation switch (signal) rotates the motor in the counterclockwise (arrow) direction when viewed from the load shaft.

R S T

R S T

(5) Connecting the control circuit to a power supply separately from the main circuit

If the magnetic contactor (MC) in the inverter power supply is opened when the protective circuit is operated, the inverter control circuit power is lost and the alarm output signal cannot be kept on. To keep the alarm signal on terminals R1 and S1 are available. In this case, connect the power supply terminals R1 and S1 of the control circuit to the primary side of the MC.

Model FR-B-750 to 3700 (200V class, 400V class), FR-B3-(N)(H)400 to 3700

R S T

R1 S1

4) Connect the separate power supply cables for control circuit to the lower terminals (R1, S1 ).

Terminal block for main circuit

1) Loosen the upper screws 2) Remove the lower screws. 3) Remove the jumpers.

INSTALLATION AND WIRING

18

Model FR-B-5.5K to 45K (200V class), FR-B-7.5K to 55K (400V class), FR-B3-(N)(H)5.5K to 37K

MC

1) Loosen the upper screws. 2) Remove the lower screws. 3) Pull out and remove the jumper. 4) Connect the separate power supply cables for control circuit to the upper terminals (R1, S1). (Note 4)

Power supply terminal block for control circuit

Main power supply

Power supply terminal block for control circuit

R S T

R1 S1

Note: 1. When the main circuit power (R, S, T) is on, do not switch off the control power (terminals R1, S1). Otherwise the inverter may be damaged.

2. When using a separate power supply, the jumpers across R-R1 and S-S1 must be removed. Otherwise the inverter may be damaged.

3. For a different power supply system, which takes the power of the control circuit from other than the primary side of the MC, the voltage should be equal to the main circuit voltage.

4. For the FR-B-5.5K to 45K (200V class), FR-B-7.5K to 55K (400V class) and FR-B3-(N)(H)5.5K to 37K, the power supply cables must not be connected to the lower terminals. If connected, the inverter may be damaged.

5. Supplying power to only terminals R1 and S1 and entering the start signal will result in an error display (E.OC1).

2

INSTALLATION AND WIRING

19

2.2.3 Wiring of the control circuit (1) Wiring instructions

1) Terminals SD, SE and 5 are common to the I/O signals and isolated from each other. These common terminals must not be connected to each other or earthed.

2) Use shielded or twisted cables for connection to the control circuit terminals and run them away from the main and powers circuits (including the 200V relay sequence circuit).

3) The frequency-input signals to the control circuit are micro currents. When contacts are required, use two or more parallel micro signal contacts or a twin contact to prevent a contact fault.

4) It is recommended to use the cables of 0.75mm2 gauge for connection to the control circuit terminals. If the cable gauge used is 1.25mm2 or more, the front cover may be lifted when there are many cables running or the cables are run improperly, resulting in an operation panel or parameter unit contact fault.

(2) Terminal block layout

In the control circuit of the inverter, the terminals are arranged as shown below: Terminal screw size: M3.5

A

RL

SE RUN SU IPF OL FU SD STF STR JOG CS

RM RH RT AU STOP MRS RES SD FM

B C PC AM 10E 10 2 5 4 1

(3) Changing the control logic

The input signals are set to sink logic. To change the control logic, the connector on the back of the control circuit terminal block must be moved to the other position. (The output signals may be used in either the sink or source logic independently of the connector position.)

1) Loosen the two mounting screws in both ends of the control circuit terminal block. (The screws cannot be removed.) With both hands, pull down the terminal block from the back of the control circuit terminals.

2) Remove the connector from the rear surface of the control circuit terminal block and place in required Logic position (either Sink or Source).

CON1

SIN K

C O

N 3

C O

N 2

SO U

R C

E

SIN K

C O

N 3

C O

N 2

SO U

R C

E

INSTALLATION AND WIRING

20

3) Using cares not to bend the pins of the control circuit connector, reinstall the control circuit terminal block and fix it with the mounting screws.

Note: 1. Make sure that the control circuit connector is fitted correctly. 2. While power is on, never disconnect the control circuit terminal block. 3. The sink-source logic changeover connector must be fitted in only one of those positions. If it is

fitted in both positions at the same time, the inverter may be damaged.

4) Sink logic type In this logic, a signal switches on when a current flows out of the corresponding signal input terminal.

Terminal SD is common to the contact input signals. Terminal SE is common to the open collector output signals.

R

R

STF

STR

SD

Current

RUN

SE

1

9

R

R

DC24V

AX40Current flow related to RUN signal

Inverter

When using an external power supply for transistor output, use terminal PC as a common to prevent misoperation caused by leakage current. (Do not connect terminal SD of the inverter with terminal 0V of the external power supply.)

1

2

3

4

5

6

9

10 DC 24V SD

PC

RES

RL

RM

RH

STR

STF DC24V (SD)

AY40 type transistor output module

Inverter

2

INSTALLATION AND WIRING

21

5) Source logic type In this logic, a signal switches on when a current flows into the corresponding signal input terminal.

Terminal PC is common to the contact input signals. Terminal SE is common to the open collector output signals.

PC

STF

STR R

R

Current

DC24V

RUN

SE

1

9

R

R

Current flow related to RUN signal AX80Inverter

When using an external power supply for transistor output, use terminal SD as a common to prevent misoperation caused by leakage current.

AY-80 9

1

2

10

PC

STF

STR

SD

DC24V (SD)

D C

24 V

Inverter

(4) How to use terminals "STOP", "CS" and "PC"

1) Using the "STOP" terminal A connection example (for sink logic) for self-holding the start signal (forward rotation, reverse rotation) is shown on the right.

2) Using the "CS" terminal This terminal is used to perform automatic restart after instantaneous power failure. Connect terminals CS-SD and set a value other than "9999" in Pr. 57 "coasting time for automatic restart after instantaneous power failure".

MRS

RES

SD STF

STR

STOP

Reverse rotation

Stop

Forward rotation

CS SD

(Short)

3) Using the "PC" terminal This terminal can be used as 24VDC power output using SD as a common terminal. Specifications: 18V to 26VDC, 0.1A permissible current Note that the wiring length should be within 30m. Do not short terminals PC-SD. When terminal PC is used as a 24V power supply, leakage current from transistor output cannot be prevented.

INSTALLATION AND WIRING

22

2.2.4 Connection to the PU connector (1) When connecting the operation panel or parameter unit using a connection cable

Parameter unit connection cable (FR-CB2) (option) or the following connector and cable. Connector: RJ45 connector

Example: 5-554720-3, Nippon AMP Cable: Cable conforming to EIA568 (e.g. 10BASE-T cable)

Example: SGLPEV 0.5mm4P, MITSUBISHI CABLE INDUSTRIES, LTD.

Note: The maximum wiring length is 20m.

(2) For RS-485 communication

With the operation panel disconnected, the PU connector can be used for communication operation from a personal computer etc. When the PU connector is connected with a personal, FA or other computer by a communication cable, a user program allows the inverter to be run and monitored and the parameter values to be read and written. Viewed from the inverter (receptacle side) front

1) SG 2) P5S 3) RDA 4) SDB

5) SDA 6) RDB 7) SG 8) P5S1)

8)

Note: 1. Do not connect the PU connector to the computer's LAN board, FAX modem socket or telephone modular connector. Otherwise, the product may be damaged due to electrical specification differences.

2. Pins 2) and 8) (P5S) provide power to the operation unit or parameter unit. Do not use these pins for RS-485 communication.

2

INSTALLATION AND WIRING

23

1) When a computer having a RS-485 interface is used with several inverters

Computer

Inverter

Station 1

RS-485 interface/terminal

10BASE-T cable

Terminal resistor Distribution terminal

(Note 2)

PU connector (Note 1)

Inverter

Station 2

PU connector (Note 1)

Inverter

Station n

PU connector (Note 1)

Use the connector and cables, which are available on the market. Note: 1. Connector: RJ45 connector

Example: 5-554720-3, Nippon AMP Co., Ltd. 2. Cable: Cable conforming to EIA568 (such as 10BASE-T cable)

Example: SGLPEV 0.5mm4P, Mitsubishi Cable Industries, Ltd.

2) When a computer having a RS-232C interface is used with inverters

Computer

Terminal resistor

Max. 15mRS-232C connector

RS-485 terminal

Converter*

10BASE-T cable Distribution terminal

RS-232C cable

*Converter available on the market is required. (Note 3)

(Note 2)

Inverter

Station 1

PU connector (Note 1)

Inverter

Station 2

PU connector (Note 1)

Inverter

Station n

PU connector (Note 1)

Use the connector, cables and converter, which are available on the market. Note: 1. Connector: RJ45 connector

Example: Nippon AMP Co., Ltd. 2. Cable: Cable conforming to EIA568 (such as 10BASE-T cable)

Example: SGLPEV 0.5mm4P, Mitsubishi Cable Industries, Ltd. 3.* Commercially available converter examples

Model: FA-T-RS40 Converter Nagoya Sales Office, Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.

INSTALLATION AND WIRING

24

1) Wiring of one computer and one inverter

Computer Side Terminals

Signal name Description

RDA RDB SDA

SDB RSA RSB

CSA CSB

SG

FG

Receive data Receive data

Send data

Send data Request to send Request to send

Able to send

Able to send

Signal ground

Frame ground

PU connector

SDA SDB

RDA RDB

SG

(Note 1)

0.3mm or more2

Cable connection and signal direction 10BASE-T Cable

Inverter

2) Wiring of one computer and "n" inverters (several inverters)

(Note 1)

Computer

Station 1 Station 2 Station n

Inverter Inverter Inverter

Termination resistor (Note 2)

Cable connection and signal direction 10 BASE-T Cable

SDB

SDA

RDB

RDA

FG

SG

CSB

CSA

RSB

RSA

SG

R D

B

R D

A

SD B

SD A

SG

R D

B

R D

A

SD B

SD A

SG

R D

B

R D

A

SD B

SD A

Note: 1. Make connections in accordance with the instruction manual of the computer used. Fully check the terminal numbers of the computer as they differ between models.

2. There may be the influence of reflection depending on the transmission speed and/or transmission distance. If this reflection hinders communication, provide a termination resistor. If the PU connector is used to make a connection, use the distributor as a termination resistor cannot be fitted. Connect the termination resistor to only the inverter remotest from the computer. (Termination resistor: 100)

2

INSTALLATION AND WIRING

25

2.2.5 Connection of stand-alone option units

The inverter accepts a variety of stand-alone option units as required. Incorrect connection will cause inverter damage or accident. Connect and operate the option unit carefully in accordance with the corresponding option unit manual.

(1) Connection of the dedicated external brake resistor (option) (FR-B3 series only)

The built-in brake resistor is connected across terminals P and PR. Fit the external dedicated brake resistor (option) instead when the built-in brake resistor does not have enough thermal capability for high-duty operation. Remove the jumper from across terminals PR-PX and connect the dedicated brake resistor (option) across terminals P-PR. (For the positions of terminals P and PR, refer to the terminal block arrangement (page14).)

Note: 1. The brake resistor connected should only be the dedicated brake resistor. 2. The jumper across terminals PR-PX must be disconnected before connecting the dedicated

brake resistor. A failure to do so may damage the inverter. 3. When using this option, the explosion-proof certification test is required separately.

Model.............. FR-B3-(N)(H)400 to 3700 1) Remove the screws in terminals PR and PX and remove the jumper. 2) Connect the brake resistor across terminals P-PR.

(The jumper should remain disconnected.)

Removal of jumper FR-B3-(N)400, 750 FR- B3-(N)1500 to 3700 FR- B3-(N)H400 to 3700

Terminal PX

Terminal PR

Jumper

Terminal PR

Terminal P

Terminal PR Terminal P

Model.............. FR- B3-(N)(H)5.5K, 7.5K 1) Remove the screws in terminals PR and PX and remove the jumper. 2) Connect the brake resistor across terminals P-PR.

(The jumper should remain disconnected.)

Removal of jumper FR- B3-(N)(H)5.5K, 7.5K

Jumper

Terminal PR

Terminal PX

Terminal PRTerminal P

INSTALLATION AND WIRING

26

(2) Connection of the FR-BU brake unit (option)

Connect the optional FR-BU brake unit as shown below to improve the braking capability during deceleration.

MC R

S T

U

V W

P

N

PR

PX

IM

PR P/+

N/-

HA HB

HC

Brake unit FR-BU-(H)

Resistor unit FR-BR-(H)

THS TH2

TH1

PPR

ON

MC OFF

MC

Remove jumper.

Inverter

Motor

T (Note 4)

Note: 1. Connect the inverter terminals (P, N) and FR-BU brake unit terminals so that their terminal signals match with each other. (Incorrect connection will damage the inverter.) For model 7.5K or less, the jumper across terminals PR-PX must be removed.

2. The wiring distance between the inverter, brake unit and resistor unit should be within 5m. If twisted wires are used, the distance should be within 10m.

3. If the transistors in the brake unit should fail, the resistor will be extremely hot, causing a fire. Therefore, install a magnetic contactor on the inverter's power supply side to shut off a current in case of failure.

4. For the power supply of 400V class, install a voltage-reducing transformer. 5. When using this option, the explosion-proof certification test is required separately.

2

INSTALLATION AND WIRING

27

(3) Connection of the conventional BU brake unit (option)

Connect the BU brake unit correctly as shown below. Incorrect connection will damage the inverter.

MC R

S T

U

V W

IM

Inverter

HCHBHA TB

HC HB ON

MC MC

OFF

P N

P OCR

PR

OCR

N

NFB

PC

Brake unit

Remove jumpers.

Discharge resistor

Constant- voltage power supply

BU brake unit Comparator

Motor

T (Note 4)

+ -

Note: 1. For models 7.5K or less, remove the jumper across terminals PR-PX. 2. The wiring distance between the inverter, brake unit and discharge resistor should be within

2m. If twisted wires are used, the distance should be within 5m.

3. If the transistors in the brake unit should fail, the resistor will be extremely hot, causing a fire. Therefore, install a magnetic contactor on the inverter's power supply side to shut off current in case of failure.

4. For the power supply of 400V class, install a voltage-reducing transformer. 5. When using this option, the explosion-proof certification test is required separately.

(4) Connection of the FR-HC high power factor converter (option) (FR-B3 series only) When connecting the high power factor converter (FR-HC) to suppress power harmonics, wire as shown below. Wrong connection will damage the high power factor converter and inverter. After making sure that the wiring is correct, set "2" in Pr. 30 "regenerative function selection".

X10 (Note 3)

X11 (Note 3)

N

P

R1

S1

RES

SD

T

S (Note 1)

R

NFB

R S T R4 S4 T4 N P Y1 or Y2 RDY RSO SE

Inverter

(Note 1)

High power factor converter (FR-HC)

From FR-HCL02

Power supply

MC1 MC2

External box MC1 MC2

FR-HCL01

R4 S4 T4

R3 S3 T3

R2 S2 T2

R S T

INSTALLATION AND WIRING

28

Note: 1. Remove the jumpers across the R-R1 and S-S1 terminals of the inverter, and connect the control circuit power supply across the R1-S1 terminals. The power input terminals R, S, T must be open. Incorrect connection will damage the inverter. Reverse polarity of terminals N, P will damage the inverter.

2. The voltage phases of terminals R, S, T and terminals R4, S4, T4 must be matched before connection.

3. Use Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 (input terminal function selection) to assign the terminals used with the X10 and X11 signals.

4. When the FR-HC is connected, use sink logic (factory setting). For source logic, the FR-HC cannot be connected.

5. When using this option, the explosion-proof certification test is required separately, except when using the high power factor converter (FR-HC) for power factor improvement.

(5) Connection of the FR-RC power return converter (option)

(For power coordination, always install the power factor-improving reactor (FR-BAL).) When connecting the FR-RC power return converter, connect the inverter terminals (P, N) and FR-RC power return converter terminals as shown below so that their signals match with each other. For details, refer to the FR-RC power return converter manual.

N P

NFB FR-BAL R/L1 S/L2 T/L3

P/+ N/-

FR-RC power return converter

Power supply

Inverter R S T

Note: 1. For models 7.5K or less, the jumper across terminals PR-PX must be removed. 2. How to connect the FR-BAL power factor improving AC reactor (option)

When using two or more inverters in the same system, small impedance between the inverters will cause a regenerative current from the power return converter to leak into the other inverters, resulting in overcurrent alarm of the other inverters. To prevent this, install a power factor improving AC reactor on the power supply side for all the inverters.

3. When using this option, the explosion-proof certification test is required separately.

(6) Connection of the power factor improving DC reactor (option)

Connect the FR-BEL power factor improving DC reactor between terminals P1-P. In this case, the jumper connected across terminals P1-P must be removed. Otherwise, the reactor will not function.

P1 P FR-BEL

Remove the jumper.

Note: 1. The wiring distance should be within 5m. 2. The size of the cables used should be equal to or larger than that of the power supply cables

(R, S, T).

2

INSTALLATION AND WIRING

29

2.2.6 Design information

1) If the machine must not be restarted when power is restored after a power failure, provide a magnetic contactor in the inverter's primary circuit and also make up a sequence, which will not switch on the start signal. If the start signal (start switch) remains on after a power failure, the inverter will automatically restart as soon as the power is restored.

2) When the power supply used with the control circuit is different from the one used with the main circuit, make up a circuit which will switch off the main circuit power supply terminals R, S, T when the power supply terminals R1, S1 for the control circuit are switched off.

3) Since the input signals to the control circuit are on a low level, use two parallel micro signal contacts or a twin contact for contact inputs to prevent a contact fault.

4) Do not apply a large voltage to the contact input terminals (e.g. STF) of the control circuit.

5) Do not apply a voltage directly to the alarm output signal terminals (A, B, C). Always apply a voltage to these terminals via a relay coil, lamp, etc.

6) Make sure that the specifications and rating match the system requirements.

3) Low-level signal contacts

Twin contactLow-level signal contacts

2.3 Other wiring INSTALLATION AND WIRING

30

2.3 Other Wiring

2.3.1 Power harmonics Power harmonics may be generated from the converter section of the inverter, affecting power supply equipment, power capacitors, etc. Power harmonics are different in generation source, frequency and transmission path from radio frequency (RF) noise and leakage currents. Take the following measures.

The differences between harmonics and RF noise are indicated below: Item Harmonics RF Noise

Frequency Normally 40 to 50th degrees, 3kHz or less High frequency (several 10kHz to MHz order) Environment To wire paths, power impedance Accross spaces, distance, laying paths Quantitative understanding Logical computation is possible Occurs randomly, quantitative understanding is difficult.

Generated amount Approximately proportional to load capacity According to current fluctuation rate (larger with faster switching)

Immunity of affected device Specified in standards for each device. Differs according to makers device specifications. Example of safeguard Install a reactor. Increase the distance.

Safeguard

The harmonic current generated from the inverter to the power supply differs according to various conditions such as the wiring impedance, whether a power factor improving reactor is used or not, and output frequency and output current on the load side. For the output frequency and output current, the adequate method is to obtain them under rated load at the maximum operating frequency.

NFB

IMInverter

Power factor improving DC reactor

Motor

Do not insert power factor improving capacitor

Power factor improving AC reactor

Note: A power factor improving capacitor or surge suppressor on the inverters output may overheat or be damaged due to the harmonics of the inverter output. Also, when an overcurrent flows in the inverter, the overcurrent protection is activated, Hence, when the inverter drives the motor, do not install a capacitor or surge suppressor on the inverters output. To improve the power factor, insert a power factor improving reactor in the inverters input or DC circuit. For details, refer to the FR-A500/E500 series technical information.

2

INSTALLATION AND WIRING

31

2.3.2 Japanese harmonic suppression guidelines

Harmonic currents flow from the inverter to a power receiving point via a power transformer. The harmonic suppression guidelines were established to protect other consumers from these outgoing harmonic currents. 1) "Harmonic suppression guideline for household appliances and general-purpose products"

This guideline was issued by the Ministry of International Trade and Industries in September, 1994 and applies to 200V class inverters of 3.7kW and less. By installing the FR-BEL or FR-BAL power factor improving reactor, inverters comply with the "harmonic suppression techniques for transistorized inverters (input current 20A or less)" established by the Japan Electrical Manufacturers' Association. Therefore install the optional reactor for the 200V class, 3.7kW or less inverter.

2) "Harmonic suppression guideline for specific consumers" This guideline sets forth the maximum values of harmonic currents outgoing from a high-voltage or especially high-voltage consumer who will install, add or renew harmonic generating equipment. If any of the maximum values are exceeded, this guideline requires that consumer to take certain suppression measures.

Table 1 Maximum Values of Outgoing Harmonic Currents per 1kW Contract Power Received Power

Voltage 5th 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23rd Over 23rd

6.6kV 3.5 2.5 1.6 1.3 1.0 0.9 0.76 0.70 22kV 1.8 1.3 0.82 0.69 0.53 0.47 0.39 0.36 33kV 1.2 0.86 0.55 0.46 0.35 0.32 0.26 0.24

(1) Application of the harmonic suppression guideline for specific consumers New installation/addition/renewal of equipment

Sum of equivalent capacities

Over reference capacity

Is outgoing harmonic cur- rent equal to or lower than

maximum value ?

Over maximum value

Not more than maximum value

Not more than reference capacity

Calculation of equivalent capacity sum

Calculation of outgoing harmomic current

Harmomic suppression technique is required.

Harmomic suppression technique is not required.

Table 2 Conversion Factors for FR-B, B3 Series Class Circuit Type Conversion Factor Ki

Without reactor K31 = 3.4 With reactor (AC side) K32 = 1.8 With reactor (DC side) K33 = 1.83 3-phase bridge

(Capacitor-smoothed) With reactors (AC, DC sides) K34 = 1.4

INSTALLATION AND WIRING

32

Table 3 Equivalent Capacity Limits Received Power Voltage Reference Capacity

6.6kV 50kVA 22/33kV 300kVA

66kV or more 2000kVA

Table 4 Harmonic Content (Values at the fundamental current of 100%) Reactor 5th 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23rd 25th

Not used 65 41 8.5 7.7 4.3 3.1 2.6 1.8 Used (AC side) 38 14.5 7.4 3.4 3.2 1.9 1.7 1.3 Used (DC side) 30 13 8.4 5.0 4.7 3.2 3.0 2.2 Used (AC, DC sides) 28 9.1 7.2 4.1 3.2 2.4 1.6 1.4

1) Calculation of equivalent capacity (P0) of harmonic generating equipment The equivalent capacity is the capacity of a 6-pulse converter converted from the capacity of consumers harmonic generating equipment and is calculated with the following equation. If the sum of equivalent capacities is higher than the limit in Table 3, harmonics must be calculated with the following procedure:

P0 = (Ki Pi) [kVA] Ki: Conversion factor (refer to Table 2) Pi: Rated capacity of harmonic generating equipment* [kVA] i : Number indicating the conversion circuit type

* Rated capacity: Determined by the capacity of the applied motor and found in Table 5. It should be noted that the rated capacity used here is used to calculate generated harmonic amount and is different from the power supply capacity required for actual inverter drive.

2) Calculation of outgoing harmonic current Outgoing harmonic current = fundamental wave current (value converted from received power voltage) operation ratio harmonic content

Operation ratio: Operation ratio = actual load factor operation time ratio during 30 minutes Harmonic content: Found in Table 4.

Table 5 Rated Capacities and Outgoing Harmonic Currents for Inverter Drive

Rated Current [A]

Fundamental Wave Current

Converted from 6.6kV

Rated Capacity

Fundamental Wave Current Converted from 6.6kV (No reactor, 100% operation ratio)

Applied Motor (kW)

200V 400V (mA) (kVA) 5th 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23rd 25th 0.4 0.81 49 0.57 31.85 20.09 4.165 3.773 2.107 1.519 1.274 0.882 0.75 1.37 83 0.97 53.95 34.03 7.055 6.391 3.569 2.573 2.158 1.494 1.5 2.75 167 1.95 108.6 68.47 14.20 12.86 7.181 5.177 4.342 3.006 2.2 3.96 240 2.81 156.0 98.40 20.40 18.48 10.32 7.440 6.240 4.320 3.7

Not applied

6.50 394 4.61 257.1 161.5 33.49 30.34 16.94 12.21 10.24 7.092 5.5 19.1 9.55 579 6.77 376.1 237.4 49.22 44.58 24.90 17.95 15.05 10.42 7.5 25.6 12.8 776 9.07 504.4 318.2 65.96 59.75 33.37 24.06 20.18 13.97 11 36.9 18.5 1121 13.1 728.7 459.6 95.29 86.32 48.20 34.75 29.15 20.18 15 49.8 24.9 1509 17.6 980.9 618.7 128.3 116.2 64.89 46.78 39.24 27.16

18.5 61.4 30.7 1860 21.8 1209 762.6 158.1 143.2 79.98 57.66 48.36 33.48 22 73.1 36.6 2220 25.9 1443 910.2 188.7 170.9 95.46 68.82 57.72 39.96 30 98.0 49.0 2970 34.7 1931 1218 252.5 228.7 127.7 92.07 77.22 53.46 37 121 60.4 3660 42.8 2379 1501 311.1 281.8 157.4 113.5 95.16 65.88 45 147 73.5 4450 52.1 2893 1825 378.3 342.7 191.4 138.0 115.7 80.10 55 180 89.9 5450 63.7 3543 2235 463.3 419.7 234.4 169.0 141.7 98.10

2

INSTALLATION AND WIRING

33

3) Harmonic suppression technique requirement If the outgoing harmonic current is higher than; maximum value per 1kW (contract power) contract power, a harmonic suppression technique is required.

4) Harmonic suppression techniques No. Item Description

1 Reactor installation (ACL, DCL)

Install a reactor (ACL) in the AC side of the inverter or a reactor (DCL) in its DC side or both to suppress outgoing harmonic currents.

2 Installation of power factor improving capacitor

When used with a series reactor, the power factor improving capacitor has an effect of absorbing harmonic currents.

3 Transformer multi- phase operation

Use two transformers with a phase angle difference of 30 as in -, - combination to provide an effect corresponding to 12 pulses, reducing low-degree harmonic currents.

4 AC filter A capacitor and a reactor are used together to reduce impedance at specific frequencies, producing a great effect of absorbing harmonic currents.

5 Active filter

This filter detects the current of a circuit generating a harmonic current and generates a harmonic current equivalent to a difference between that current and a fundamental wave current to suppress a harmonic current at a detection point, providing a great effect of absorbing harmonic currents.

INSTALLATION AND WIRING

34

2.3.3 Inverter-generated noises and reduction techniques

Some noises enter the inverter causing it to misoperate and others are radiated by the inverter causing misoperation of peripheral devices. Though the inverter is designed to be insusceptible to noise, it handles low-level signals, so it requires the following basic measures to be taken. If these noises cause peripheral devices to misoperate, measures should be taken to suppress the noise. The measures differ slightly depending on noise propagation paths.

1) Basic measures Do not run the power cables (I/O cables) and signal cables of the inverter in parallel with each other and do not bundle them. Use twisted shielded cables for the detector connection and control signal cables and connect the sheathes of the shielded cables to terminal SD. Ground the inverter, motor, etc. at one point.

2) Measures against noises which enter and cause misoperation of the inverter When devices which generate many noises (which use magnetic contactors, magnetic brakes, many relays, for example) are installed near the inverter and the inverter may be effected by noise, the following measures must be taken: Provide surge suppressors for devices that generate noise to suppress noise. Fit data line filters (Refer to page 36) to signal cables. Ground the shields of the detector connection and control signal cables with cable clamp metal.

3) Measures against noise, which is radiated by the inverter causing misoperation of peripheral devices. Inverter-generated noise is largely classified into those radiated by the cables connected to the inverter and inverter main circuit (I/O), those electromagnetically and electrostatically inducted to the signal cables of the peripheral devices close to the main circuit power supply, and those transmitted through the power supply cables.

Air-propagated noise

Magnetic induction noise

Static induction noise

Cable-propagated noise

Noise directly radi- ated by inverter

Noise radiated by power cables

Noise radiated by motor cables

Noise propagated through power cables

Noise from ground cable due to leakage current

Path 4),5)

Path 6)

Path 1)

Path 2)

Path 3)

Path 7)

Path 8)

Inverter-generated noise

2

INSTALLATION AND WIRING

35

IM

In- verterInstrument

Telephone

Motor Sensor

5)

7) 2)

1)

7)

3) 2)

8)

3)

4) 6)

Receiver Sensor power supply

Noise Path Measures

1) 2) 3)

When devices which handle low-level signals and are susceptible to misoperation due to noise (such as instruments, receivers and sensors) are installed near the inverter and their signal cables are contained in the same panel as the inverter or are run near the inverter, the devices may be effected by air-propagated noises and the following measures must be taken: (1) Install easily affected devices as far away as possible from the inverter. (2) Run easily affected signal cables as far away as possible from the inverter. (3) Do not run the signal cables and power cables (inverter I/O cables) in parallel with each other and do not

bundle them. (4) Inset line noise filters into I/O and radio noise filters into input side to suppress cable-radiated noises. (5) Use shielded cables for signal cables and power cables and run them in individual metal conduits to reduce

further effects.

4) 5) 6)

When the signal cables are run in parallel with or bundled with the power cables, magnetic and static induction noise may be propagated to the signal cables to effect the devices and the following measures must be taken: (1) Install easily affected devices as far away as possible from the inverter. (2) Run easily affected signal cables as far away as possible form the inverter. (3) Do not run the signal cables and power cables (inverter I/O cables) in parallel with each other and do not

bundle them. (4) Use shield cables for signal cables and power cables and run them in individual metal conduits to reduce

further effects.

7)

When the power supplies of the peripheral devices are connected to the power supply of the inverter within the same line, inverter-generated noise may flow back through the power supply cables to misoperate the devices and the following measures must be taken: (1) Install the radio noise filter (FR-BIF) to the power cables (input cables) of the inverter. (2) Install the line noise filter (FR-BLF, FR-BSF01) to the power cables (I/O cables) of the inverter.

8) When connecting the peripheral device wiring to the inverter forms a closed loop circuit, leakage current may flow through the ground cable of the inverter to effect the device. In such a case, disconnection of the ground cable of the device may cause the device to operate properly.

INSTALLATION AND WIRING

36

Data line filter Noise entry can be prevented by providing a data line filter for the detector cable etc.

Example of counter measures against noise

FR- BLF

FR- BIF

FR- BLF

Install filter (FR-BLF,FR- BSF01) to inverter input side.

Control box

Install filter (FR-BLF,FR-BSF01) to inverter output side.

Use 4-core cable for motor power cable and use one cable as ground cable.

Use twisted pair shielded cable.

Sensor

Do not ground shield but connect it to signal common cable.Do not ground control box directly.

Control power supply

Separate inverter and power line 30cm or more (at least 10cm) from sensor circuit.

Install filter FR-BIF to inverter input side.

Inverter power supply

Power supply for sensor

Inverter Motor

Do not ground control cable.

In the AM radio broadcasting frequency band, fitting the FR-BIF on the input side produces a great effect. The FR-BSF01 and FR-BLF are designed to reduce a noise terminal voltage* in a wide frequency band and

are therefore effective to prevent sensors and so on from malfunctioning. By using shielded cables as signal cables, induction noise can be reduced greatly (to 1/10 - 1/100). *Noise terminal voltage: Represents the magnitude of noise propagated from the inverter to the power supply.

2

INSTALLATION AND WIRING

37

2.3.4 Leakage currents and countermeasures

Due to the static capacitance existing in the inverter I/O wiring and motor, leakage currents flow through them. Since their values depend on the static capacitance, etc., take countermeasures using the following methods.

(1) To-ground leakage currents

Leakage currents may flow not only into the inverter's own line but also into the other line through the ground cable, etc. These leakage currents may operate earth leakage circuit breakers and earth leakage relays unnecessarily.

Countermeasures Use earth leakage circuit breakers designed for harmonics and surges (e.g. Mitsubishi's Progressive

Super Series) in the inverter's own line and other line.

To-ground leakage current Note that a long wiring length will increase leakage currents. Higher motor capacity leads to larger leakage currents. Larger leakage currents occur in 400V class than

in 200V class.

(2) Line-to-line leakage currents

Harmonics of leakage currents flowing in static capacities between the inverter output cables may operate the external thermal relay unnecessarily. When the wiring length is long (50m or more) for the 400V class small- capacity model (7.5kW or less), the external thermal relay is likely to operate unnecessarily because the ratio of the leakage current to the rated motor current increases.

IM

NFB

Line-to-Line Leakage Current Path

Power supply Inverter

Thermal relay

Line static capacitances

Motor

Countermeasures Use the electronic overcurrent protection (Pr. 9) of the inverter.

To ensure that the motor is protected against line-to-line leakage currents, it is recommended to use a temperature sensor to directly detect motor temperature.

INSTALLATION AND WIRING

38

2.3.5 Peripheral devices (1) Selection of peripheral devices

Check the capacity of the motor to be used with the inverter you purchased. Appropriate peripheral devices must be selected according to the capacity. Refer to the following list and prepare appropriate peripheral devices:

1) 200V class No-Fuse Breaker or Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker

Motor Output (kW) Power Supply Capacity (kVA) Standard With power factor

improving reactor

Magnetic Contactor

0.4 1.5 Type NF30, NV30 5A Type NF30, NV30 5A S-N10 0.75 2.5 Type NF30, NV30 10A Type NF30, NV30 10A S-N10 1.5 4.5 Type NF30, NV30 15A Type NF30, NV30 15A S-N10 2.2 5.5 Type NF30, NV30 20A Type NF30, NV30 15A S-N11,S-N12 3.7 9 Type NF30, NV30 30A Type NF30, NV30 30A S-N20 5.5 12 Type NF50, NV50 50A Type NF50, NV50 40A S-N25 7.5 17 Type NF100, NV100 60A Type NF50, NV50 50A S-N35 11 20 Type NF100, NV100 75A Type NF100, NV100 75A S-K50 15 28 Type NF225, NV225 125A Type NF100, NV100 100A S-K65

18.5 34 Type NF225, NV225 150A Type NF225, NV225 125A S-K80 22 41 Type NF225, NV225 175A Type NF225, NV225 150A S-K95 30 52 Type NF225, NV225 225A Type NF225, NV225 175A S-K125 37 66 Type NF400, NV400 250A Type NF225, NV225 225A S-K150 45 80 Type NF400, NV400 300A Type NF400, NV400 300A S-K180

2) 400V class No-Fuse Breaker or Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker

Motor Output (kW) Power Supply Capacity (kVA) Standard With power factor

improving reactor

Magnetic Contactor

0.4 1.5 Type NF30, NV30 5A Type NF30, NV30 5A S-N10 0.75 2.5 Type NF30, NV30 5A Type NF30, NV30 5A S-N10 1.5 4.5 Type NF30, NV30 10A Type NF30, NV30 10A S-N10 2.2 5.5 Type NF30, NV30 15A Type NF30, NV30 10A S-N11,S-N12 3.7 9 Type NF30, NV30 20A Type NF30, NV30 15A S-N20 5.5 12 Type NF30, NV30 30A Type NF30, NV30 20A S-N20 7.5 17 Type NF30, NV30 30A Type NF30, NV30 30A S-N20 11 20 Type NF50, NV50 50A Type NF50, NV50 40A S-N20 15 28 Type NF100, NV100 60A Type NF50, NV50 50A S-N25

18.5 34 Type NF100, NV100 75A Type NF100, NV100 60A S-N35 22 41 Type NF100, NV100 100A Type NF100, NV100 75A S-K50 30 52 Type NF225, NV225 125A Type NF225, NV225 100A S-K65 37 66 Type NF225, NV225 150A Type NF225, NV225 125A S-K80 55 100 Type NF225, NV225 200A Type NF225, NV225 175A S-K125

2

INSTALLATION AND WIRING

39

(2) Selection the rated sensitivity current for the earth leakage circuit breaker

When using the earth leakage circuit breaker with the inverter circuit, select its rated sensitivity current as follows, independent of the carrier frequency setting: Progressive Super Series (Type SP, CF, SF, CP)

Rated sensitivity current: ln 10 (lg1 + lgn + lg2 + lgm)

Conventional NV series (Type CA, CS, SS produced prior to 91) Rated sensitivity current: ln 10 {lg1 + lgn + 3 (lg2+lgm)}

lg1, lg2 : leakage currents of cable path during commercial power supply operation

lgn* : leakage current of noise filter on inverter input side

lgm : leakage current of motor during commercial power supply operation

Leakage current example of 3-phase induction motor during commercial power supply operation (200V 60Hz)

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

2 3.5 5.5

8 14 22 30

38 60

80 100

150

Le ak

ag e

cu rre

nt (m

A)

Cable size (mm )2

0.1 1.5 3.7

2.2 7.5 1522

11 37

30 55

45

0.2

0.3

0.5 0.7 1.0

2.0

5.5 18.5

Motor capacity (kW)

Example of leakage current per 1km in cable path during commercial power supply operation when the CV cable is routed in metal conduit (200V 60Hz)

Le ak

ag e

cu rre

nt (m

A)

NV

Ig1 Ign Ig2 Igm

5.5mm25m 5.5mm270m

IM 3 200V 2.2kW

Inverter

Noise filter

Progressive Super Series

(Type SP, CF, SF, CP)

Conventional NV (Type CA, CS,

SS)

5mLeakage current Ig1 (mA) 33 1000m = 0.17

Leakage current Ign (mA) 0 (without noise filter) 70m

Leakage current Ig2 (mA) 33 1000m

= 2.31

Motor leakage current Igm (mA) 0.18

Total leakage current (mA) 2.66 7.64 Reted sensitivity current

( Ig 10) (mA) 30 100

Note 1. The NV should be installed to the primary (power supply) side of the inverter.

2. In the connection neutral point grounded system, the sensitivity current becomes worse for ground faults in the inverter secondary side. Hence, the protective grounding of the load equipment should be 10 or less.

3. When the breaker is grounded on the secondary side of the inverter, it may be unnecessarily operated by harmonics if the effective value is less than the rating. In this case, note that the eddy current and hysteresis loss increase and temperature rises.

* For the leakage current value of the noise filter installed on the inverter input side, contact the corresponding filter manufacturer.

3

CHAPTER 3 OPERATION/CONTROL

This chapter provides the basic "operation/control" for use of this product. Always read this chapter before using the equipment.

3.1 Pre-Operation Information........................................40 3.2 About the Control Panel...........................................43 3.3 Operation .................................................................48

Before starting FR-B3 operation (1) Magnetic flux vector control (auto tuning)

For explosion-proof certification, the inverter is tested after auto tuning has been performed under magnetic flux vector control. Therefore, before using the inverter, always perform auto tuning using the following procedure during installation, and run the inverter in the magnetic flux vector control system. Do not run it in the other system (V/F control).

1) Selection of magnetic flux vector control a) Set Pr. 80 "motor capacity" and Pr. 81 "number of motor poles" according to the explosion- proof motor. b) Set Pr. 71 "applied motor" to "3 ... variable-torque motor" or "13 ... constant-torque motor".

2) Setting of auto tuning parameters a) Set Pr. 96 "auto tuning setting/status" to "101 ... tuning is performed with motor running". (Always choose "101 ... tuning is performed with motor running".) b) Set Pr. 83 "rated motor voltage" and Pr. 84 "rated motor frequency" according to the explosion-proof motor.

3) Execution of auto tuning Perform auto tuning and make sure that it has ended properly.

4) You cannot use online auto tuning. Use the Pr. 95 "online auto tuning selection" setting of "0". (2) Maximum frequency

Set Pr. 1 "maximum frequency" to meet the permissible frequency of the pressure-resistant, explosion-proof motor.

(3) PWM frequency selection 1) Non-low acoustic noise type (FR-B3-(H)400 to 37K)

Set Pr. 72 "PWM frequency selection" to 2 (2kHz). Set Pr. 240 "soft-PWM setting" to 1 (soft-PWM control valid). (Pr. 72 and Pr. 240 are factory-set.)

2) Low acoustic noise type (FR-B3-N(H)400 to 37K) Set Pr. 72 "PWM frequency selection" to 15 (14.5kHz). (Pr. 72 is factory-set.)

Note: Performing parameter clear with the parameter unit returns the parameters to the factory settings. Therefore, re-set the above parameters.

Chapter 1

Chapter 2

Chapter 3

Chapter 4

Chapter 5

Chapter 6

Chapter 7

3.1 Pre-Operation Information OPERATION/CONTROL

40

3 OPERATION/CONTROL3.1 Pre-Operation Information

3.1.1 Devices and parts to be prepared for operation The inverter can be operated in any of the "external operation mode", "PU operation mode", combined operation mode and communication operation mode. Prepare required instruments and parts according to the operation mode.

(1) External operation mode (factory setting)

The inverter is operated under the control of external operation signals (frequency setting potentiometer, start switch, etc.) connected to the terminal block. With input power on, switch on the start signal (STF, STR) to start operation. Preparation

Start signal ..............................Switch, relay, etc.

DU04 PU04

Potentiometer

Inverter

Start switch

Frequency setting signal .........0 to 5V, 0 to 10V or 4 to 20mA DC signals from a potentiometer or outside the inverter

Note: 1. Both the start signal and frequency setting signal are required to run the inverter.

(2) PU operation mode

The inverter is operated from the keypad of the PU (FR-DU04/FR-PU04). This mode does not require the operation signals to be connected and is useful for an immediate start of operation.

Preparation

DU04 PU04

Inverter

Operation unit..........................Operation panel (FR-DU04), parameter unit (FR-PU04) Connection cable ....................To be prepared for use of the operation unit away from the inverter.

FR-CB2 (option) or the following connector and cable available on the market: Connector : RJ45 connector Cable : Cable conforming to EIA568 (e.g. 10BASE-T cable)

(3) External/PU combined operation mode The inverter is operated with the external operation and PU operation modes combined in any of the following ways: 1) The start signal is set with the external signal and

the frequency setting signal set from the PU. 2) The start signal is set with the run command key of

the PU (FR-DU04/FR-PU04) and the frequency setting signal set with the external frequency setting potentiometer.

PU PU

Potentiometer

Inverter

Start switch

OPERATION/CONTROL

41

Preparation

Start signal ..............................Switch, relay, etc. (for 1)) Frequency setting signal .........0 to 5V, 0 to 10V or 4 to 20mA DC signals from a potentiometer or outside

the inverter (for 2)) Operation unit..........................Operation panel (FR-DU04), parameter unit (FR-PU04) Connection cable ....................To be prepared for use of the operation unit away from the inverter

FR-CB2 (option) or the following connector and cable available on the market: Connector : RJ45 connector Cable : Cable conforming to EIA568 (e.g. 10BASE-T cable)

3) Combined operation mode Change the setting of Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" as follows:

DescriptionSetting Running frequency setting Start signal

3 PU (FR-DU04/FR-PU04) Direct setting and [UP/DOWN] key setting,

Multi-speed setting

Terminal signal STF STR

4

Terminal signal 0 to 5VDC across 2-5 0 to 10VDC across 2-5 4 to 20mADC across 4-5 Multi-speed selection (Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24

to Pr. 27) Jog frequency (Pr. 15)

Parameter unit [FWD] key [REV] key

(4) Communication operation mode

Communication operation can be performed by connecting a personal computer and the PU connector with the RS-485 communication cable.

Preparation

Connection cable ....................Connector : RJ45 connector Cable : Cable conforming to EIA568

(e.g. 10BASE-T cable) Personal computer

3

OPERATION/CONTROL

42

3.1.2 Power on

Before switching power on, check the following:

Installation check

Make sure that the inverter is installed correctly in a correct place. (Refer to page 7.) Wiring check

Make sure that the main and control circuits are wired correctly. Make sure that the options and peripheral devices are selected and connected correctly. (Refer to page 9.)

Switch power on.

Power-on is complete when the POWER lamp is lit correctly and the operation panel (FR-DU04) displays correct data.

3.2 About the Control Panel OPERATION/CONTROL

43

3.2 About the Control Panel

With the operation panel (FR-DU04), you can set the running frequency, monitor the operation command display, set parameters, display an error, and copy parameters.

3.2.1 Names and functions of the operation panel (FR-DU04)

Display LED 4 digits

[MODE] key

[SET] key

Unit indication Hz (frequency) A (current) V (voltage)

Operation status indication

[Operation command] keys [REV] (reverse rotation) key [FWD] (forward rotation) key

[STOP/RESET] key

FR-DU04 Hz A V

MON EXT PU

CONTROL PANEL

FWD

MODE

SET

REV FWD STOP

RESET

REV

[UP/DOWN] key

Key indications Key Description

[MODE] key You can select the operation mode or setting mode. [SET] key You can determine the frequency and parameter setting.

[UP/DOWN] key (

key)

Used to increase or decrease the running frequency consecutively. Hold down this key to change the frequency.

Press this key in the setting mode to change the parameter setting consecutively. [FWD] key Used to give a forward rotation command. [REV] key Used to give a reverse rotation command.

[STOP/RESET] key Used to stop operation. Used to reset the inverter when its output is stopped by the protective function activated (major fault).

Unit indications, operating status indications Indication Description

Hz Lit to indicate the frequency. A Lit to indicate the current.

V Lit to indicate the voltage.

MON Lit in the monitor display mode.

PU Lit in the PU operation mode.

EXT Lit in the external operation mode. FWD Flickers to indicate forward rotation. REV Flickers to indicate reverse rotation.

3

OPERATION/CONTROL

44

3.2.2 Monitor display changed by pressing the [MODE] key

MODE

MODE

MODE

MODE

MODE

Help modeMonitoring mode Parameter setting mode Operation mode

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

Frequency setting mode (Note)

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

Note: The frequency setting mode is displayed only in the PU operation mode.

3.2.3 Monitoring mode Operation command indications in the monitoring mode

EXT is lit to indicate external operation. PU is lit to indicate PU operation. Both EXT and PU are lit to indicate PU/external combined operation mode.

The monitor display can also be changed during operation.

MODE

SET

SET

SET

SET

SET

SET

*1

SET

*1

SET

*1

*2

To 3.2.4 Frequency setting mode (Note 3)

Frequency monitor Current monitor Voltage monitor Alarm monitor Alarm present

Alarm absent

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

Note: 1. Hold down the [SET] key marked *1 for more than 1.5 seconds to change the current monitor to the power-on monitor.

2. Hold down the [SET] key marked *2 for more than 1.5 seconds to display four errors including the most recent one.

3. Shifts to the parameter setting mode when in the external operation mode.

3.2.4 Frequency setting mode Used to set the running frequency in the PU operation mode.

Press to change the set frequency. MODE

SET

MODE

To 3.2.5 Parameter setting mode

Set frequency writeSet frequency change

To frequency monitor

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

Flicker

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

Frequency setting mode

OPERATION/CONTROL

45

3.2.5 Parameter setting mode A parameter value may either be set by updating its parameter number or setting the value digit-by-digit using the [UP/DOWN] key. To write the setting, change it and press the [SET] key 1.5 seconds. Set "1" (PU operation mode) in Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" or select the PU operation mode. Note: If parameter write cannot be performed, refer to page 185.

MODE

SET

SET

SET

SET

SET

MODE

SET

0 to 9

SET

To 3.2.6 Operation mode

Parameter number change Setting change Press for 1.5s

Setting write Flicker

Press

to change the setting.

Simultaneous input

Most significant digit flickers

Middle digit flickers Least significant digit flickers Changing the parameter number

to changePress

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

0 to 9 0 to 9

the parameter number.

Parameter setting mode

3.2.6 Operation mode

MODE

MODE

MODE

To 3.2.7 Help mode

External operation PU operation PU jog operation

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

Note: If the operation mode cannot be changed, refer to page 185.

3

OPERATION/CONTROL

46

3.2.7 Help mode

MODE

To 3.2.3 Monitoring mode

Alarm history Alarm history clear

Parameter clear All clear User clear Software version read

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

(1) Alarm history Four past alarms can be displayed with the [UP/DOWN] key. ("." is appended to the most recent alarm.) When no alarm exists, E_ _0 is displayed.

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

SET

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

Most recent alarm

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

Frequency Current Voltage Energization time

SET

At alarm occurrence

(2) Alarm history clear Clears all alarm history.

SET

SET

SET

Flicker

Cancel

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

OPERATION/CONTROL

47

(3) Parameter clear Initialises the parameter values to the factory settings. The calibration values are not initialized. (Parameter values are not cleared by setting "1" in Pr. 77 "parameter write disable selection".)

SET

SET

SET

Flicker

Cancel

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

(4) All clear Initialises the parameter values and calibration values to the factory settings.

SET

SET

SET

Flicker

Cancel

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

(5) User clear Initialises the user-set parameters. The other parameters are initialized to the factory settings.

SET

SET

SET

Flicker

Cancel

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

Performing parameter clear returns the parameters to the factory settings. For the FR-B3 series, therefore, re-set the parameters given in Chapter 3.

3.2.8 Copy mode

By using the operation panel (FR-DU04), the parameter values can be copied to another inverter. However, do not use it because the conditions of the explosion-proof certification test may be changed.

3

3.3 Operation OPERATION/CONTROL

48

3.3 Operation

3.3.1 Pre-operation checks Before starting operation, check the following:

Safety Perform test operation after making sure that safety is ensured if the machine should become out of control.

Machine Make sure that the machine is free of damage.

Parameters Set the parameter values to match the operating machine system environment.

Test operation Perform test operation and make sure that the machine operates safely under light load at a low frequency. After that, start operation. Run the FR-B3 series under advanced magnetic flux vector control.

Motor check Check that the motor is the Mitsubishi pressure-resistant, explosion-proof motor. The FR-B-750 to 45K (200V class) and FR-B-750 to 55K (400V class) should be used with the motor type of X(E)F-(N)E. The FR-B3-(H)400 to 37K should be used with the motor type of X(E)F-(N)ECA-2. The FR-B3-N(H)400 to 37K should be used with the motor type of X(E)F-(N)ECA-1.

OPERATION/CONTROL

49

3.3.2 External operation mode (Operation using external input signals)

(1) Operation at 60Hz

Step Description Image

1

Power-on Operation mode check Switch power on and make sure that the operation command indication "EXT" is lit. (If it is not lit, press the [MODE] key to choose the operation mode and press the [UP/DOWN] key to switch to external operation.)

ON

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

Start Turn on the start switch (STF or STR). The operation status indication "FWD" or "REV" flickers.

Note: The motor does not start if both the forward and reverse rotation switches are turned on. If both switches are turned on during operation, the motor decelerates to a stop.

2

Reverse rotation

Forward rotation

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

3

Acceleration Constant speed Slowly turn the potentiometer (frequency setting potentiometer) full clockwise. The frequency shown on the display increases gradually to 60.00Hz.

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

4

Deceleration Slowly turn the potentiometer (frequency setting potentiometer) full counterclockwise. The frequency shown on the display decreases gradually to 0.00Hz. The motor stops running.

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

5

Stop Turn off the start switch (STF or STR).

OFF Stop

Forward rotation

Reverse rotation

(2) External jog operation

Keep the start switch (STF or STR) on to perform operation, and switch it off to stop. 1) Set Pr. 15 "jog frequency" and Pr. 16 "jog acceleration/deceleration time". 2) Select the external operation mode. 3) Switch on the jog signal. Keep the start switch (STF or STR) on to perform operation.

Use any of Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 "input terminal function selection" to assign the terminal used for the jog signal.

3

OPERATION/CONTROL

50

3.3.3 PU operation mode (Operation using the operation panel (FR-DU04))

(1) Operation at 60Hz

While the motor is running, repeat the following steps 2 and 3 to vary the speed: Step Description Image

1

Power-on Operation mode check Switch power on and make sure that the operation command indication "PU" is lit. (If it is not lit, press the [MODE] key to choose the operation mode and press the [UP/DOWN] key to switch to PU operation.)

ON

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

2

Running frequency setting Set the running frequency to 60Hz. First, press the [MODE] key to select the frequency setting mode. Then, press the [UP/DOWN] key to change the setting, and press the [SET] key to write the frequency.

(or)

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

3

Start Press the [FWD] or [REV] key. The motor starts running. The monitoring mode is automatically selected and the output frequency is displayed.

REVFWD (or)

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

4

Stop Press the [STOP] key. The motor is decelerated to a stop.

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

(2) PU jog operation

Hold down the [FWD] or [REV] key to perform operation, and release it to stop. 1) Set Pr. 15 "jog frequency" and Pr. 16 "jog acceleration/deceleration time". 2) Select the PU jog operation. (Press the [MODE] key to choose the operation mode and press the

[UP/DOWN] key to switch to PU JOG operation.) 3) Hold down the [FWD] or [REV] key to perform operation.

(If the motor remains stopped, check Pr. 13 "starting frequency". The motor will not start if its setting is lower than the starting frequency.)

OPERATION/CONTROL

51

3.3.4 Combined operation mode (Operation using the external input signals and PU)

When entering the start signal from outside the inverter and setting the running frequency from the PU (Pr. 79 = 3) The external frequency setting signals and the PU's FWD, REV and STOP keys are not accepted. (Note)

Step Description Image

1

Power-on Switch power on.

ON

2

Operation mode selection Set "3" in Pr. 79 "operation mode selection". The combined operation mode is selected and the operation status indication "EXT" and "PU" are lit.

Flicker

Start Turn on the start switch (STF or STR).

Note: The motor does not start if both the forward and reverse rotation switches are turned on. If both switches are turned on during operation, the motor decelerates (when Pr. 250 = "9999") to a stop.

3 ON

Reverse rotation

Forward rotation

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

Running frequency setting Using the parameter unit, set the running frequency to 60Hz. The operation command indication "REV" or "FWD" is lit. Select the frequency setting mode and make step setting.

Note: Step setting is the way of changing the frequency consecutively by pressing the [UP/DOWN] key. Hold down the [UP/DOWN] key to change the frequency.

4

5

Stop Turn off the start switch (STF or STR). The motor stops running.

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

Note: The stop key is made valid when the Pr.75 "PU stop selection" value is any of 14 to 17.

3

MEMO

4

CHAPTER 4 PARAMETERS

This chapter explains the "parameters" of this product. The inverter is designed to perform simple variable-speed operation with the factory settings of the parameters. Set the necessary parameters according to the load and operation specifications. Always read the instructions before using the equipment.

4.1 Parameter List .........................................................52 4.2 Parameter Function Details......................................63

Note: By making parameter settings, you can change the functions of contact input terminals RL, RM, RH, RT, AU, JOG, CS and open collector output terminals RUN, SU, IPF, OL, FU. Therefore, signal names corresponding to the functions are used in the description of this chapter (except in the wiring examples). Note that they are not terminal names.

Chapter 1

Chapter 2

Chapter 3

Chapter 4

Chapter 5

Chapter 6

Chapter 7

4.1 Parameter List PARAMETERS

52

4 PARAMETERS4.1 Parameter List

4.1.1 Parameter list

Setting Range Factory SettingFunc- tion

Parameter Number Name

FR-B FR-B3

Minimum Setting

Increments FR-B FR-B3

Refer To

Page:

Cus- tmer Set- ting

0 (Note 1, 11) Parameter set by manufacturer. Do not set.

1 Maximum frequency 0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz (Note 12)

0 to 120Hz 0.01Hz 60Hz 120Hz 63

2 Minimum frequency 0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz (Note 12)

0 to 120Hz 0.01Hz 0Hz 63

3 (Note 1, 11) Parameter set by manufacturer. Do not set.

4 Multi-speed setting (high speed) 0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz (Note 12)

0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 60Hz 64

5 Multi-speed setting (middle speed) 0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz (Note 12)

0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 30Hz 64

6 Multi-speed setting (low speed) 0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz (Note 12)

0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 10Hz 64

7 Acceleration time 0 to 3600 s/ 0 to 360 s

0.1 s/ 0.01 s

5 s/15 s (Note 6) 66

8 Deceleration time 0 to 3600 s/ 0 to 360 s

0.1 s/ 0.01 s

5 s/15 s (Note 6) 66

Ba si

c fu

nc tio

ns

9 Electronic thermal O/L relay 0 to 500A 0.01A Rated output current 68

10 (Note 11)

DC injection brake operation frequency

0 to 120Hz, 9999

0.01Hz 3Hz 69

11 DC injection brake operation time 0, 0.5s 0 to 10 s, 8888 0.1 s 0.5 s 69

12 (Note 11) DC injection brake voltage 0 to 30% 0.1% 4%/2%

(Note 6) 69

13 Starting frequency 0 to 60Hz 0.01Hz 0.5Hz 70 14

(Note 1, 11) Parameter set by manufacture. Do not set.

15 Jog frequency 0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz (Note 12)

0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 5Hz 71

16 Jog acceleration/deceleration time 0 to 3600 s/ 0 to 360 s

0.1 s/ 0.01 s 0.5 s 71

17 MRS input selection 0,2 1 0 72 18

(Note 11) 19

(Note 1, 11)

Parameters set by manufacturer. Do not set.

20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency

0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz (Note 12)

1 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 60Hz 66

21 Acceleration/deceleration time increments 0,1 1 0 66

22 Stall prevention operation level 0 to 200%, 9999 0.1% 150% 73

23 Stall prevention operation level compensation factor at double speed 0 to 200%, 9999 0.1% 9999 73

24 Multi-speed setting (speed 4)

0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz (Note 12),

9999

0 to 400Hz, 9999

0.01Hz 9999 64

St an

da rd

o pe

ra tio

n fu

nc tio

ns

25 Multi-speed setting (speed 5)

0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz (Note 12),

9999

0 to 400Hz, 9999

0.01Hz 9999 64

Pa ra

m et

er L

is t

PARAMETERS

53

Setting Range Factory SettingFunc- tion

Parameter Number Name

FR-B FR-B3

Minimum Setting

Increments FR-B FR-B3

Refer To

Page:

Cus- tmer Set- ting

26 Multi-speed setting (speed 6)

0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz (Note 12),

9999

0 to 400Hz, 9999

0.01Hz 9999 64

27 Multi-speed setting (speed 7)

0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz (Note 12),

9999

0 to 400Hz, 9999

0.01Hz 9999 64

28 Multi-speed input compensation 0, 1 1 0 74 29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern 0, 1, 2, 3 1 0 75 30

(Note 11) Regenerative function selection 0, 1, 2 1 0 76

31 Frequency jump 1A

0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz (Note 12),

9999

0 to 400Hz, 9999

0.01Hz 9999 78

32 Frequency jump 1B

0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz (Note 12),

9999

0 to 400Hz, 9999

0.01Hz 9999 78

33 Frequency jump 2A

0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz (Note 12),

9999

0 to 400Hz, 9999

0.01Hz 9999 78

34 Frequency jump 2B

0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz (Note 12),

9999

0 to 400Hz, 9999

0.01Hz 9999 78

35 Frequency jump 3A

0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz (Note 12),

9999

0 to 400Hz, 9999

0.01Hz 9999 78

36 Frequency jump 3B

0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz (Note 12),

9999

0 to 400Hz, 9999

0.01Hz 9999 78

St an

da rd

o pe

ra tio

n fu

nc tio

ns

37 Speed display 0,1 to 9998 1 0 79 41 Up-to-frequency sensitivity 0 to 100% 0.1% 10% 80

42 Output frequency detection 0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz (Note 12)

0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 6Hz 80

O ut

pu t t

er m

in al

fu nc

tio ns

43 Output frequency detection for reverse rotation

0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz (Note 12),

9999

0 to 400Hz, 9999

0.01Hz 9999 80

44 Second acceleration/deceleration time

0 to 3600 s/ 0 to 360 s 0.1 s/0.01 s 5 s 66

45 Second deceleration time 0 to 3600 s/0 to 360 s, 9999 0.1 s/0.01 s 9999 66

46 (Note 1, 11)

47 (Note 1, 11)

Parameter set by manufacture. Do not set.

48 Second stall prevention operation current 0 to 200% 0.1% 150% 82

49 Second stall prevention operation frequency

0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz (Note 12),

9999

0 to 400Hz, 9999

0.01 0 82

Se co

nd fu

nc tio

ns

50 Second output frequency detection 0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz (Note 12)

0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 30Hz 80

Pa ra

m et

er L

is t

4

PARAMETERS

54

Setting Range Factory SettingFunc- tion

Parameter Number Name

FR-B FR-B3

Minimum Setting

Increments FR-B FR-B3

Refer To

Page:

Cus- tmer Set- ting

52 DU/PU main display data selection 0 to 20, 22, 23, 24, 25, 100 1 0 83

53 PU level display data selection 0 to 3, 5 to 14, 17, 18 1 1 83

54 FM terminal function selection 1 to 3, 5 to 14, 17, 18, 21 1 1 83

55 Frequency monitoring reference 0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz (Note 12)

0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 60Hz 86

D is

pl ay

fu nc

tio ns

56 Current monitoring reference 0 to 500A 0.01A Rated output current 86

57 Restart coasting time 0, 0.1 to 5 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 87

Au to

m at

ic re

st ar

t fu

nc tio

ns

58 Restart cushion time 0 to 60 s 0.1 s 1.0 s 87

Ad di

tio na

l fu

nc tio

n

59 Remote setting function selection 0, 1, 2 1 0 89

60 (Note 11) Intelligent mode selection 0 to 8 1 0 90

61 (Note 11) Reference I for intelligent mode 0 to 500A,

9999 0.01A 9999 92

62 (Note 11) Ref. I for intelligent mode accel.

0 to 200%, 9999

0.1% 9999 92

63 (Note 11) Ref. I for intelligent mode decel.

0 to 200%, 9999

0.1% 9999 92

64 (Note 11) Starting frequency for elevator mode 0 to 10Hz,

9999 0.01Hz 9999 92

65 Retry selection 0 to 5 1 0 93

66 Stall prevention operation level reduction starting frequency

0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz (Note 12)

0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 60Hz 73

67 Number of retries at alarm occurrence 0 to 10,101 to 110 1 0 93

68 Retry waiting time 0 to 10 s 0.1 s 1 s 93 69 Retry count display erasure 0 0 93

70 (Note 11) Special regenerative brake duty

0 to 15%/0 to 30%/0% (Note 10)

0.1% 0% 76

71 Applied motor 0, 1 0 to 8, 13 to 18, 20,

23, 24 1 0 94

72 (Note 11) PWM frequency selection 0 to 15 1 2/15

(Note 13) 96

73 0-5V/0-10V selection 0 to 5, 10 to 15 1 1 97 74 Filter time constant 0 to 8 1 1 98

75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection 0 to 3, 14 to 17 1 14 98

76 Alarm code output selection 0, 1, 2, 3 1 0 101 77 Parameter write disable selection 0, 1, 2 1 0 102 78 Reverse rotation prevention selection 0, 1, 1 0 103

O pe

ra tio

n se

le ct

io n

fu nc

tio ns

79 Operation mode selection 0 to 8 1 0 104

Pa ra

m et

er L

is t

PARAMETERS

55

Setting Range Factory SettingFunc- tion

Parameter Number Name

FR-B FR-B3

Minimum Setting

Increments FR-B FR-B3

Refer To

Page:

Cus- tmer Set- ting

80 (Note 11) Motor capacity 0.4 to 55kW, 9999 0.01kW 9999 107

81 (Note 11) Number of motor poles 2, 4, 6, 12,

14, 16, 9999

1 9999 107

82 (Note 11) Motor exciting current (Note 4) 0 to , 9999 1 9999 108

83 (Note 11) Rated motor voltage 0 to 1000V 0.1V 200/400V (Note 2) 108

84 (Note 11) Rated motor frequency 50 to 120Hz 0.01Hz 60Hz 108 89 (Note 11) Speed control gain 0 to 200.0% 0.1% 100% 107 90 (Note 11) Motor constant (R1) (Note 4) 0 to, 9999 9999 108 91 (Note 11) Motor constant (R2) (Note 4) 0 to, 9999 9999 108 92 (Note 11) Motor constant (L1) (Note 4) 0 to, 9999 9999 108 93 (Note 11) Motor constant (L2) (Note 4) 0 to, 9999 9999 108 94 (Note 11) Motor constant (X) 0 to, 9999 9999 108

95 (Note 11) Parameter set by manufacture. Do not set. Set the value of "0" and do not alter.

Ad va

nc ed

m ag

ne tic

fl ux

v ec

to rc

on tro

l

96 (Note 11) Auto tuning setting/status 0, 1, 101 1 0 108 100

(Note 1,11) 101

(Note 1,11) 102

(Note 1,11) 103

(Note 1,11) 104

(Note 1,11) 105

(Note 1,11)

5- po

in t f

le xi

bl e

V/ F

ch ar

ac te

ris tic

s

106 (Note 1,11)

107 (Note 1,11)

108 (Note 1,11)

5- po

in t f

le xi

bl e

V/ F

ch ar

ac te

ris tic

s

109 (Note 1,11)

Parameters set by manufacturer. Do not set.

110 Third acceleration/deceleration time 0 to 3600 s/0 to 360 s, 9999 0.1 s/0.01 s 9999 66

111 Third deceleration time 0 to 3600 s/0 to 360 s, 9999 0.1 s/0.01 s 9999 66

112 (Note 1,11)

113 (Note 1,11)

Parameters set by manufacturer. Do not set.

114 Third stall prevention operation current 0 to 200% 0.1% 150% 82

115 Third stall prevention operation frequency

0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz (Note 12)

0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 0 82

Th ird

fu nc

tio ns

116 Third output frequency detection

0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz (Note 12),

9999

0 to 400Hz, 9999

0.01Hz 9999 80

4 Pa

ra m

et er

L is

t

PARAMETERS

56

Setting Range Factory SettingFunc- tion

Parameter Number Name

FR-B FR-B3

Minimum Setting

Increments FR-B FR-B3

Refer To

Page:

Cus- tmer Set- ting

117 Station number 0 to 31 1 0 113 118 Communication speed 48, 96, 192 1 192 113

119 Stop bit length 0, 1 (data length 8) 10, 11 (data length 7) 1 1 113

120 Parity check presence/absence 0, 1, 2 1 2 113 121 Number of communication retries 0 to 10, 9999 1 1 113 122 Communication check time interval 0, 0.1 to 999.8 s, 9999 0.1 s 0 113 123 Waiting time setting 0 to 150ms, 9999 1ms 9999 113

C om

m un

ic at

io n

fu nc

tio ns

124 CRLF presence/absence selection 0,1,2 1 1 113 128 PID action selection 10, 11, 20, 21 10 125 129 PID proportional band 0.1 to 1000%, 9999 0.1% 100% 125 130 PID integral time 0.1 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 1 s 125 131 Upper limit 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 125 132 Lower limit 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 125 133 PID action set point for PU operation 0 to 100% 0.01% 0% 125

PI D

c on

tro l

134 PID differential time 0.01 to 10.00 s, 9999 0.01 s 9999 125

135

136

137

138

C om

m er

ci al

p ow

er s

up pl

y- in

ve rte

r s w

itc h-

ov er

139

Parameters set by manufacturer. Do not set.

140 Backlash acceleration stopping frequency (Note 7)

0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz (Note 12)

0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 1.00Hz 75

141 Backlash acceleration stopping time (Note 7) 0 to 360 s 0.1 s 0.5 s 75

142 Backlash deceleration stopping frequency (Note 7)

0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz (Note 12)

0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 1.00Hz 75Ba

ck la

sh

143 Backlash deceleration stopping time (Note 7) 0 to 360 s 0.1 s 0.5 s 75

D is

pl ay

144 Speed setting switch-over 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 102, 104, 106, 108, 110 1 4 79

145 Parameter for option (FR-PU04).

148 Stall prevention level at 0V input 0 to 200% 0.1% 150% 73

Ad di

tio na

l f un

ct io

ns

149 Stall prevention level at 10V input 0 to 200% 0.1% 200% 73

Pa ra

m et

er L

is t

PARAMETERS

57

Setting Range Factory SettingFunc- tion

Parameter Number Name

FR-B FR-B3

Minimum Setting

Increments FR-B FR-B3

Refer To

Page:

Cus- tmer Set- ting

150 Output current detection level 0 to 200% 0.1% 150% 132 151 Output current detection period 0 to 10 s 0.1 s 0 132 152 Zero current detection level 0 to 200.0% 0.1% 5.0% 133C

ur re

nt de

te ct

io n

153 Zero current detection period 0 to 1 s 0.01 s 0.5 s 133

154 Voltage reduction selection during stall prevention operation 0, 1 1 1 73

155 RT signal activated condition 0, 10 1 0 134 156 Stall prevention operation selection 0 to 31, 100, 101 1 0 134 157 OL signal waiting time 0 to 25 s, 9999 0.1 s 0 136

Su b

fu nc

tio ns

158 AM terminal function selection 1 to 3, 5 to 14, 17, 18, 21 1 1 83

Ad di

tio na

l fu

nc tio

n

160 User group read selection 0, 1, 10, 11 1 0 137

162 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure selection

0, 1 1 0 87

163 First cushion time for restart 0 to 20 s 0.1 s 0 s 87

164 First cushion voltage for restart 0 to 100% 0.1% 0% 87

Au to

m at

ic re

st ar

t a fte

r in

st an

ta ne

ou s

po w

er fa

ilu re

165 Restart stall prevention operation level 0 to 200% 0.1% 150% 87

168

Ad di

tio na

l fu

nc tio

n

169

Parameter set by manufacture. Do not set.

170 Watt-hour meter clear 0 0 138

In iti

al m

on ito

r

171 Actual operation hour meter clear 0 0 138

173 User group 1 registration 0 to 999 1 0 137 174 User group 1 deletion 0 to 999, 9999 1 0 137 175 User group 2 registration 0 to 999 1 0 137

U se

r f un

ct io

ns

176 User group 2 deletion 0 to 999, 9999 1 0 137 180 RL terminal function selection 0 to 99, 9999 1 0 139 181 RM terminal function selection 0 to 99, 9999 1 1 139 182 RH terminal function selection 0 to 99, 9999 1 2 139 183 RT terminal function selection 0 to 99, 9999 1 3 139 184 AU terminal function selection 0 to 99, 9999 1 4 139 185 JOG terminal function selection 0 to 99, 9999 1 5 139 186 CS terminal function selection 0 to 99, 9999 1 6 139 190 RUN terminal function selection 0 to 199, 9999 1 0 142 191 SU terminal function selection 0 to 199, 9999 1 1 142 192 IPF terminal function selection 0 to 199, 9999 1 2 142 193 OL terminal function selection 0 to 199, 9999 1 3 142 194 FU terminal function selection 0 to 199, 9999 1 4 142Te

rm in

al a

ss ig

nm en

t f un

ct io

ns

195 A, B, C terminal function selection 0 to 199, 9999 1 99 142

Ad di

ti- on

al fu

nc tio

n

199 User's initial value setting 0 to 999, 9999 1 0 144

Pa ra

m et

er L

is t

4

PARAMETERS

58

Setting Range Factory SettingFunc- tion

Parameter Number Name

FR-B FR-B3

Minimum Setting

Increments FR-B FR-B3

Refer To

Page:

Cus- tmer Set- ting

200 Programmed operation minute/second selection

0, 2: Minute, second 1, 3: Hour, minute 1 0 145

201 Program set 1 1 to 10

0-2: Rotation direction

0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz (Note 12),

9999: Frequency 0-99.59:

Time

0-2: Rotation direction

0-400, 9999:

Frequency

0-99.59: Time

1

0.1Hz

Minute or second

0

9999

0

145

211 Program set 2 11 to 20

0-2: Rotation direction

0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz (Note 12),

9999: Frequency 0-99.59:

Time

0-2: Rotation direction

0-400, 9999:

Frequency

0-99.59: Time

1

0.1Hz

Minute or second

0

9999

0

145

221 Program set 3 21 to 30

0-2: Rotation direction

0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz (Note 12),

9999: Frequency 0-99.59:

Time

0-2: Rotation direction

0-400, 9999:

Frequency

0-99.59: Time

1

0.1Hz

Minute or second

0

9999

0

145

Pr og

ra m

m ed

o pe

ra tio

n

231 Timer setting 0 to 99.59 0 145

232 Multi-speed setting (speed 8) 0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz (Note 12),

9999

0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 64

233 Multi-speed setting (speed 9) 0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz (Note 12),

9999

0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 64

234 Multi-speed setting (speed 10) 0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz (Note 12),

9999

0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 64

235 Multi-speed setting (speed 11) 0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz (Note 12),

9999

0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 64

236 Multi-speed setting (speed 12) 0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz (Note 12),

9999

0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 64

237 Multi-speed setting (speed 13) 0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz (Note 12),

9999

0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 64

238 Multi-speed setting (speed 14) 0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz (Note 12),

9999

0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 64

M ul

ti- sp

ee d

op er

at io

n

239 Multi-speed setting (speed 15) 0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz (Note 12),

9999

0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 64

240 (Note 11) Soft-PWM setting 0, 1 1 1 96

Su b

fu nc

tio ns

244 Cooling fan operation selection 0, 1 1 0 149

St op

s el

ec tio

n fu

nc tio

n

250 Stop selection 0 to 100 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 150

Pa ra

m et

er L

is t

PARAMETERS

59

Setting Range Factory SettingFunc- tion

Parameter Number Name

FR-B FR-B3

Minimum Setting

Increments FR-B FR-B3

Refer To

Page:

Cus- tmer Set- ting

251 Output phase failure protection selection 0,1 1 1 151

252 Override bias 0 to 200% 0.1% 50% 151

Ad di

tio na

l fu

nc tio

n

253 Override gain 0 to 200% 0.1% 150% 151 261 Power failure stop selection 0, 1 1 0 152

262 Subtracted frequency at deceleration start 0 to 20Hz 0.01Hz 3Hz 152

263 Subtraction starting frequency

0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz (Note 12),

9999

0 to 120Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 60Hz 152

264 Power-failure deceleration time 1 0 to 3600/0 to 360 s 0.1 s/0.01 s 5 s 152

265 Power-failure deceleration time 2 0 to 3600/0 to 360 s, 9999 0.1 s/0.01 s 9999 152

Po w

er fa

ilu re

s to

p fu

nc tio

n

266 Power-failure deceleration time switch-over frequency

0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz (Note 12),

0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 60Hz 152

Se le

ct io

n fu

nc tio

n

270 Stop-on-contact/load torque high- speed frequency control selection 0, 2 0, 1, 2, 3 1 0 153

271 High-speed setting maximum current 0 to 200% 0.1% 50% 154

272 Mid-speed setting minimum current 0 to 200% 0.1% 100% 154

273 Current averaging range

0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz (Note 12),

9999

0 to 400Hz, 9999

0.01Hz 9999 154

H ig

h- sp

ee d

fre qu

en cy

co nt

ro l

274 Current averaging filter constant 1 to 4000 1 16 154

275 (Note 11)

Stop-on-contact exciting current low- speed multiplying factor

0 to 1000%,

9999 1%

9999 (Note 5) 157

St op

o n

co nt

ac t

276 (Note 11)

Stop-on-contact PWM carrier frequency

0 to 15, 9999 1

9999 (Note 5) 157

278 (Note 11) Brake opening frequency (Note 3) 0 to 30Hz 0.01Hz 3Hz 161

279 (Note 11) Brake opening current (Note 3) 0 to 200% 0.1% 130% 161

280 (Note 11)

Brake opening current detection time (Note 3) 0 to 2 s 0.1 s 0.3 s 161

281 (Note 11) Brake operation time at start (Note 3) 0 to 5 s 0.1 s 0.3 s 161

282 (Note 11) Brake operation frequency (Note 3) 0 to 30Hz 0.01Hz 6Hz 161

283 (Note 11)

Brake operation time at stop (Note 3) 0 to 5 s 0.1 s 0.3 s 161

284 (Note 11)

Deceleration detection function selection (Note 3) 0, 1 1 0 161

285 (Note 11) Overspeed detection frequency

0 to 30Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 161

286 (Note 11) Droop gain 0 to 100% 0.1% 0% 165

Br ak

e se

qu en

ce fu

nc tio

ns

287 (Note 11) Droop filter constant

0.00 to 1.00 s 0.01s 0.3s 165

Pa ra

m et

er L

is t

4

PARAMETERS

60

Setting Range Factory SettingFunc- tion

Parameter Number Name

FR-B FR-B3

Minimum Setting

Increments FR-B FR-B3

Refer To

Page:

Cus- tmer Set- ting

900 FM terminal calibration 166 901 AM terminal calibration 166 902 Frequency setting voltage bias 0 to 10V 0 to 60Hz 0.01Hz 0V 0Hz 168

903 Frequency setting voltage gain 0 to 10V

0 to 120 Hz 0 to

60Hz (Note 12)

0 to 10V

1 to 400 Hz

0.01Hz 5V 60Hz 168

904 Frequency setting current bias 0 to 20mA 0 to 60Hz 0.01Hz 4mA 0Hz 168

C al

ib ra

tio n

fu nc

tio ns

905 Frequency setting current gain 0 to 20mA

0 to 120 Hz 0 to

60Hz (Note 12)

0 to 20mA

1 to 400 Hz

0.01Hz 20mA 60Hz 168

990 Buzzer control 0, 1 1 1 173

Ad di

tio na

l fu

nc tio

n

991 Parameter for option (FR-PU04).

In the FR-B3 series Note: 1. Indicates the parameter settings which are ignored when the advanced magnetic flux vector

control mode is selected. 2. The factory setting of the FR-B3-N(H)400 to 37K is 400V. 3. Can be set when Pr. 80, Pr. 81 9999, Pr. 60 = 7 or 8. 4. Can be accessed when Pr. 80, Pr. 81 9999, Pr. 77 = 801. 5. Can be accessed when Pr. 270 = 1 or 3, Pr. 80, Pr. 81 9999. 6. The setting depends on the inverter capacity. 7. Can be accessed when Pr. 29 = 3. 8. The half-tone screened parameters allow their settings to be changed during operation if 0

(factory setting) has been set in Pr. 77. (Note that the Pr. 72 and Pr. 240 settings cannot be changed during external operation.)

9. The setting depends on the inverter capacity: (0.4K)/(1.5K to 3.7K)/(5.5K, 7.5K)/(11K). 10. The setting depends on the inverter capacity: (0.4K to 1.5K)/(2.2K to 7.5K)/(11K or more). 13. Value set for the FR-B3-(H)400 to 37K/FR-B3-N(H)400 to 37K.

In the FR-B series 7. Can be accessed when Pr. 29 = 3. 8. The half-tone screened parameters allow their settings to be changed during operation if 0

(factory setting) has been set in Pr. 77. (Note that the Pr. 72 and Pr. 240 settings cannot be changed during external operation.)

11. Cannot be set for the FR-B series. 12. The setting range depends on the inverter capacity: 22K or less/30K or more.

Pa ra

m et

er L

is t

PARAMETERS

61

4.1.2 List of Parameters Classified by Purpose of Use Set the parameters according to the operating conditions. The following list indicates purpose of use and corresponding parameters.

Parameter Numbers Parameter numbers which must be setPurpose of Use

FR-B FR-B3 Adjustment of acceleration/deceleration time and pattern Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 20, Pr. 21

Limit of output frequency Pr. 1, Pr. 2 Operation over 60Hz Pr. 903, Pr. 905 Adjustment of frequency setting signal and output Pr. 73, Pr. 902 to Pr. 905

Adjustment of motor output torque Pr. 80, Pr. 81, Pr. 89 Adjustment of brake operation Pr.11 Pr. 10 to Pr. 12 Multi-speed operation Pr. 4 to Pr. 5, Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239 Jog operation Pr. 15, Pr. 16 Frequency jump operation Pr. 31 to Pr. 36 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure Pr. 57, Pr. 58

R el

at ed

to o

pe ra

tio n

Optimum acceleration/deceleration within continuous rating range Pr. 60

Timing of magnetic brake operation Pr. 42

Reversible operation according to analog signal polarity Pr. 28, Pr. 73

Advanced magnetic flux vector control operation Pr. 80, Pr. 81

Sub-motor operation Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 44, Pr. 45, Pr. 110, Pr. 111 Operation via communication with personal computer Pr. 117 to Pr. 124

Operation under PID control Pr. 128 to Pr. 134 To make backlash compensation Pr. 140 to Pr. 143 To detect current Pr. 150 to Pr. 153 Programmed operation Pr. 200 to Pr. 231 High-speed frequency control operation Pr. 271 to Pr. 274 To exercise stop-on-contact control Pr. 275, Pr. 276

R el

at ed

to a

pp lic

at io

n op

er at

io n

To exercise droop control Pr. 286, Pr. 287 Calibration of frequency meter Pr. 54 to Pr. 56, Pr. 158, Pr. 900, Pr. 901 Adjustment of digital frequency meter Pr. 54 to Pr. 56 Display of speed, etc. Pr. 37, Pr. 52, Pr. 53 Clearing of inverters actual operation time Pr. 171R

el at

ed to

m on

ito rin

g

Alarm code output selection Pr. 76 Function rewrite prevention Pr. 77 Reverse rotation prevention Pr. 78 To group parameters Pr. 160, Pr. 173 to Pr. 176 To set initial values for parameters Pr. 199

R el

at ed

to in

co rre

ct op

er at

io n

pr ev

en tio

n

To decelerate inverter to a stop at power failure Pr. 261 to Pr. 266

Assignment of input terminal functions Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 Assignment of output terminal functions Pr. 190 to Pr. 195 To increase cooling fan life Pr. 244 Motor overheat protection Pr. 9 Automatic restart after alarm stop Pr. 65, Pr. 67 to Pr. 69 Selection of key beep Pr. 990

O th

er s

Inverter reset selection Pr. 75

4

PARAMETERS

62

4.1.3 Parameters recommended to be set by the user

We recommend the following parameters to be set by the user. Set them according to the operation specifications, load, etc.

Parameter Number Name Application

1 Maximum frequency 2 Minimum frequency Used to set the maximum and minimum output frequencies.

7 Acceleration time 8 Deceleration time

44 Second acceleration/deceleration time

45 Second deceleration time

110 Third acceleration/deceleration time

111 Third deceleration time

Used to set the acceleration and deceleration times.

9 Electronic thermal O/L relay Used to set the current of the electronic overcurrent protection to protect the motor from overheat.

71 Applied motor Used to set the thermal characteristics of the electronic overcurrent protection according to the motor used.

73 0-5V/0-10V selection Used to select the specifications of the frequency setting signal entered across terminal 2-5 to perform operation with the voltage input signal.

900 FM terminal calibration 901 AM terminal calibration Used to calibrate the meters connected across terminals FM-SD and AM-5.

902 Frequency setting voltage bias 903 Frequency setting voltage gain 904 Frequency setting current bias 905 Frequency setting current gain

Used to set the magnitude (slope) of the output frequency relative to the frequency setting signal (0 to 5V, 0 to 10V or 4 to 20mA DC) as desired.

Note: For the FR-B3, setting may have to be made before starting operation. Refer to Chapter 3.

4.2 Parameter Function Details PARAMETERS

63

4.2 Parameter Function Details

4.2.1 Output frequency range (Pr. 1, Pr. 2)

Pr. 1 "maximum frequency"

Pr. 2 "minimum frequency"

Used to clamp the upper and lower limits of the output frequency. Can be used to set the upper and lower limits of motor speed.

Factory Setting Setting RangeParameter Number FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3

Remarks

1 60Hz (Note 2) 120Hz (Note 2) 0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz 0 to 120Hz 22K or less/

30K or more

2 0Hz 0 to 120Hz 0 to 60Hz 0 to 120Hz 22K or less/

30K or more

Pr.1

Pr.2

5,10V0

Frequency setting

Output frequency (Hz)

(20mA)(4mA)

Use Pr. 1 to set the upper limit of the output frequency. If the frequency of the frequency command entered is higher than the setting, the output frequency is clamped at the maximum frequency.

Use Pr. 2 to set the lower limit of the output frequency.

Note: 1. Use the frequency setting analog signal for the inverter capacity of 22K or less, and change the Pr. 903 and Pr. 905 values for operation beyond 60Hz. If Pr. 1 is only changed, the motor cannot run beyond 60Hz.

2. Set Pr. 1 "maximum frequency" to within the permissible frequency of the motor.

CAUTION

When the Pr. 2 setting is higher than the Pr. 13 "starting frequency" value, note that the motor will run at the set frequency by merely switching the start signal on, without entering the command frequency.

Pr. 13 "starting frequency" Pr. 903 "frequency setting voltage gain" Pr. 905 "frequency setting current gain"

Related parameters

4

PARAMETERS

64

4.2.2 Multi-speed operation (Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239)

Pr. 4 "multi-speed setting (high speed)"

Pr. 5 "multi-speed setting (middle speed)"

Pr. 6 "multi-speed setting (low speed)"

Pr. 24 to Pr. 27 "multi-speed setting (speeds 4 to 7)"

Pr. 232 to Pr. 239 "multi-speed setting (speeds 8 to 15)"

Used to preset the running speeds in parameters and switch between them using terminals. Any speed can be selected by switching on off the contact signal (RH, RM, RL or REX signal). By using these functions with jog frequency (Pr. 15), maximum frequency (Pr. 1) and minimum frequency (Pr. 2), up to 18 speeds can be set. Valid in the external operation mode or PU/external combined operation mode (Pr. 79 = 3 or 4).

Factory Setting Setting RangeParameter Number FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3

Remarks

4 60Hz 0 to 120Hz /0 to 60Hz 0 to 400Hz 5 30Hz 0 to 120Hz /0 to 60Hz 0 to 400Hz 6 10Hz 0 to 120Hz /0 to 60Hz 0 to 400Hz

24 to 27 9999 0 to 120Hz /0 to 60Hz, 9999 0 to 400Hz, 9999 9999: Not selected 232 to 239 9999 0 to 120Hz /0 to 60Hz, 9999 0 to 400Hz, 9999 9999: Not selected

ON

ON ON ON ON

ON ON

ONONON

ON RH

RM

RL

Speed 7

O ut

pu t f

re qu

en cy

(H z)

Speed 1 (high speed)

Speed 2 (middle speed)

Speed 3 (low speed)

Speed 4

Time

Speed 5

Speed 6

ONON ON ON ON ON ON ON

ON ON ON ON

ON ON ON ON

ON ON ON ON RH

RM

RL

REX

Speed 15

O ut

pu t f

re qu

en cy

(H z)

Time

Speed 9 Speed 8

Speed 10 Speed 11

Speed 12

Speed 13 Speed 14

Pr. 1 "maximum frequency" Pr. 2 "minimum frequency" Pr. 15 "jog frequency" Pr. 28 "multi-speed input compensation" Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 (input terminal

function selection)

Related parameters

PARAMETERS

65

Set the running frequencies in the corresponding parameters. Each speed (frequency) can be set as desired between 0 and 120Hz/0 and 60Hz during inverter operation. After the required multi-speed setting parameter has been read, pressing the [UP/DOWN] key can change the setting. (In this case, when you release the [UP/DOWN] key, press the [SET] key to store the set frequency. When using the FR-PU04 (option), press the [WRITE] key.)

Use any of Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 to assign the terminal used to input the REX signal.

Note: 1. The multi-speed settings override the main speeds (across terminals 2-5, 4-5). 2. The multi-speeds can also be set in the PU or external operation mode. 3. For 3-speed setting, if two or three speeds are simultaneously selected, priority is given to the

frequency setting of the lower signal. 4. Pr. 24 to Pr. 27 and Pr. 232 to Pr. 239 settings have no priority between them. 5. The parameter values can be changed during operation. 6. When terminal assignment is changed using Pr. 180 to Pr. 186, the other functions may be

affected. Check the functions of the corresponding terminals before making setting. 7. For the FR-B series, the setting range depends on the inverter capacity: (22K or less)/(30K or

more).

4

PARAMETERS

66

Pr. 29 "acceleration/deceleration pattern"

Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 (input terminal function selection)

Related parameters

4.2.3 Acceleration/deceleration time (Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 20, Pr. 21, Pr. 44, Pr. 45, Pr. 110, Pr. 111)

Pr. 7 "acceleration time"

Pr. 8 "deceleration time"

Pr. 20 "acceleration/deceleration reference frequency"

Pr. 21 "acceleration/deceleration time increments"

Pr. 44 "second acceleration/deceleration time"

Pr. 45 "second deceleration time"

Pr. 110 "third acceleration/deceleration time"

Pr. 111 "third deceleration time"

Used to set motor acceleration/deceleration time. Set a larger value for a slower speed increase/decrease or a smaller value for a faster speed increase/decrease.

Factory Setting Setting RangeParameter Number FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3

Remarks

7.5K or less 5 s7 11K or more 15 s 0 to 3600 s/0 to 360 s

7.5K or less 5 s8 11K or more 15 s 0 to 3600 s/0 to 360 s

20 60Hz 1 to 120Hz/ 1 to 60Hz 1 to 400Hz (22K or less)/(30K or more)

21 0 0, 1 0: 0 to 3600 s, 1: 0 to 360 s 7.5K or less44 11K or more 5 s 0 to 3600 s/0 to 360 s

7.5K or less45 11K or more 9999 0 to 3600 s/0 to 360 s, 9999 9999: Acceleration time = deceleration time

7.5K or less110 11K or more 9999 0 to 3600 s/0 to 360 s, 9999 9999: Function invalid

7.5K or less111 11K or more 9999 0 to 3600 s/0 to 360 s, 9999 9999: Acceleration time = deceleration time

Pr.20

Pr.8 Pr.45 Pr.111

Deceleration time

O ut

pu t f

re qu

en cy

(H z)

Running frequency

Time

Pr.7 Pr.44 Pr.110

Acceleration time

PARAMETERS

67

Use Pr. 21 to set the acceleration/deceleration time and minimum setting increments: Set value "0" (factory setting) ...........0 to 3600 seconds (minimum setting increments: 0.1 second) Set value "1" .....................................0 to 360 seconds (minimum setting increments: 0.01 second)

Use Pr. 7, Pr. 44 and Pr. 110 to set the acceleration time required to reach the frequency set in Pr. 20 from 0Hz.

Use Pr. 8, Pr. 45 and Pr. 111 to set the deceleration time required to reach 0Hz from the frequency set in Pr. 20.

Pr. 44 and Pr. 45 are valid when the RT signal is on, and Pr. 110 and Pr. 111 are valid when the X9 signal is on. When both RT and X9 are on, Pr. 110 and Pr. 111 are valid.

Use any of Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 to assign the terminal used to input the X9 signal. Set "9999" in Pr. 45 and Pr. 111 to make the deceleration time equal to the acceleration time (Pr. 44, Pr. 110). When "9999" is set in Pr. 110, the function is made invalid. Note: 1. In S-shaped acceleration/deceleration pattern A (refer to page 75), the set time is a period

required to reach the base frequency. Acceleration/deceleration time calculation expression when the set frequency is the base frequency or higher

4 T 5 t=

9

(Base frequency(*))2 f2 + 9

T

T : Acceleration/deceleration time setting (seconds) f : Set frequency (Hz) (*)60 for the FR-B series.

(*) 60Hz for the FR-B series. Set by offline auto tuning for the FR-B3 series. Base frequency: Guideline for acceleration/deceleration time at 60Hz (0Hz to set frequency)

Frequency setting (Hz)

Acceleration/ decelerationtime (seconds)

60 120

5 5 12 15 15 35

2. If the Pr. 20 setting is changed, the settings of calibration functions Pr. 903 and Pr. 905 (frequency setting signal gains) remain unchanged. To adjust the gains, adjust calibration functions Pr. 903 and Pr. 905.

3. When the setting of Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 44, Pr. 45, Pr. 110 or Pr. 111 is "0", the acceleration/deceleration time is 0.04 seconds. At this time, set Pr. 20 to 120Hz or less.

4. If the shortest acceleration/deceleration time is set, the actual motor acceleration/deceleration time cannot be made shorter than the shortest acceleration/deceleration time determined by the mechanical system's GD2 and motor torque.

4

PARAMETERS

68

Pr. 71 "applied motor"

Related parameter

4.2.4 Electronic overcurrent protection (Pr. 9)

Pr. 9 "electronic thermal O/L relay"

Set the current of the electronic overcurrent protection to protect the motor from overheat. This feature provides the optimum protective characteristics, including reduced motor cooling capability, at low speed.

Factory Setting Setting RangeParameter Number FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3

9 Rated output current* 0 to 500A * The FR-B-750 and FR-B3-(N)(H)400, 750 are preset to 85% of the rated inverter current.

Set the largest rated value of the rated output currents of the motor. Setting of "0" makes the electronic overcurrent protection (motor protective function) invalid. (The inverter's

output transistor protective function is valid.) When using Mitsubishi's explosion-proof, constant-torque type motor, first set "1", "13" or "14" in Pr. 71 to

select the 100% continuous torque characteristic in the low speed range. Then, set the rated motor current in Pr. 9.

PARAMETERS

69

Pr. 13 "starting frequency" Pr. 71 "applied motor"

Related parameters

4.2.5 DC dynamic brake (Pr.10, Pr. 11, Pr.12)

Pr. 10 "DC injection brake operation frequency"

Pr. 11 "DC injection brake operation time"

Pr. 12 "DC injection brake voltage"

By setting the stopping DC dynamic brake voltage (torque), operation time and operation starting frequency, the stopping accuracy of positioning operation, etc. or the timing of operating the DC dynamic brake to stop the motor is adjusted according to the load.

Factory Setting Setting RangeParameter

Number FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3 Remarks

10 3Hz 0 to

120Hz , 9999

9999: Operated at or below Pr. 13 value.

11 0.5 s 0, 0.5s

0 to 10 s, 8888

8888: Operated when X13 signal switches on.

7.5K or less 4%12 11K or more 2% 0 to 30%

Pr.11 Operation time O

ut pu

t f re

qu en

cy (H

z)

Operation frequency Time

DC dynamic brake voltage Operationvoltage

Time

Pr.12

Pr.10

Use Pr. 10 to set the frequency at which the DC dynamic brake application is started. By setting "9999" in Pr. 10, the motor is decelerated to the frequency set in Pr. 13 and braked.

Use Pr. 11 to set the period during when the brake is operated. By setting 8888 in Pr. 11, the DC dynamic brake is operated while the X13 signal is on.

Use any of Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 to assign the terminal used to input the X13 signal. Use Pr. 12 to set the percentage of the power supply voltage. When using the inverter dedicated motor (constant-torque motor), change the Pr. 12 setting as follows:

3.7K or less...4%, 5.5K or more...2%

In the FR-B3 series Note: 1. When the Pr. 12 setting is either of the following values for 5.5K and 7.5K, it is automatically

changed when the Pr. 71 setting is changed: (1) When Pr. 12 setting is 4% (factory setting)

The Pr. 12 setting is changed to 2% automatically when the Pr. 71 setting is changed from [general-purpose motor selection value (3)] to [constant-torque motor selection value (13)].

(2) When Pr. 12 setting is 2% The Pr. 12 setting is changed to 4% (factory setting) automatically when the Pr. 71 setting is changed from [constant-torque motor selection value (13)] to [general-purpose motor selection value (3)].

2. When Pr. 11 = "0" or Pr. 12 = 0, DC dynamic brake operation cannot be performed. 3. Do not change the setting of other than Pr. 10=3Hz, Pr. 11="0" or "8888" or Pr. 12=0. In the FR-B series 4. Pr. 10 is preset to 3Hz. 5. Pr. 12 is preset to 6% for 7.5K or less or to 3% for 11K or more. 6. When Pr. 11 = 0, DC dynamic brake operation cannot be performed.

4

PARAMETERS

70

CAUTION

In the orientation mode, do not set "0" or "8888" in Pr. 11 and "0" in Pr. 12. The motor may not be stopped in the correct position. When using orientation, the explosion-proof certification test is required separately.

Install a mechanical brake. No holding torque is provided.

4.2.6 Starting frequency (Pr. 13)

Pr. 13 "starting frequency"

You can set the starting frequency between 0 and 60Hz. Set the starting frequency at which the start signal is switched on.

Factory Setting Setting RangeParameter Number FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3

13 0.5Hz 0 to 60Hz

60

Pr.13

ON

0

Forward rotation

Output frequency (Hz)

Se tti

ng ra

ng e

Frequency setting signal (V)

Time

Note: The inverter will not start if the frequency setting signal is less than the value set in Pr. 13 "starting frequency". For example, when 5Hz is set in Pr. 13, the motor will start running when the frequency setting signal reaches 5Hz.

CAUTION When the Pr. 13 setting is equal to or less than the Pr. 2 value, note that merely switching on the start signal will start the motor at the preset frequency if the command frequency is not input.

Pr. 2 "minimum frequency" Related parameters

PARAMETERS

71

Pr. 20 "acceleration/deceleration reference frequency"

Pr. 21 "acceleration/deceleration time increments"

Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 (input terminal function selection)

Related parameters

4.2.7 Jog operation (Pr. 15, Pr. 16)

Pr. 15 "jog frequency"

Pr. 16 "jog acceleration/deceleration time"

In the external operation mode, jog operation can be started and stopped by the start signal (STF, STR) with the jog signal ON, after selection of the jog operation function using the input terminal function selection. In the PU operation mode, jog operation can also be performed using the PU (FR-DU04/FR-PU04).

Set the frequency and acceleration/deceleration time for jog operation

Factory Setting Setting RangeParameter Number FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3

Remarks

15 5Hz 0 to 120Hz/0 to 60Hz 0 to 400Hz 22K or less/30K or more 0 to 3600 s When Pr. 21 = 016 0.5 s 0 to 360 s When Pr. 21 = 1

Pr.20

Pr.15

Pr.16

ON

ON

ON

JOG signal

Reverse rotation STR

Output frequency (Hz)

Jog frequency setting range

Reverse rotation

Time

Forward rotation

Forward rotation STF

Note: 1. In S-shaped acceleration/deceleration pattern A, the set time is a period of time required to reach 60Hz.

2. The acceleration time and deceleration time cannot be set separately for jog operation. 3. The value set in Pr.15 "jog frequency" should be equal to or greater than the Pr.13 "starting

frequency" setting.

4

PARAMETERS

72

4.2.8 MRS input selection (Pr. 17)

Pr. 17 "MRS input selection"

Used to select the logic of the MRS signal. When the MRS signal switches on, the inverter shuts off the output.

Factory Setting Setting RangeParameter Number FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3

17 0 0, 2

Pr. 17 Setting Specifications of MRS Signal

0 Normally open input 2 Normally closed input (b contact input specifications)

For sink logic

MRS

SD

MRS

SD

Setting 0 (Factory setting) Setting 2

Output stop Output stop

Inverter Inverter

Pr. 20, Pr. 21 Refer to Pr.15, Pr. 16.

PARAMETERS

73

Pr. 48 "second stall prevention operation current" Pr. 49 "second stall prevention operation frequency" Pr. 73 "0-5V/0-10V selection" Pr. 114 "third stall prevention operation current" Pr. 115 "third stall prevention operation frequency" Pr. 156 "stall prevention operation selection"

Related parameters

4.2.9 Stall prevention (Pr. 22, Pr. 23, Pr. 66, Pr. 148, Pr. 149, Pr. 154)

Pr. 22 "stall prevention operation level"

Pr. 23 "stall prevention operation level compensation factor at double speed"

Pr. 66 "stall prevention operation level reduction starting frequency"

Pr. 148 "stall prevention operation level at 0V input"

Pr. 149 "stall prevention operation level at 10V input"

Pr. 154 "voltage reduction selection during stall prevention operation"

Set the output current level at which the output frequency will be adjusted to prevent the inverter from stopping due to overcurrent etc. For high-speed operation at or over the more base frequency, acceleration may not be made because the motor current does not increase. To improve the operation characteristics of the motor in such a case, the stall prevention level in the high-frequency range can be reduced. This is effective for operation of a centrifugal separator up to the high-speed range. Normally, set 60Hz in Pr. 66 and 100% in Pr. 23. For operation in the high-frequency range, the current in the locked motor state is smaller than the rated output current of the inverter and the inverter does not result in an alarm (protective function is not activated) if the motor is at a stop. To improve this and activate the alarm, the stall prevention level can be reduced. In order to provide torque during stall prevention, Pr. 154 is factory-set not to reduce the output voltage. The setting of reducing the output voltage further decreases the probability of overcurrent trip occurrence. Entering the analog signal into terminal 1 can vary the stall prevention operation level.

Factory Setting Setting RangeParameter Number FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3

Remarks

22 150% 0 to 200%, 9999 9999: Analog variable 23 9999 0 to 200%, 9999 9999: Constant according to Pr. 22 66 60Hz 0 to 120Hz/0 to 60Hz 0 to 400Hz 22K or less/30K or more

148 150% 0 to 200% (Bias) 149 200% 0 to 200% (Gain)

154 1 0, 1 0: Output voltage reduced 1: Output voltage not reduced

Pr.22

Pr.23

Pr.66 Output frequency (Hz)

St al

l p re

ve nt

io n

op er

at io

n le

ve l (

% )

Reduction ratio compensation factor (%)

Pr. 23 = 9999When

(170%)

(130%)

0% 0V

Pr.148 Pr.149

10(5)V

Input voltage (V) (across frequency setting terminals 1-5)

St al

l p re

ve nt

io n

op er

at io

n le

ve l (

% )

4

PARAMETERS

74

Pr. 59 "remote setting function selection" Pr. 73 "0-5V/0-10V selection"

Related parameters

In Pr. 22, set the stall prevention operation level. Normally set it to 150% (factory setting). Set "0" in Pr. 22 to

disable the stall prevention operation. To reduce the stall prevention operation level in the high-frequency range, set the reduction starting

frequency in Pr. 66 and the reduction ratio compensation factor in Pr. 23. Calculation expression for stall prevention operation level

Stall prevention operation level (%) = A + B Pr.22-A Pr.22-B

Pr.23-100 100

where, A = , B = Pr.66 (Hz) Pr.22(%) output frequency (Hz)

Pr.66 (Hz) Pr.22(%) f

f: 120Hz/60Hz (22K or less/30K or more) for the FR-B series, 400Hz for the FR-B3 series By setting "9999" (factory setting) in Pr. 23, the stall prevention operation level is constant at the Pr. 22

setting. Set "9999" in Pr. 22 to vary the stall prevention operation level using the analog signal (0-5V/0-10V) entered

to the frequency setting auxiliary input terminal [1]. (Use Pr. 73 to select between 10V and 5V.) Use Pr. 148 and Pr. 149 to adjust the gain and bias of the analog signal. Set "0" in Pr. 154 to reduce the output voltage during stall prevention operation.

Note: 1. When Pr. 22 = "9999", terminal 1 is exclusively used for setting the stall prevention operation level. The auxiliary input and override functions are not activated.

CAUTION

Do not set a too small value as the stall prevention operation current. Otherwise, torque generated will reduce.

Test operation must be performed. Stall prevention operation during acceleration may increase the acceleration time. Stall prevention operation during constant speed may change the speed suddenly. Stall prevention operation during deceleration may increase the deceleration time, increasing the deceleration distance.

Pr. 24 to Pr. 27 Refer to Pr. 4 to Pr. 6.

4.2.10 Multi-speed input compensation (Pr. 28)

Pr. 28 "multi-speed input compensation"

By entering a compensation signal into the frequency setting auxiliary input terminal 1 (Note 2), the speeds (frequencies) of multi-speed settings or the speed setting made by remote setting function can be compensated for.

Factory Setting Setting RangeParameter Number FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3

Remarks

28 0 0, 1 0: Not compensated, 1: Compensated

Note: 1. Use Pr. 73 to select the compensation input voltage between 0 to 5V and 0 to 10V. 2. When any of "4, 5, 14 and 15" is set in Pr. 73, the compensation signal is entered into terminal 2.

(Override functions)

PARAMETERS

75

Pr. 7 "acceleration time" Pr. 8 "deceleration time" Pr. 20 "acceleration/deceleration

reference frequency" Pr. 44 "second acceleration/

deceleration time" Pr. 45 "second deceleration time" Pr. 110 "third acceleration/

deceleration time" Pr. 111 "third deceleration time"

Related parameters

4.2.11 Acceleration/deceleration pattern (Pr. 29, Pr. 140 to Pr. 143)

Pr. 29 "acceleration/deceleration pattern"

Pr. 140 "backlash acceleration stopping frequency"

Pr. 141 "backlash acceleration stopping time"

Pr. 142 "backlash deceleration stopping frequency"

Pr. 143 "backlash deceleration stopping time"

Set the acceleration/deceleration pattern. Also, you can suspend acceleration/deceleration at set frequencies and for the time period set in the parameters.

Factory Setting Setting RangeParameter Number FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3

Remarks

29 0 0, 1, 2, 3 3: Backlash compensation

140 1.00Hz 0 to 120Hz/0 to 60Hz 0 to 400Hz Valid when Pr. 29 = 3. 22K or less/30K or more

141 0.5 s 0 to 360 s Valid when Pr. 29 = 3.

142 1.00Hz 0 to 120Hz/0 to 60Hz 0 to 400Hz Valid when Pr. 29 = 3. 22K or less/30K or more

143 0 s 0 to 360 s Valid when Pr. 29 = 3.

Time

[Linear acceleration/deceleration]

O ut

pu t f

re qu

en cy

(H z)

Set value 0

fb

[S-shaped acceleration/deceleration A]

Time

O ut

pu t f

re qu

en cy

(H z)

Set value 1

f1

f2

[S-shaped acceleration/deceleration B]

O ut

pu t f

re qu

en cy

(H z)

Time

Set value 2

f2 Pr.142

t2 Pr.143t1 Pr.141

f1 Pr.140

O ut

pu t f

re qu

en cy

(H z)

Set value 3 [Backlash compensation function]

Time

Pr. 29

Setting Function Description

0 Linear acceleration/ deceleration

Linear acceleration/deceleration is made up/down to the preset frequency (factory setting).

1

S-shaped acceleration/ deceleration A (Note 1)

For machine tool spindles This setting is used when it is necessary to make acceleration/deceleration in a short time up to the high-speed range of fb (60Hz for FR-B, base frequency for FR-B3) or higher. In this acceleration/deceleration pattern, fb (60Hz for FR-B, base frequency for FR-B3) is always the inflection point of an S shape, and you can set the acceleration/deceleration time according to the reduction in motor torque in the 60Hz or higher constant-output operation range.

2 S-shaped acceleration/ deceleration B

Prevention of cargo collapse on conveyor, etc. This setting provides S-shaped acceleration/deceleration from f2 (current frequency) to f1 (target frequency), easing an acceleration/deceleration shock. This pattern has an effect on the prevention of cargo collapse, etc.

3 Backlash compensation (Note 2, 3)

Backlash compensation for reduction gear, etc. This function stops the speed change temporarily during acceleration/deceleration, reducing a shock generated when a reduction gear backlash is eliminated suddenly. Use Pr. 140 to Pr. 143 to set the stopping times and stopping frequencies in accordance with the above diagrams.

4

PARAMETERS

76

Pr. 180 "RL terminal function selection" Pr. 181 "RM terminal function selection" Pr. 182 "RH terminal function selection" Pr. 183 "RT terminal function selection" Pr. 184 "AU terminal function selection" Pr. 185 "JOG terminal function selection" Pr. 186 "CS terminal function selection"

Related parameters

Note: 1. For the acceleration/deceleration time, set the time required to reach the "base frequency" in Pr. 3, not the "acceleration/deceleration reference frequency" in Pr. 20. For details, refer to the explanations of Pr. 7 and Pr. 8.

2. Pr. 140 to Pr. 143 is accessible when "3" is set in Pr. 29. 3. The acceleration/deceleration time is increased by the stopping time.

*Set by offline auto tuning for the FR-B3 series.

4.2.12 Regenerative function selection (Pr. 30, Pr. 70)

Pr. 30 "regenerative function selection"

Pr. 70 "special regenerative brake duty"

When making frequent starts/stops with a 7.5K or less inverter, use the optional "high-duty brake resistor" (FR-ABR) to increase the regenerative brake duty.

Use the optional "high power factor converter (FR-HC)" to reduce harmonics, improve the power factor, or continue the regenerative mode.

Factory Setting Setting RangeParameter Number FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3

Remarks

30 0 0 to 2 0 to 15% 0.4K to 1.5K 0 to 30% 2.2K to 7.5K70 0% 0% 11K or more

(1) When using the built-in brake resistor, brake unit, power return converter When using the brake unit or power return converter, the explosion-proof certification test is required separately. Set "0" in Pr. 30.

The Pr. 70 setting is made invalid. At this time, the regenerative brake duty is as follows:

*FR-B3-400 to 3700, FR-B-750 to 3700 .....................3% *FR-B3-5.5K to 7.5K, FR-B-5.5K, 7.5K ......................2% *FR-B3-400 to 7.5K, FR-B-750 to 7.5K ......................2%

(2) When using the high-duty brake resistor (FR-ABR) When using the high-duty brake resistor (FR-ABR), the explosion-proof certification test is required separately. Set "1" in Pr. 30. Set "10%" in Pr. 70.

PARAMETERS

77

(3) When using the high power factor converter (FR-HC) When using the high power factor converter (FR-HC), the explosion-proof certification test is required separately, except when using the high power factor converter for power factor improvement.

1) Set "2" in Pr. 30. 2) Use any of Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 to assign the following signals to the contact input terminals.

X10: FR-HC connection (inverter operation enable signal) (Note 3) To make protective coordination with the high power factor converter (FR-HC), use the inverter operation enable signal to shut off the inverter output. Enter the RDY signal of the high power factor converter.

X11: FR-HC connection (instantaneous power failure detection signal) When the computer link inboard option (FR-A5NR) is used and the setting is made to hold the pre- instantaneous power failure mode, use this signal to hold that mode. Enter the instantaneous power failure detection signal of the high power factor converter.

3) The Pr. 70 setting is made invalid. * Set "10" and "11" in any of Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 to allocate the terminals used to input the X10 and X11 signals.

Note: 1. Cannot be set for the FR-B. 2. The Pr. 70 setting is invalid for the FR-B3 inverter of 11K or more. 3. Pr. 70 "regenerative brake duty" indicates the %ED of the built-in brake transistor operation. Its

setting should not be higher than the setting of the brake resistor used. Otherwise, the brake resistor can overheat.

4. The X10 signal may be replaced by the MRS signal. 5. When terminal assignment is changed using Pr. 180 to Pr. 186, the other functions may be

affected. Check the functions of the corresponding terminals before making setting. 6. When the high power factor converter is used (Pr. 30=2), the deceleration-to-stop functions at

power failure (Pr. 261 to Pr. 266) are invalid.

WARNING The Pr. 70 setting must not exceed the setting of the brake resistor used. Otherwise, the brake resistor can overheat. 4

PARAMETERS

78

4.2.13 Frequency jump (Pr. 31 to Pr. 36)

Pr. 31 "frequency jump 1A"

Pr. 32 "frequency jump 1B"

Pr. 33 "frequency jump 2A"

Pr. 34 "frequency jump 2B"

Pr. 35 "frequency jump 3A"

Pr. 36 "frequency jump 3B"

When it is desired to avoid resonance attributable to the natural frequency of a mechanical system, these parameters allow resonant frequencies to be jumped. Up to three areas may be set, with the jump frequencies set to either the top or bottom point of each area. The value set to 1A, 2A or 3A is a jump point and operation is performed at this frequency.

Factory Setting Setting RangeParameter

Number FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3 Remarks

31 9999

0 to 120Hz/

0 to 60Hz, 9999

0 to 400Hz, 9999

22K or less/30K or more, 9999: Function invalid

32 9999

0 to 120Hz/

0 to 60Hz, 9999

0 to 400Hz, 9999

22K or less/30K or more, 9999: Function invalid

33 9999

0 to 120Hz/

0 to 60Hz, 9999

0 to 400Hz, 9999

22K or less/30K or more, 9999: Function invalid

34 9999

0 to 120Hz/

0 to 60Hz, 9999

0 to 400Hz, 9999

22K or less/30K or more, 9999: Function invalid

35 9999

0 to 120Hz/

0 to 60Hz, 9999

0 to 400Hz, 9999

22K or less/30K or more, 9999: Function invalid

36 9999

0 to 120Hz/

0 to 60Hz, 9999

0 to 400Hz, 9999

22K or less/30K or more, 9999: Function invalid

Pr.31 Pr.32

Pr.33 Pr.34

Pr.35 Pr.36

Frequency jump

R un

ni ng

fr eq

ue nc

y

To fix the frequency at 30Hz between Pr. 33 and Pr. 34 (30Hz and 35Hz), set 35Hz in Pr. 34 and 30Hz in Pr. 33.

Pr.34:35Hz Pr.33:30Hz

To jump to 35Hz between 30 and 35Hz, set 35Hz in Pr. 33 and 30Hz in Pr. 34. Pr.33:35Hz Pr.34:30Hz

Note: During acceleration/deceleration, the running frequency within the set area is valid.

PARAMETERS

79

Pr. 52 "DU/PU main display data selection" Pr. 53 "PU level display data selection" Pr. 80 "motor capacity" Pr. 81 "number of motor poles"

Related parameters

4.2.14 Speed display (Pr. 37, Pr. 144)

Pr. 37 "speed display"

Pr. 144 "speed setting switch-over"

The units of the running speed monitor display of the PU (FR-DU04/FR-PU04), the running speed setting in the PU operation mode, and the parameter setting used for frequency setting can be changed from the frequency to the motor speed or machine speed.

Factory Setting Setting RangeParameter Number FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3

Remarks

37 0 0, 1 to 9998 0: Frequency setting added

144 4 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 102, 104, 106, 108, 110

To display the machine speed, set in Pr. 37 the machine speed for 60Hz operation. To display the motor speed, set the number of motor poles (2, 4, 6, 8, 10) or the number of motor poles plus

100 (102, 104, 106, 108, 110) in Pr. 144. When values have been set in both Pr. 37 and Pr. 144, priority is as follows:

Pr. 144 = 102 to 110 > Pr. 37 = 1 to 9998 > Pr. 144 = 2 to 10 Hence, the half-tone screened settings in the following list become valid.

When the running speed monitoring has been selected, the parameter setting unit and the running speed setting unit in the PU operation mode depend on the combination of the Pr. 37 and Pr. 144 settings as indicated below:

Running Speed Monitor Display

Parameter Setting Unit Running Speed Setting Unit Pr. 37 Setting Pr. 144 Setting

Speed of 4-pole motor (r/min) 0 0 0 2 to 10Hz

1 to 9998 102 to 110Motor speed (r/min) r/min 0 102 to 110 Hz 1 to 9998 0Machine speed r/min 1 to 9998 2 to 10

Note: 1. In the FR-B series, the motor speed is converted from the output frequency and does not match the actual speed. Since the FR-B3 series is run under advanced magnetic flux vector control, this indication is the actual rotary shaft speed (value estimated by motor slip arithmetic).

2. During PLG feedback control, the speed displayed is the actual speed from the PLG. Note that when PLG feedback control is exercised, the explosion-proof certification test is required separately.

3. When the running speed display has been selected with "0" set in Pr. 37 and "0" in Pr. 144, the monitor display shows the speed reference for a 4-pole motor (1800r/min is displayed at 60Hz).

4. To change the PU main monitor (PU main display) or PU level meter (PU level display), refer to Pr. 52 and Pr. 53.

5. As the operation panel display is 4 digits, "----" is displayed when the monitored value exceeds "9999".

CAUTION Make sure that the running speed and number of poles set are correct. Otherwise, the motor might run at extremely high speed, damaging the machine.

4

PARAMETERS

80

Pr. 190 "RUN terminal function selection"

Pr. 191 "SU terminal function selection" Pr. 192 "IPF terminal function selection" Pr. 193 "OL terminal function selection" Pr. 194 "FU terminal function selection" Pr. 195 "A, B, C terminal function

selection"

Related parameters

4.2.15 Up-to-frequency sensitivity (Pr. 41)

Pr. 41 "up-to-frequency sensitivity"

The ON range of the up-to-frequency signal (SU) output when the output frequency reaches the running frequency can be adjusted between 0 and 100% of the running frequency. This parameter can be used to ensure that the running frequency has been reached or used as the operation start signal etc. for related equipment.

Factory Setting Setting RangeParameter Number FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3

41 10% 0 to 100%

ON

Pr.41

Output signal SU

O ut

pu t f

re qu

en cy

(H z)

Running frequency Adjustable range

Time

OFF OFF

4.2.16 Output frequency detection (Pr. 42, Pr. 43, Pr. 50, Pr. 116)

Pr. 42 "output frequency detection"

Pr. 43 "output frequency detection for reverse rotation"

Pr. 50 "second output frequency detection"

Pr. 116 "third output frequency detection"

The output frequency signal (FU, FU2, FU3) is output when the output frequency reaches or exceeds the setting. This function can be used for electromagnetic brake operation, open signal, etc.

PARAMETERS

81

You can also set the detection of the frequency used exclusively for reverse rotation. This function is effective for switching the timing of electromagnetic brake operation between forward rotation (rise) and reverse rotation (fall) during vertical lift operation, etc.

Factory Setting Setting RangeParameter Number FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3

Remarks

42 6Hz 0 to 120Hz/0 to 60Hz 0 to 400Hz 22K or less/30K or more

43 9999 0 to 120Hz/0 to 60Hz, 9999 0 to 400Hz, 9999 22K or less/30K or more 9999: Same as Pr. 42 setting

50 30Hz 0 to 120Hz/0 to 60Hz 0 to 400Hz 22K or less/30K or more

116 9999 0 to 120Hz/0 to 60Hz, 9999 0 to 400Hz, 9999 22K or less/30K or more 9999: Function invalid

Refer to the figure below and set the corresponding parameters: When Pr. 43 9999, the Pr. 42 setting applies to forward rotation and the Pr. 43 setting applies to reverse

rotation.

Pr.50 Pr.42

Pr.116

Pr.50 Pr.43

Pr.116 Output signal FU,FU2,FU3

O ut

pu t f

re qu

en cy

(H z)

Forward rotation

Reverse rotation

Time

OFF OFF OFFON ON

Output Signal Parameter Number Output Signal

42 43 FU

50 FU2 116 FU3

Use Pr. 190 to Pr. 195 to assign the terminals used to output the FU2 and FU3 signals.

Note: 1. Use the RUN (running) signal to exercise PLG feedback control with the plug-in dedicated option unit. (If you use the FU, FU2 or FU3 signal, the brake may not be released.) Note that when using PLG feedback control, the explosion-proof certification test is required separately.

2.When terminal assignment is changed using Pr. 190 to Pr. 195, the other functions may be affected. Check the functions of the corresponding terminals before making setting.

Pr. 44, Pr. 45 Refer to Pr. 7.

4

PARAMETERS

82

4.2.17 Second/third stall prevention (Pr. 48, Pr. 49, Pr. 114, Pr. 115)

Pr. 48 "second stall prevention operation current"

Pr. 49 "second stall prevention operation frequency"

Pr. 114 "third stall prevention operation current"

Pr. 115 "third stall prevention operation frequency"

The stall prevention operation level can be changed within the range from 0Hz to the frequency set in Pr. 49 or Pr. 115. The stall prevention operation level can be changed by switching the external input signal on-off.

Factory Setting Setting RangeParameter Number FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3

Remarks

48 150% 0 to 200%

49 0

0 to 120Hz/

0 to 60Hz, 9999

0 to 400Hz, 9999

22K or less/ 30K or more

114 150% 0 to 200%

115 0 0 to

120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz

0 to 400Hz

22K or less/ 30K or more

Running frequency St

al l p

re ve

nt io

n op

er at

io n

cu rre

nt

Acceleration

Deceleration/constant speed

Pr.49

Pr.115

Pr.114

Pr.48

Set the stall prevention operation level in Pr. 48 and Pr. 114. Refer to the following list to set values in Pr. 49 and Pr. 115. Pr. 114 and Pr. 115 are made valid by switching on the X9 signal. Set "9" in any of Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 to

allocate the terminal used to input the X9 signal.

Pr. 49 Setting Pr. 115 Setting Operation 0 Second (third) stall prevention function is not activated.

0.01Hz to 120Hz/ 0.01Hz to 60Hz, 0.01 to 400Hz

Second (third) stall prevention function is activated according to the frequency. (FR-B series 22K or less/30K or more, FR-B3 series)

9999 Cannot be set. Second stall prevention function is activated according to the RT signal. RT signal ON............... Stall level Pr. 48 RT signal OFF ............. Stall level Pr. 22

Note: 1. When Pr. 49 = "9999", setting "0" in Pr. 48 disables the stall prevention function when the RT signal switches on. When Pr. 49 "9999" and Pr. 48 = "0", the stall prevention operation level is 0% when the frequency is equal to or less than the value set in Pr. 49.

2. When the stall prevention operation level signal input function is selected (Pr. 22 = 9999), setting "9999" in Pr. 49 changes the stall prevention operation level from the value of the stall prevention operation level signal (terminal 1 input) to the value set in Pr. 48 when the RT signal switches on.

3. When both the RT and X9 signals are on, the third stall prevention function is selected. 4. When the RT (X9) signal is on, the second (third) functions such as second (third)

acceleration/deceleration time are also selected. 5. When terminal assignment is changed using Pr. 180 to Pr. 186, the other functions may be

affected. Check the functions of the corresponding terminals before making setting.

Pr. 22 "stall prevention operation level" Pr. 23 "stall prevention operation level compensation factor at double speed" Pr. 66 "stall prevention operation level reduction starting frequency" Pr. 154 "voltage reduction selection during stall prevention operation" Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 (input terminal function selection)

Related parameters

PARAMETERS

83

Pr. 37 "speed display" Pr. 55 "frequency monitoring reference" Pr. 56 "current monitoring reference" Pr. 170 "watt-hour meter clear" Pr. 171 "actual operation hour meter clear" Pr. 900 "FM terminal calibration" Pr. 901 "AM terminal calibration"

Related parameters

CAUTION Do not set a too small value to the second (third) stall prevention operation current. Otherwise, torque generated will decrease.

Pr. 50 Refer to Pr. 42.

4.2.18 Monitor display/FM, AM terminal function selection (Pr. 52 to Pr. 54, Pr. 158)

Pr. 52 "DU/PU main display data selection"

Pr. 53 "PU level display data selection"

Pr. 54 "FM terminal function selection"

Pr. 158 "AM terminal function selection"

You can select the signals shown on the operation panel (FR-DU04)/parameter unit (FR-PU04) main display screen and on the parameter unit (FR-PU04) level meter and signals output to the FM and AM terminals.

There are two different signal outputs: FM pulse train output terminal and AM analog output terminal. Select the signals using Pr. 54 and Pr. 158.

Factory Setting Setting RangeParameter Number FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3

52 0 0, 5, 6, 8, 10 to 14, 17 to 20, 22 to 25, 100

0 to 20, 22 to 25, 100

53 1 0 to 3, 5, 6, 8, 10 to 14, 17, 18, 21 0 to 3, 5 to 14, 17, 18 54 1 1 to 3, 5, 6, 8, 10 to 14, 17, 18, 21 1 to 3, 5 to 14, 17, 18, 21

158 1 1 to 3, 5, 6, 8, 10 to 14, 17, 18, 21 1 to 3, 5 to 14, 17, 18, 21

4

PARAMETERS

84

Set Pr. 52 to Pr. 54 and Pr. 158 in accordance with the following table:

Parameter Setting Pr.52 Pr.53 Pr.54 Pr.158

Signal Type Display Unit DU

LED

PU main

monitor

PU level meter

FM terminal

AM terminal

Full-Scale Value of FM, AM, Level Meter

No display 0 Output frequency Hz 0/100 0/100 1 1 1 Pr. 55 Output current A 0/100 0/100 2 2 2 Pr. 56 Output voltage V 0/100 0/100 3 3 3 400V or 800V Alarm display 0/100 0/100 Frequency setting Hz 5 * 5 5 5 Pr. 55

Running speed r/min 6 * 6 6 6 Pr. 55 value converted into Pr. 37 value

Motor torque % 7 * 7 7 7 Rated torque of applied motor given in specifications 2

Converter output voltage V 8 * 8 8 8 400V or 800V Regenerative brake duty % 9 * 9 9 9 Pr.70 Electronic overcurrent protection load factor % 10 * 10 10 10 Protection operation level

Output current peak value A 11 * 11 11 11 Pr. 56 Converter output voltage peak value V 12 * 12 12 12 400V or 800V

Input power kW 13 * 13 13 13 Rated power of inverter rating 2 Output power kW 14 * 14 14 14 Rated power of inverter rating 2 Input terminal status * Output terminal status * Load meter ** % 17 17 17 17 17 Pr. 56 Motor exciting current A 18 18 18 18 18 Pr. 56 Position pulse 19 19 Cumulative operation time h 20 20

Reference voltage output 21 21 1440Hz is output to FM terminal. Full-scale voltage is output to AM terminal.

Orientation status 22 22 Actual operation time h 23 23 Motor load factor % 24 24 Rated inverter current 2 Cumulative power kW 25 25

When 100 is set in Pr. 52, the monitored values during stop and during operation differ as indicated below: (The LED on the left of Hz flickers during a stop and is lit during running.)

Pr. 52 0 100

During operation/during stop During stop During operation

Output frequency Output frequency Set frequency Output frequency Output current Output current Output voltage Output voltage Alarm display Alarm display

Note: 1. During an error, the output frequency at error occurrence is displayed. 2. During MRS, the values are the same as during a stop.

For the FR-B3 series, monitoring of the tuning status has priority because of offline auto tuning.

PARAMETERS

85

In the FR-B3 series Note: 1. The monitoring of items marked cannot be selected.

2. By setting "0" in Pr. 52, the monitoring of "output frequency to alarm display" can be selected in sequence by the SHIFT key.

3. *"Frequency setting to output terminal status" on the PU main monitor are selected by "other monitor selection" of the parameter unit (FR-PU04).

4. **The load meter is displayed in %, with the current set in Pr. 56 regarded as 100%. 5. The actual operation time displayed by setting "23" in Pr. 52 is calculated using the inverter

operation time. (Inverter stop time is not included.) Set "0" in Pr. 171 to clear it. 6. When Pr. 53 = "0", the level meter display of the parameter unit can be erased. 7. By setting "1, 2, 5, 6, 11, 17 or 18" in Pr. 53, the full-scale value can be set in Pr. 55 or Pr. 56. 8. The cumulative operation time and actual operation time are calculated from 0 to 65535 hours,

then cleared, and recalculated from 0. When the operation panel (FR-DU04) is used, the display shows "----" after 9999 or more hours have elapsed. Whether 9999 or more hours have elapsed or not can be confirmed on the parameter unit (FR-PU04).

9. The actual operation time is not calculated unless the inverter has operated for longer than one hour continuously.

10. When the operation panel (FR-DU04) is used, the display unit is Hz, V or A only. 11. The orientation status functions when the FR-A5AP option is used. If the option is not used, "22"

may be set in Pr. 52 and the value displayed remains "0" and the function is invalid. When using orientation, the explosion-proof certification test is required separately.

In the FR-B series Note: 1. The monitoring of items marked cannot be selected.

2. By setting "0" in Pr. 52, the monitoring of "output frequency to alarm display" can be selected in sequence by the SHIFT key.

3. *"Frequency setting to output terminal status" on the PU main monitor are selected by "other monitor selection" of the parameter unit (FR-PU04).

4. **The load meter is displayed in %, with the current set in Pr. 56 regarded as 100%. 5. The motor torque and regenerative brake duty cannot be set. 6. The actual operation time displayed by setting "23" in Pr. 52 is calculated using the inverter

operation time. (Inverter stop time is not included.) Set "0" in Pr. 171 to clear it. 7. When Pr. 53 = "0", the level meter display of the parameter unit can be erased. 8. By setting "1, 2, 5, 6, 11, 17 or 18" in Pr. 53, the full-scale value can be set in Pr. 55 or Pr. 56. 9. The cumulative operation time and actual operation time are calculated from 0 to 65535 hours,

then cleared, and recalculated from 0. When the operation panel (FR-DU04) is used, the display shows "----" after 9999 or more hours have elapsed. Whether 9999 or more hours have elapsed or not can be confirmed on the parameter unit (FR-PU04).

10. The actual operation time is not calculated unless the inverter has operated for longer than one hour continuously.

11. When the operation panel (FR-DU04) is used, the display unit is Hz, V or A only. 12. The orientation status functions when the FR-A5AP option is used. If the option is not used, "22"

may be set in Pr. 52 and the value displayed remains "0" and the function is invalid. When using orientation, the explosion-proof certification test is required separately.

4

PARAMETERS

86

Pr. 37 "speed display" Pr. 53 "PU level display data selection" Pr. 54 "FM terminal function selection" Pr. 158 "AM terminal function selection" Pr. 900 "FM terminal calibration" Pr. 901 "AM terminal calibration"

Related parameters

4.2.19 Monitoring reference (Pr. 55, Pr. 56)

Pr. 55 "frequency monitoring reference"

Pr. 56 "current monitoring reference"

Set the frequency or current which is referenced for display when the frequency or current is selected for the FM and AM terminals and PU level meter display.

Factory Setting Setting RangeParameter Number FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3 Remarks

55 60Hz 0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz 0 to 400Hz 22K or less/30K or more

56 Rated output current 0 to 500A

Pr.55

O ut

pu t o

r d is

pl ay

Output frequency Frequency setting Running speed

Pr.56

1440 pulses/s (terminal FM) 10VDC (terminal AM) Full scale (PU level monitor)

O ut

pu t o

r d is

pl ay

Output current Output current peak value Load meter

1440 pulses/s (terminal FM) 10VDC (terminal AM) Full scale (PU level monitor)

Referring to the above figures and following table, set Pr. 55 and Pr. 56:

Monitoring Reference Setting Parameter Monitored Data Selection

PU Level Display Selection

Pr. 53 Setting

FM Terminal Function Selection

Pr. 54 Setting

AM Terminal Function Selection

Pr. 158 Setting Output frequency (Hz) 1 1 1 Frequency setting (Hz) 5 5 5Frequency monitoring

reference Pr. 55 Running speed (Pr. 37) 6 6 6 Output current (A) 2 2 2 Output current peak value (A) 11 11 11 Load meter (A) 17 17 17

Current monitoring reference Pr. 56

Motor exciting current (A) 18 18 18

Setting using Pr. 55, Pr. 56 Set to make the PU level meter indication to be in full-scale.

Set to make the terminal FM pulse train output to be 1440 pulses/s.

Set to make the terminal AM output voltage to be 10V.

Note: 1. The maximum pulse train output of terminal FM is 2400 pulses/s. If Pr. 55 is not adjusted, the output of terminal FM will be filled to capacity. Therefore, adjust Pr. 55.

2. The maximum output voltage of terminal AM is 10VDC.

PARAMETERS

87

4.2.20 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure (Pr. 57, Pr. 58, Pr. 162 to Pr. 165)

Pr. 57 "restart coasting time"

Pr. 58 "restart cushion time"

Pr.162 "Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure selection"

Pr.163 "First cushion time for restart"

Pr.164 "First cushion voltage for restart"

Pr.165 "Restart stall prevention operation level"

You can restart the inverter without stopping the motor (with the motor coasting) when the commercial power supply is switched to the inverter operation or when the power is restored after an instantaneous power failure. (When automatic restart operation is set to be enabled, UVT and IPF among the alarm output signals will not be output at occurrence of an instantaneous power failure.)

Factory Setting Setting RangeParameter

Number FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3 Remarks

57 9999 0, 0.1 to 5 s, 9999 9999: No restart 58 1.0 s 0 to 60 s

162 0 0, 1 0: Frequency search 1: No frequency search

163 0 s 0 to 20 s 164 0% 0 to 100% 165 150% 0 to 200%

CS SD

Connect CS-SD for use of only automatic restart after instantaneous power failure.

(Pr.163) Pr.58

Pr.164

Voltage

Time Voltage rise time

4

PARAMETERS

88

Refer to the figures in the previous page and following table, and set the parameters: SettingParameter

Number FR-B FR-B3 Description

0 Frequency search made Frequency search is made after detection of an instantaneous power failure.

162 1

No frequency search Independently of the motor coasting speed, the output voltage is gradually increased with the frequency kept as preset.

0.75K to 1.5K

0.4K to 1.5K

0.5 s coasting time

2.2K to 7.5K 1.0 s coasting time57 0

11K or more 3.0 s coasting time

Generally use this setting.

0.1 to 5 s Waiting time for inverter-triggered restart after power is restored from an instantaneous power failure. (Set this time between 0.1 s and 5 s according to the inertia moment (J) and torque of the load.)

9999 No restart 58 0 to 60 s

163 0 to 20 s 164 0 to 100% 165 0 to 200%

Normally the motor may be run with the factory settings. These values are adjustable to the load (inertia moment, torque).

Note: 1. When restart operation is selected, UVT and IPF among the alarm output signals are not output at occurrence of an instantaneous power failure.

2. When combining the FR-B-750 with a 0.2kW motor, use it with no frequency search. 3. When Pr. 57 9999, the inverter will not run if the CS signal remain off. 4. When Pr. 162 = "0", the DC dynamic brake is operated instantly on detection of restarting speed.

Therefore, if the inertia moment (J) of the load is small, the speed may reduce. 5. When Pr. 162 = "1", the output frequency before an instantaneous power failure is stored and

output at the time of restart. If the power of the inverter control circuit is lost, the frequency before an instantaneous power failure cannot be stored and the inverter will start at 0Hz.

6. The SU and FU signals are not output during restart but are output after the restart cushion time has elapsed.

7. For commercial power supply-inverter switch-over, the safety certification test has not been made. When using this function, the explosion-proof certification test is required separately.

CAUTION When automatic restart after instantaneous power failure has been selected, the motor and machine will start suddenly (after the reset time has elapsed) after occurrence of an instantaneous power failure. Stay away from the motor and machine. When you have selected automatic restart after instantaneous power failure, apply the supplied CAUTION seals in easily visible places.

PARAMETERS

89

4.2.21 Remote setting function selection (Pr. 59)

Pr. 59 "remote setting function selection"

If the operator panel is located away from the control box, you can use contact signals to perform continuous variable-speed operation, without using analog signals.

By merely setting this parameter, you can use the acceleration, deceleration and setting clear functions of the motorized speed setter (FR-FK). When the remote function is used, the output frequency of the inverter can be compensated for as follows: External operation mode Frequency set by RH/RM operation plus external running frequency other

than multi-speeds (Set "1" in Pr. 28 to select the compensation input (terminal 1).)

PU operation mode Frequency set by RH/RM operation plus PU running frequency Factory Setting Setting RangeParameter

Number FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3 59 0 0, 1, 2

Deceleration (RM) Clear (RL)

Acceleration (RH)

Forward rotation (STF) ON ON Power supply ON

0Hz

(Note)

ON ON

ON ON

ON

ON

When Pr. 59=1

When Pr. 59=2

ON

ON

O ut

pu t

fre qu

en cy

(H z)

Note: External operation frequency or PU operation frequency other than multi-speed

Refer to the following table and set the parameter: Operation

Pr. 59 Setting Remote setting function Frequency setting storage function (E2PROM)

0 No 1 Yes Yes 2 Yes No

Use Pr. 59 to select whether the remote setting function is made valid or not and whether the frequency setting storage function* for remote setting is made valid or not. When you selected "remote setting function = yes", the functions of the terminals RH, RM, RL are changed to acceleration (RH), deceleration (RM) and clear (RL).

* Frequency setting storage function The remote setting frequency (frequency set by RH, RM operation) is stored into memory. When power is switched off once, then on again, operation is resumed at this setting of the output frequency. (Pr. 59=1)

Frequency at the time when the start signal (STF or STR) has switched off Frequency at the time when the RH (acceleration) and RM (deceleration) signals have remained off for

more than 1 minute

Pr. 1 "maximum frequency" Pr. 7 "acceleration time" Pr. 8 "deceleration time" Pr. 28 "multi-speed input compensation" Pr. 44 "second acceleration/deceleration time" Pr. 45 "second deceleration time"

Related parameters

4

PARAMETERS

90

Note: 1. The frequency can be varied by RH (acceleration) and RM (deceleration) can vary the frequency between 0 and the maximum frequency (Pr. 1 setting).

2. When the acceleration or deceleration signal switches on, the set frequency varies according to the slope set in Pr. 44 or Pr. 45. The output frequency acceleration/deceleration times are as set in Pr. 7 and Pr. 8, respectively. Therefore, the longer preset times are used to vary the actual output frequency.

3. If the start signal (STF or STR) is off, switching on the acceleration (RH) or deceleration (RM) signal varies the set frequency.

CAUTION

When selecting this function, re-set the maximum frequency according to the machine.

4.2.22 Intelligent mode selection (Pr. 60) Pr. 60 "intelligent mode selection"

The inverter automatically sets appropriate parameters for operation.

If you do not set the acceleration and deceleration times and V/F pattern, you can run the inverter as if appropriate values had been set in the corresponding parameters. This operation mode is useful to start operation immediately without making fine parameter settings.

If the intelligent operation mode has been selected, entry of the jog signal or RT (second function selection) signal during an inverter stop starts ordinary operation, with priority given to jog operation or second function selection. After a start in the intelligent operation mode, neither the JOG signal nor the RT signal is accepted.

Factory Setting Setting RangeParameter Number FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3

60 0 0 to 8

Pr. 7 "acceleration time" Pr. 8 "deceleration time" Pr. 13 "starting frequency" Pr. 19 "base frequency voltage" Pr. 80, Pr. 81 (advanced magnetic flux vector control) Pr. 278 to Pr. 285 (brake sequence functions)

Related parameters

PARAMETERS

91

Pr. 60

Setting Operation Mode Description Automatically Set Parameters

0 Ordinary operation mode

1, 2 Shortest acceleration/ deceleration mode

Set to accelerate/decelerate the motor in the shortest time. The inverter makes acceleration/deceleration in the shortest time using its full capabilities. During deceleration, an insufficient brake capability may cause the regenerative overvoltage alarm (E.OV3). "1": Stall prevention operation level 150% "2": Stall prevention operation level 180%

Pr. 7, Pr. 8

3 Optimum acceleration/ deceleration mode (Note 3, 5)

Optimum operation can be carried out by fully utilizing the inverter capabilities in the continuous rating range. Self-learning automatically sets the corresponding parameters so that the average current during acceleration/deceleration is equal to the rated current. Appropriate for applications where the load will not vary by a large ammount.

Pr. 7, Pr. 8

4 Energy-saving mode (Note 4)

This operation mode tunes the output voltage online to minimize the inverter output power during constant-speed operation. Appropriate for energy-saving applications such as fan and pump.

Output voltage

5, 6 Elevator mode (Note 4)

Automatically controls the inverter output voltage to deliver the maximum torque in both the driving and regenerative modes. Appropriate for a counterbalanced elevator. "5": Stall prevention operation level 150% "6": Stall prevention operation level 180%

Pr. 13, Pr. 19

7 Mechanical brake opening completion signal input

8

Brake sequence mode Mechanical

brake opening completion signal not input

This function causes the inverter to output the mechanical brake operation timing signal for elevating application. For function details and related parameter setting, refer to Pr. 278 to Pr. 285 (brake sequence functions).

Pr. 10, Pr. 11, Pr. 12 (Note 6)

Note: 1. Cannot be set for the FR-B series. 2. When more accurate control is required for your application, set the other parameters as

appropriate. 3. Because of the learning system, this control is not valid at the first time in the optimum

acceleration/deceleration mode. Also, this mode is only valid for frequency setting of 30.01Hz or more.

4. Since the FR-B3 series is run under advanced magnetic flux vector control, the settings of the energy-saving mode and elevator mode are ignored.

5. If an overvoltage (OV3) trip has occurred during operation in the optimum acceleration/deceleration mode (setting "3"), re-set Pr. 8 "deceleration time" to a larger value and restart operation in this mode.

6. The setting of "7" or "8" (brake sequence mode) makes Pr. 10 to Pr. 12 (DC dynamic brake) invalid.

4

PARAMETERS

92

Pr. 60 "intelligent mode selection"

Related parameter

4.2.23 Acceleration/deceleration reference current (Pr. 61 to Pr. 64)

Pr. 61 "Reference I for intelligent mode"

Pr. 62 "Ref. I for intelligent mode accel."

Pr. 63 "Ref. I for intelligent mode decel."

Pr. 64 "starting frequency for elevator mode"

Set these parameters to improve performance in the intelligent mode. Factory Setting Setting RangeParameter

Number FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3 Remarks

61 9999 0 to 500A, 9999 9999: Referenced from rated inverter current.

62 9999 0 to 200%, 9999 63 9999 0 to 200%, 9999 64 9999 0 to 10Hz, 9999

(1) Pr. 61 "reference I for intelligent mode" Setting Reference Current

9999 (factory setting) Referenced from rated inverter current 0 to 500A Referenced from setting (rated motor current)

(2) Pr. 62 "Ref. I for intelligent mode accel."

(The reference value differs between the shortest acceleration/deceleration mode and optimum acceleration/deceleration mode.) The reference current setting can be changed.

Setting Reference Current Remarks 150% (180%) is the limit value. Shortest acceleration/deceleration mode9999 (factory setting) 100% is the optimum value. Optimum acceleration/deceleration mode The setting of 0 to 200% is the limit value. Shortest acceleration/deceleration mode

0 to 200% The setting of 0 to 200% is the optimum value. Optimum acceleration/deceleration mode

(3) Pr. 63 " Ref. I for intelligent mode decel."

(The reference value differs between the shortest acceleration/deceleration mode and optimum acceleration/deceleration mode.) The reference current setting can be changed.

Setting Reference Current Remarks 150% (180%) is the limit value. Shortest acceleration/deceleration mode9999 (factory setting) 100% is the optimum value. Optimum acceleration/deceleration mode The setting of 0 to 200% is the limit value. Shortest acceleration/deceleration mode

0 to 200% The setting of 0 to 200% is the optimum value.

Optimum acceleration/deceleration mode

(4) Pr. 64 "starting frequency for elevator mode" Setting Reference Current

9999 (factory setting) 2Hz is the starting frequency. 0 to 10Hz The setting of 0 to 10Hz is the starting frequency.

Note: Pr. 61 to Pr. 64 are only valid when any of "1 to 6" is selected for Pr. 60.

PARAMETERS

93

4.2.24 Retry function (Pr. 65, Pr. 67 to Pr. 69)

Pr. 65 "retry selection"

Pr. 67 "number of retries at alarm occurrence"

Pr. 68 "retry waiting time"

Pr. 69 "retry count display erasure"

When an alarm occurs, the retry function causes the inverter to automatically reset itself to make a restart and continue operation. You can select whether retry is made or not, alarms reset for retry, number of retries made, and waiting time.

Factory Setting Setting RangeParameter Number FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3

65 0 0 to 5 67 0 0 to 10, 101 to 110 68 1 s 0 to 10 s 69 0 0

Use Pr. 65 to select alarms to be reset for retry. Errors Reset for Retry Setting

Display 0 1 2 3 4 5 E.OC1 E.OC2 E.OC3 E.OV1 E.OV2 E.OV3 E.THM E.THT E.IPF E.UVT E.FIN E. BE E. GF E. LF

E.OHT E.OLT E.OPT E.OP1 E.OP2 E.OP3 E. PE E.PUE E.RET E.CPU E. 6 E. 7

E.MB1 (Note 4) E.MB2 (Note 4) E.MB3 (Note 4) E.MB4 (Note 4) E.MB5 (Note 4) E.MB6 (Note 4) E.MB7 (Note 4)

E.P24 E.CTE

Note: indicates the errors selected for retry.

4

PARAMETERS

94

Pr. 12 "DC injection brake voltage" Pr. 19 "base frequency voltage" Pr. 60 "intelligent mode selection" Pr. 80 "motor capacity" Pr. 81 "number of motor poles" Pr. 96 "auto tuning setting/status"

Related parameters

Use Pr. 67 to set the number of retries at alarm occurrence.

Pr. 67 Setting Number of Retries Alarm Signal Output 0 Retry is not made.

1 to 10 1 to 10 times Not output. 101 to 110 1 to 10 times Output.

Use Pr. 68 to set the waiting time from when an inverter alarm occurs until a restart in the range 0 to 10 seconds.

Reading the Pr. 69 value provides the cumulative number of successful restart times made by retry. The setting of "0" erases the cumulative number of times.

Note: 1. The cumulative number in Pr. 69 is incremented by "1" when retry operation is regarded as successful, i.e. when normal operation is continued without any alarm occurring during a period more than four times longer than the time set in Pr. 68.

2. If alarms occur consecutively within a period four times longer than the above waiting time, the operation panel (FR-DU04) may show data different from the most recent data or the parameter unit (FR-PU04) may show data different from the first retry data. The data stored as the error reset for retry is only that of the alarm which occurred the first time.

3. When an inverter alarm is reset for retry with the retry function, the stored data of the electronic overcurrent protection, regenerative brake duty, etc. are not cleared. (Different from the power-on reset.)

4. The FR-B series does not display E.MB1 to 7.

CAUTION When you have selected the retry function, stay away from the motor and machine unless required. They will start suddenly (after the reset time has elapsed) after occurrence of an alarm. When you have selected the retry function, apply the supplied CAUTION seals in easily visible places.

Pr. 66 Refer to Pr. 22.

Pr. 70 Refer to Pr. 30.

4.2.25 Applied motor (Pr. 71)

Pr. 71 "applied motor"

Set the motor used.

Factory Setting Setting RangeParameter Number FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3

71 0 0, 1 0 to 8, 13 to 18, 20, 23, 24

PARAMETERS

95

Refer to the following list and set this parameter according to the motor used.

MotorPr. 71 Setting Thermal Characteristics of Electronic Overcurrent Protection Standard Constant

Torque 0 Thermal characteristics matching a standard motor 1 Thermal characteristics matching the Mitsubishi constant-torque motor

2 Thermal characteristics matching a standard motor 5-point flexible V/F characteristics

20 Thermal characteristics for advanced magnetic flux vector control of the Mitsubishi standard motor SF-JR4P (1.5kW or less)

3 Standard motor 13 Constant-torque motor

23 Mitsubishi general-purpose motor SF-JR4P (1.5kW or less)

Select "offline auto tuning setting".

4 Standard motor 14 Auto tuning data can be read or set anew.

24 Mitsubishi general-purpose motor SF-JR4P (1.5kW or less)

Constant-torque motor

5 Standard motor 15 Constant-torque motor Star connection

6 Standard motor 16 Constant-torque motor Delta connection

Motor constants can be entered directly.

7 Standard motor 17 Constant-torque motor Star connection

8 Standard motor 18 Constant-torque motor Delta connection

Direct motor constant entry and offline auto tuning

Note: 1. For the FR-B series, set "0" or "1" in Pr. 71. 2. For the FR-B3 series, set "3, 13" or "4, 14" in Pr. 71 as you have to perform offline auto tuning. 3. Refer to Pr. 96 for offline auto tuning.

CAUTION

Set this parameter correctly according to the motor used. Incorrect setting may cause the motor to overheat and burn.

4

PARAMETERS

96

4.2.26 PWM carrier frequency (Pr. 72, Pr. 240)

Pr. 72 "PWM frequency selection"

Pr. 240 "Soft-PWM setting"

You can change the motor tone.

By parameter setting, you can select Soft-PWM control which changes the motor tone. Soft-PWM control changes motor noise from a metallic tone into an unoffending complex tone.

Factory Setting Setting RangeParameter Number FR-B FR-B3 FR-B3-N FR-B FR-B3 FR-B3-N

Remarks

72 2 15 0 to 15 0: 0.7kHz, 15: 14.5kHz 240 1 1 0, 1 1: Soft-PWM valid

Refer to the following list and set the parameters:

Parameter Number Factory Setting Description

72 0 to 15 PWM carrier frequency can be changed. The setting displayed is in [kHz]. Note that 0 indicates 0.7kHz and 15 indicates 14.5kHz.

0 Soft-PWM invalid240 1 When any of "0 to 5" is set in Pr. 72, Soft-PWM is made valid.

Note: 1. Cannot be set for the FR-B series. 2. For the FR-B3-(H)400 to 37K, set 2 in Pr. 72 and 1 in Pr. 240.

For the FR-B3-N(H)400 to 37K, set 15 in Pr. 72. 3. A reduced PWM carrier frequency will decrease inverter-generated noise and leakage current but

increase motor noise.

PARAMETERS

97

Pr. 22 "stall prevention operation level" Pr. 903 "frequency setting voltage bias" Pr. 905 "frequency setting current gain"

Related parameters

4.2.27 Voltage input (Pr. 73)

Pr. 73 "0-5V/0-10V selection"

You can select the analog input terminal specifications, the override function and the function to switch between forward and reverse rotation depending on the input signal polarity.

Factory Setting Setting RangeParameter Number FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3

73 1 0 to 5, 10 to 15

Pr. 73

Setting Terminal AU

Signal Terminal 2

Input Voltage Terminal 1

Input Voltage Terminal 4 Input,

4 to 20mA Override Function Polarity Reversible

0 0 to 10V 0 to 10V 1 0 to 5V 0 to 10V 2 0 to 10V 0 to 5V 3 0 to 5V 0 to 5V

4 0 to 10V 0 to 10V 5 0 to 5V 0 to 5V

No (Note 3)

10 0 to 10V 0 to 10V 11 0 to 5V 0 to 10V 12 0 to 10V 0 to 5V 13 0 to 5V 0 to 5V

14 0 to 10V 0 to 10V 15

OFF (No)

0 to 5V 0 to 5V

Invalid

Valid

0 0 to 10V 1 0 to 10V 2 0 to 5V 3

Invalid

0 to 5V

4 0 to 10V 5 0 to 5V Invalid

No (Note 3)

10 0 to 10V 11 0 to 10V 12 0 to 5V 13

Invalid

0 to 5V

14 0 to 10V 15

ON (Yes)

0 to 5V Invalid

Yes

Valid

4

PARAMETERS

98

Note: 1. The value of terminal 1 (frequency setting auxiliary input) is added to the main speed setting signal of terminal 2 or 4.

2. When override has been selected, terminal 1 or 4 is for the main speed setting and terminal 2 is for the override signal (50 to 150% at 0-5V or 0-10V).

3. Indicates that a negative-polarity frequency command signal is not accepted. 4. To change the maximum output frequency at the input of the maximum frequency command

voltage (current), use the frequency setting voltage (current) gain, Pr. 903 (Pr. 905). At this time, the command voltage (current) need not be input. Also, the acceleration/deceleration time, which is a slope up/down to the acceleration/deceleration reference frequency, is not affected by the change in Pr. 73 setting.

5. When the Pr. 22 setting is "9999", the value of terminal 1 is for the stall prevention operation level setting.

6. indicates the main speed setting.

4.2.28 Input filter time constant (Pr. 74)

Pr. 74 "filter time constant"

You can set the input section's internal filter constant of an external voltage or current frequency setting signal.

Effective for eliminating noise in the frequency setting circuit. Increase the filter time constant if steady operation cannot be performed due to noise. A larger setting results in lower response. (The time constant can be set between approximately 1ms to 1s. with the setting of 0 to 8. A larger setting results in a larger filter time constant.)

Factory Setting Setting RangeParameter Number FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3

74 1 0 to 8

4.2.29 Reset selection/PU disconnection detection/PU stop selection (Pr. 75)

Pr. 75 "reset selection/ disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection"

You can select the reset input acceptance, PU (FR-DU04/FR-PU04) connector disconnection detection function and PU stop function.

Reset selection : You can select the reset function input timing. PU disconnection detection : When detecting that the PU (FR-DU04/FR-PU04) is disconnected from

the inverter for more than 1 second, this function causes the inverter to output an alarm code (E.PUE) and come to an alarm stop.

PU stop selection : When an alarm occurs in any operation mode, you can stop the motor from the PU by pressing the [STOP] key.

Factory Setting Setting RangeParameter Number FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3

75 14 0 to 3, 14 to 17

PARAMETERS

99

Pr. 75

Setting Reset Selection PU Disconnection Detection PU Stop Selection

0 Reset input normally enabled.

1 Reset input enabled only when the protective function is activated.

If the PU is disconnected, operation will be continued.

2 Reset input normally enabled.

3 Reset input enabled only when the protective function is activated.

When the PU is disconnected, the inverter output is shut off.

Pressing the [STOP] key decelerates the motor to a stop only in the PU operation mode.

14 Reset input normally enabled.

15 Reset input enabled only when the protective function is activated.

If the PU is disconnected, operation will be continued.

16 Reset input normally enabled.

17 Reset input enabled only when the protective function is activated.

When the PU is disconnected, the inverter output is shut off.

Pressing the [STOP] key decelerates the motor to a stop in any of the PU, external and communication operation modes.

How to make a restart after a stop made by the [STOP] key from the PU during external operation

(1) Operation panel (FR-DU04)

1) After completion of deceleration to a stop, switch off the STF or STR signal. 2) Press the [MODE] key two times* to call the indication.

Note: When Pr. 79 = "3", press the [MODE] key three times to display , then press the [DOWN] key and proceed to step 3).

(* For monitor screen) .......Refer to page 44 for the monitor display provided by pressing the [MODE] key.

3) Press the [SET] key. 4) Turn on the STF or STR signal.

(2) Parameter unit (FR-PU04)

1) After completion of deceleration to a stop, switch off the STF or STR signal. 2) Press the [EXT] key. 3) Switch on the STF or STR signal.

(Example) A restart after a stop during external operation

STF ON OFF

Sp ee

d

Operation panel [SET] key

[STOP] key

Time

(STR)

The other way of making a restart other than the above method is to perform a power-reset or to make a reset with the inverter reset terminal.

4

PARAMETERS

100

Note: 1. Entering the reset signal (RES) during operation causes the inverter during a reset to shut off its output, the data of the electronic overcurrent protection to be reset, and the motor to coast.

2. The PU disconnection detection function judges that the PU is disconnected when it is kept disconnected for more than 1 second. The PU which had been disconnected from before power- on is not judged as an alarm.

3. To resume operation, reset the inverter after confirming that the PU is connected securely. 4. When PU disconnection detection is set and the PU is then disconnected during PU jog

operation, the motor decelerates to a stop. The motor will not stop if a PU disconnection alarm occurs.

5. The Pr. 75 value can be set any time. Also, if parameter (all) clear is executed, this setting will not return to the initial value.

6. When the motor is stopped by the PU stop function, PS is displayed but an alarm is not output. When the PU connector is used for RS-485 communication operation, the reset selection and PU stop selection functions are valid but the PU disconnection detection function is invalid.

7. The reset key of the PU is only valid when the protective function is activated, independent of the Pr. 75 setting.

CAUTION

Do not reset the inverter with the start signal on. Otherwise, the motor will start instantly after resetting, which may lead to hazardous conditions.

PARAMETERS

101

4.2.30 Alarm code output selection (Pr. 76)

Pr. 76 "alarm code output selection"

When an alarm occurs, its code can be output as a 4-bit digital signal from the open collector output terminals. When programmed operation has been selected, this parameter also serves to output a group operation signal. The alarm code can read by a programmable controller etc to show its remedy on a display. Also you can look at the progress of programmed operation.

Factory Setting Setting RangeParameter Number FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3

76 0 0 to 3

Alarm code output Output TerminalsPr. 76 Setting SU IPF OL FU

0 Alarm code is not output. (Depends on Pr. 190 to Pr. 195). 1 Alarm code bit 3 Alarm code bit 2 Alarm code bit 1 Alarm code bit 0

2 When an alarm occurs, an alarm code signal is output. (Output signal is the same as in 1.) When operation is normal, an operation status signal is output. (Output signal is the same as in 0.)

3 (during programmed

operation) Output at time-out During group 3 operation During group 2 operation During group 1 operation

Note: 1. For alarm code definitions, refer to page 183. 2. The Pr. 76 setting overrides the Pr. 190 to Pr. 195 settings. Therefore, if you assign other signals

to output terminals SU, IPF, OL and FU using Pr. 190 to Pr. 195, these terminals provide the output signals as listed above when any of "1 to 3" is set in Pr. 76. This should be noted when using the functions which use the output signals to exercise control.

Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" Pr. 190 to Pr. 195 (output terminal function selection) Pr. 200 to Pr. 231 (programmed operation)

Related parameters

4

PARAMETERS

102

4.2.31 Parameter Write Inhibit Selection (Pr. 77)

Pr. 77 "parameter write disable selection"

You can select between write-enable and disable for parameters. This function is used to prevent parameter values from being rewritten by accident.

Factory Setting Setting RangeParameter Number FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3

77 0 0, 1, 2

Pr. 77 Setting Function

0 Write enabled during a stop only. Parameter values may only be written during a stop in the PU operation mode. (Note 1)

1 Write disabled. Values of Pr.75, Pr. 77 and Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" may be written.

2 Write enabled even during operation.

Note: 1. The values of the parameters half-tone screened in the parameter list can be set at any time. 2. If Pr. 77 = "2", the values of the following parameters cannot be written during operation. Stop

operation when changing their parameter settings. Parameter Number Name Parameter

Number Name

23 Stall prevention operation level at double speed 137 Start waiting time

48 Second stall prevention operation current 138 Commercial power supply-inverter switch-

over selection at alarm occurrence

49 Second stall prevention operation frequency 139 Automatic inverter-commercial power

supply switch-over frequency 60 Intelligent mode selection 180 RL terminal function selection 61 Reference current 181 RM terminal function selection

66 Stall prevention operation reduction starting frequency 182 RH terminal function selection

71 Applied motor 183 RT terminal function selection 79 Operation mode selection 184 AU terminal function selection 80 Motor capacity 185 JOG terminal function selection 81 Number of motor poles 186 CS terminal function selection 83 Rated motor voltage 190 RUN terminal function selection 84 Rated motor frequency 191 SU terminal function selection 95 Advanced mode selection 192 IPF terminal function selection 96 Auto tuning setting/status 193 OL terminal function selection

135 Commercial power supply-inverter switch-over sequence output terminal selection

194 FU terminal function selection

136 MC switch-over interlock time 195 ABC terminal function selection

3. By setting "1" in Pr. 77, the following clear operations can be inhibited: Parameter clear All clear User clear

Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" Related parameters

PARAMETERS

103

4.2.32 Reverse rotation prevention selection (Pr. 78)

Pr. 78 "reverse rotation prevention selection"

This function can prevent any reverse rotation fault resulting from the misoperation of the start signal.

Used for a machine, which runs only in one direction, e.g. fan, pump. (The setting of this function is valid for the PU, external and communication operations.)

Factory Setting Setting RangeParameter Number FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3

78 0 0, 1, 2

Pr. 78 Setting Function

0 Both forward and reverse rotations allowed 1 Reverse rotation disallowed 2 Forward rotation disallowed

Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" Related parameters

4

PARAMETERS

104

4.2.33 Operation mode selection (Pr. 79)

Pr. 79 "operation mode selection"

Used to select the operation mode of the inverter. You can choose any of the operation modes: operation using external signals (external operation), operation from the PU (FR-DU04/FR-PU04) (PU operation), combination of PU operation and external operation (external/PU combined operation), and computer link operation (when the FR-A5NR option is used).

Factory Setting Setting RangeParameter Number FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3

79 0 0 to 8

Pr. 79 Setting Function

0 External operation mode at power-on PU or external operation can be selected.

1 PU operation mode 2 External operation mode

3 External/PU combined operation mode 1 Running frequency ...........Set from the PU (FR-DU04/FR-PU04) (direct setting, [UP/DOWN] key) or external

signal input (multi-speed setting only) Start signal .......................External signal input (terminal STF, STR)

4 External/PU combined operation mode 2 Running frequency ...........External signal input (terminal 2, 4, 1, jog, multi-speed selection) Start signal ....................... Input from the PU (FR-DU04/FR-PU04) ([FWD] key, [REV] key)

5

Programmed operation mode You can set 10 different operation starting times, rotation directions and running frequencies for each of three groups. Operation start. ................STF Timer reset.......................STR Group selection ................RH, RM, RL

6 Switch-over mode Switch-over between PU operation, external operation and computer link operation (when the communication option such as the FR-A5NR is used) modes can be done while running.

7 External operation mode (PU operation interlock) X12 signal ON ..................May be switched to PU operation mode (output stop during external operation) X12 signal OFF ................Switching to PU operation mode inhibited

8 Switching to other than external operation mode (disallowed during operation) X16 signal ON .................Switched to external operation mode X16 signal OFF ................Switched to PU operation mode

Note: 1. Either "3" or "4" may be set to select the PU/external combined operation. These settings differ in starting method.

(1) Programmed operation With this function, you can set 10 different operation starting times, rotation directions and running frequencies individually for each of selected three groups to perform automatic operation under the control of the internal elapsed time counting timer. For full information of this function, refer to the explanations of Pr. 200 to Pr. 231.

Pr. 15 "jog frequency" Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to 27, Pr.232 to Pr.239 "multi-speed operation" Pr. 76 "alarm code output selection" Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 (input terminal function selection) Pr. 200 to Pr. 231 "programmed operation"

Pr. 15 "jog frequency" Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to 27, Pr.232 to Pr.239 (multi-speed operation) Pr. 76 "alarm code output selection" Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 (input terminal function selection) Pr. 200 to Pr. 231 (programmed operation)

Related parameters

PARAMETERS

105

(2) Switch-over mode

You can select between PU operation, external operation and computer link operation (when FR-A5NR option is used).

Operation Mode Switching Switching Operation/Operating Status

External operation to PU operation

1) Select the PU operation mode. Rotation direction is the same as that of external operation. Set frequency is as set by the potentiometer (frequency setting potentiometer). (Note that the setting will disappear when power is switched off or the inverter is reset.)

External operation to computer link operation

1) Mode change command to computer link mode is transmitted from the computer. Rotation direction is the same as that of external operation. Set frequency is as set by the potentiometer (frequency setting potentiometer). (Note that the setting will disappear when power is switched off or the inverter is reset.)

PU operation to external operation

1) Press the external operation key of the parameter unit. Rotation direction is determined by the external operation input signal. Set frequency is determined by the external frequency setting signal.

PU operation to computer link operation

1) Mode change command to computer link mode is transmitted from the computer. Rotation direction and set frequency are the same as those of PU operation.

Computer link operation to external operation

1) The switch-over command to the external mode is sent from the computer. Rotation direction is determined by the external operation input signal. Set frequency is determined by the external frequency setting signal.

Computer link operation to PU operation

1) Select the PU operation mode with the operation panel or parameter unit. Rotation direction and set frequency are the same as those of computer link operation.

(3) PU operation interlock

When the PU operation interlock signal is switched off, the operation mode is forcibly changed to the external operation mode. This function prevents the inverter from being inoperative by the external command if the mode is accidentally left unswitched from the PU operation mode.

1) Preparation Set "7" in Pr. 79 (PU operation interlock). Using any of Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 (input terminal function selection), allocate the terminal used to input X12 (PU external interlock signal). Refer to page 139 for Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 (input terminal function selection). When the X12 signal is not assigned, the function of the MRS signal changes from MRS (output stop) to PU external interlock.

Note: When terminal assignment is changed using Pr. 180 to Pr. 186, the other functions may be affected. Check the functions of the corresponding terminals before making setting.

2) Function X12 (MRS)

Signal Function/Operation

ON

Output stopped during external operation. Operation mode can be switched to PU operation mode. Parameter values can be rewritten in PU operation mode. PU operation allowed.

OFF Forcibly switched to external operation mode. External operation allowed. Switching to PU operation mode inhibited.

4

PARAMETERS

106

Operating Condition

Operation mode Status

X12 (MRS) Signal

Operation Mode

(Note 4) Operating Status Parameter Write

Switching to PU

Operation Mode

During stop ON OFF (Note 3) During stop Allowed disallowed Disallowed

PU During operation

ON OFF (Note 3)

External If external operation frequency setting and start signal are entered, operation is performed in that status.

Allowed disallowed Disallowed

OFF ON Disallowed disallowed AllowedDuring stop ON OFF During stop Disallowed disallowed Disallowed

OFF ON During operation output stop Disallowed disallowed DisallowedExternal

During operation ON OFF

External

Output stop during operation Disallowed disallowed Disallowed

Note: 1. When the Pr. 79 setting is 7 and the PU operation interlock signal is OFF, network operation such as computer link cannot be used.

2. If the X12 (MRS) signal is on, the operation mode cannot be switched to the PU operation mode when the start signal (STF, STR) is on.

3. The operation mode switches to the external operation mode independently of whether the start signal (STF, STR) is on or off. Therefore, the motor is run in the external operation mode when the X12 (MRS) signal is switched off with either of STF and STR on.

4. When an alarm occurs, the inverter can be reset by pressing the [RESET] key of the operation panel.

5. When the MRS signal is used as the PU interlock signal, switching the MRS signal on and rewriting the Pr. 79 value to other than 7 in the PU operation mode causes the MRS signal to provide the ordinary MRS function (output stop). Also, as soon as 7 is set in Pr. 79, the MRS signal acts as a PU interlock signal.

6. When the MRS signal is used as the PU external interlock signal, the signal logic conforms to the Pr. 17 setting. When Pr. 17 = 2, read ON for OFF and OFF for ON in the above explanation.

(4) Operation mode external signal switching function

1) Preparation Set "8" (switching to other than external operation mode) in Pr. 79. Using any of Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 (input terminal function selection), allocate the terminal used to input the X16 (PU-external operation switching) signal. Refer to page 139 for Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 (input terminal function selection).

Note: When terminal assignment is changed using Pr. 180 to Pr. 186, the other functions may be affected. Check the functions of the corresponding terminals before making setting.

2) Function When the X16 signal is switched on in the PU operation mode, the operation mode is forcibly changed to the external operation mode. When the X16 signal is switched off in the external operation mode, the operation mode is changed to the PU operation mode. When the X16 signal is switched off during network operation such as computer link, the operation mode is changed to the PU operation mode as soon as the switch-over command to the external operation mode is sent from the computer. Note that this switch-over may only be made while the inverter is at a stop and cannot be made during operation.

PARAMETERS

107

Pr. 71 "applied motor" Pr. 83 "rated motor voltage" Pr. 84 "rated motor frequency" Pr. 89 "speed control gain" Pr. 90 to Pr. 94 (motor constants) Pr. 96 "auto tuning setting/status" Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 (input terminal function selection)

Related parameters

X16 Signal Operation Mode ON External operation mode (cannot be changed to the PU operation mode) OFF PU operation mode (cannot be changed to the external operation mode)

4.2.34 Motor constants (Pr. 80, Pr. 81, Pr. 89)

Pr. 80 "motor capacity"

Pr. 81 "number of motor poles"

Pr. 89 "speed control gain"

You can set the advanced magnetic flux vector control. Advanced magnetic flux vector control Provides large starting torque and sufficient low-speed torque. Effective for great load fluctuation.

Factory Setting Setting RangeParameter

Number FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3 Remarks

80 9999 0.4 to 55kW, 9999 9999: V/F control

81 9999 2, 4, 6, 12, 14, 16, 9999 9999: V/F control

89 100% 0 to 200.0%

Cannot be set for the FR-B series.

As this inverter has been tested in combination with the pressure-resistant, explosion-proof motor beforehand in the explosion-proof certification, it cannot be used with any motor that is not the one tested in combination.

Perform offline auto tuning in the actually wired status.

(1) Advanced magnetic flux vector control

By setting the capacity, number of poles and type of the motor used in Pr. 80 and Pr. 81, the advanced magnetic flux vector control can be selected.

Parameter Number Setting Description

9999 V/F control80 0.4 to 55 Set the motor capacity applied. Advanced magnetic flux vector control 9999 V/F control

2, 4, 6 Set the number of motor poles. Advanced magnetic flux vector control

81 12,14,16

V/F control is selected when the X18 (magnetic flux- V/F switch-over) signal switches on. (This selection is not made during operation.) Use any of Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 to assign the terminal used for X18 signal input. 12: For 2-pole motor 14: For 4-pole motor 16: For 6-pole motor

Do not use since the inverter is not submitted to the explosion-proof certification test for operation under V/F control. (FR-B3 series)

4

PARAMETERS

108

Pr. 7 "acceleration time" Pr. 9 "electronic overcurrent protection" Pr. 71 "applied motor" Pr. 80 "motor capacity" Pr. 81 "number of motor poles" Pr. 156 "stall prevention operation selection"

Related parameters

Note: 1. Speed fluctuation is slightly greater than in the V/F control. (Advanced magnetic flux vector control may not be suitable for machines which attach importance to little speed fluctuation at low speed, e.g. grinders, lapping machines.)

2. When the surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H) is used between the inverter and motor, output torque may reduce.

3. When the terminal functions are changed using Pr. 180 to Pr. 186, the other functions may be affected. Confirm the functions of the corresponding terminals before making setting.

For adjustment of motor speed fluctuation due to load variation Pr. 89 can be used to adjust motor speed fluctuation when the load varies

Speed

Lo ad

to rq

ue

4.2.35 Offline auto tuning function (Pr. 82 to Pr. 84, Pr. 90 to Pr. 94, Pr. 96)

Pr. 82 "motor exciting current"

Pr. 83 "rated motor voltage"

Pr. 84 "rated motor frequency"

Pr. 90 "motor constant (R1)"

Pr. 91 "motor constant (R2)"

Pr. 92 "motor constant (L1)"

Pr. 93 "motor constant (L2)"

Pr. 94 "motor constant (X)"

Pr. 96 "auto tuning setting/status"

When you use the advanced magnetic flux vector control, you can perform the offline auto tuning operation to calculate motor constants automatically.

Cannot be set for the FR-B series. Offline auto tuning is made valid only when other values than "9999" are set in Pr. 80 and Pr. 81 to select the advanced magnetic flux vector control. Offline auto tuning Automatically measures the motor constants used for advanced magnetic flux vector control. Offline auto tuning can be performed with the load connected. (As the load is smaller, tuning accuracy is

higher. Tuning accuracy does not change if inertia is large.) For the offline auto tuning, you can select either the motor non-rotation mode or rotation mode. You can read, write and copy the motor constants tuned by the offline auto tuning. The offline auto tuning status can be monitored with the PU (FR-DU04/FR-PU04).

PARAMETERS

109

Factory Setting Setting RangeParameter Number FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3

Remarks

82 9999 0 to , 9999 9999: Mitsubishi standard motor 83 200V/400V 0 to 1000V Rated motor voltage 84 60Hz 50 to 120Hz Rated motor frequency 90 9999 0 to , 9999 9999: Mitsubishi standard motor 91 9999 0 to , 9999 9999: Mitsubishi standard motor 92 9999 0 to , 9999 9999: Mitsubishi standard motor 93 9999 0 to , 9999 9999: Mitsubishi standard motor 94 9999 0 to , 9999 9999: Mitsubishi standard motor 96 0 0, 1, 101 0: No tuning

The motor is connected. When "101" (offline auto tuning with motor running) is set in Pr. 96, note the following:

1) Torque may not be enough during tuning. 2) The motor may be run at nearly its rated frequency (Pr. 84 setting) without problem. 3) The brake is open. 4) No external force is applied to rotate the motor.

This instruction must be followed especially for vertical lift applications. Note that if the motor runs slightly, tuning performance is unaffected.

Note: 1. Offline auto tuning will not be performed properly if it is performed when the reactor or surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H) is connected between the inverter and motor. Remove it before starting tuning.

2. Online auto tuning cannot be used.

(1) Parameter setting

Using Pr. 80 and Pr. 81, select the advanced magnetic flux vector control. Refer to the parameter details list and set the following parameters:

1) Set "101" in Pr. 96. For setting of "101" ............................................................................Tuning with motor running.

2) Set the rated motor current (A) in Pr. 9. 3) Set the rated motor voltage (V) in Pr. 83. 4) Set the rated motor frequency (Hz) in Pr. 84. 5) Select the motor using Pr. 71.

Standard motor..................................................................................Pr. 71 = "3" Constant-torque motor ......................................................................Pr. 71 = "13"

Note: 1. Pr. 83 and Pr. 84 are only displayed when the advanced magnetic flux vector control is selected (Pr. 80, Pr. 81).

2. In these parameters, set the values given on the motor plate. When the standard motor has more than one rated value, set 200V/60Hz or 400V/60Hz. After tuning is over, set Pr. 9 "electronic overcurrent protection" to the rated current value at the operating voltage/frequency.

4

PARAMETERS

110

Parameter details Parameter Number Setting Description

9 0 to 500A Set the rated motor current (A). 0 Electronic overcurrent protection thermal characteristics suitable for standard motor

1 Electronic overcurrent protection thermal characteristics suitable for Mitsubishi's constant-torque motor

2 Electronic overcurrent protection thermal characteristics suitable for standard motor 5-point flexible V/F characteristics

20 Mitsubishi SF-JR4P standard motor (1.5kW or less). Electronic overcurrent protection thermal characteristics for advanced magnetic flux vector control

3 Standard motor 13 Constant-torque motor

23 Mitsubishi's SF-JR4P standard motor (1.5kW or less)

Select "offline auto tuning setting"

4 Standard motor 14 Constant-torque motor

24 Mitsubishi's SF-JR4P standard motor (1.5kW or less)

Auto tuning read or change setting enabled

5 Standard motor 15 Constant-torque motor Star connection

6 Standard motor 16 Constant-torque motor Delta connection

Direct input of motor constants enabled

7 Standard motor 17 Constant-torque motor Star connection

8 Standard motor

71 (Note 1)

18 Constant-torque motor Delta connection

Direct input of motor constants and offline auto tuning

83 0 to 1000V Set the rated motor voltage (V). 84 50 to 120Hz Set the rated motor frequency (Hz). 90 0 to , 9999 91 0 to , 9999 92 0 to , 9999 93 0 to , 9999

999994 0 to 100%

Tuning data (Values measured by offline auto tuning are set automatically.)

0 Offline auto tuning is not performed. 1 Offline auto tuning is performed without motor running.96

101 Offline auto tuning is performed with motor running.

Note: 1. The electronic overcurrent protection characteristics are also selected simultaneously.

(2) Tuning execution

For PU operation, press the [FWD] or [REV] key. For external operation, switch on the run command.

Note: 1. When "101" is set in Pr. 96, guard against hazards because the motor rotates. 2. To force tuning to end

Switch on the MRS or RES signal or press the [STOP] key to end. Switch off the tuning start command or make a forced stop.

3. During offline auto tuning, the following I/O signals are only valid: Input signals

STOP, OH, MRS, RT, CS, RES, STF, STR Output signals

RUN, OL, IPF, FM, AM, A, B, C 4. Special caution should be exercised when a sequence has been designed to open the

mechanical brake with the RUN signal. 5. When executing offline auto tuning, give the operation command after switching on the main

circuit power supply (R, S, T) of the inverter.

PARAMETERS

111

(3) Monitoring the offline tuning status

When the parameter unit (FR-PU04) is used, the Pr. 96 value is displayed during tuning on the main monitor as shown below. When the operation panel (FR-DU04) is used, only the same numerical value as on the PU is displayed:

Parameter unit (FR-PU04) main monitor (For inverter trip)

1. Setting 2. Tuning in progress 3. Completion 4. Error-activated end

Display STOP PU 101

FWD PU 102

STF

TUNE

STOP PU

103 STF

TUNE COMPLETION

STOP PU 9

STF

TUNE ERROR

Operation panel (FR-DU04) display (For inverter trip)

1. Setting 2. Tuning in progress 3. Completion 4. Error-activated end

Displayed value 101 102 103 9

Reference: Offline auto tuning time (factory setting) Offline Auto Tuning Setting Time

2: Rotation mode

Approximately 40 seconds (Offline auto tuning time varies with acceleration and deceleration time settings as indicated below: Offline auto tuning time = acceleration time + deceleration time + approximately 30 seconds)

(4) Ending the offline auto tuning

1) Confirm the Pr. 96 value. Normal end: "3" or "103" is displayed. Error-activated end: "9", "91", "92" or "93" is displayed. Forced end ... "8" is displayed.

2) When tuning ended normally. For PU operation, press the [STOP] key. For external operation, switch off the start signal (STF or STR). This operation resets the offline auto tuning and the PU's monitor display returns to the ordinary indication. (Without this operation, next operation cannot be done.)

3) When tuning was ended due to an error. Offline auto tuning did not end normally. (Motor constants have not been set.) Reset the inverter and start tuning all over again.

4) Error display definitions.

Error Display Error Cause Remedy 9 Inverter trip Re-set.

91 Current limit (stall prevention) function was activated.

Increase acceleration/deceleration time. Set "1" in Pr. 156.

92 Inverter output voltage reached 75% of rated value. Check for fluctuation of power supply voltage.

93 Calculation error Check the motor wiring and re-set.

No connection with motor will result in 93 error.

4

PARAMETERS

112

5) When tuning was forced to end A forced end occurs when tuning is forced to end by pressing the [STOP] key or turning off the start signal (STF or STR) during tuning. In this case, offline auto tuning was not brought to a normal end. (The motor constants are not yet set.) Reset the inverter and restart tuning.

Note: 1. The motor constants measured once in the offline auto tuning are stored as parameters and their data is held until the offline auto tuning is performed again.

2. An instantaneous power failure occurring during tuning will result in a tuning error. After power is restored, the inverter goes into the ordinary operation mode. Therefore, when STF (STR) is on, the motor runs in forward (reverse) rotation.

3. When "8888" is set in Pr. 11, the tuning is forced to end and the DC dynamic brake is started upon input of the MRS signal.

4. Any alarm occurring during tuning is handled as in the ordinary mode. Note that if an error retry has been set, retry is ignored.

5. The set frequency monitor displayed during the offline auto tuning is 0Hz.

CAUTION

Note that the motor may start running suddenly. When the offline auto tuning is used in vertical lift application, e.g. a lifter, it may drop due to insufficient torque.

When the motor constants (Pr. 90 to Pr. 94) are to be set as desired, the data measured in the offline auto tuning may be read and utilized or changed.

To utilize or change the offline auto tuning data

1. Set "801" in Pr. 77. Only when the Pr. 80 and Pr. 81 settings are other than "9999", the parameter values of the motor constants (Pr. 90 to Pr. 94) can be displayed. Though the parameter values of other than the motor constants (Pr. 90 to Pr. 94) can also be displayed, they are parameters for manufacturer setting and should be handled carefully without misuse.

2. Set any of the following values in Pr. 71: Standard motor ...................................................................................... Pr. 71 = "4" Constant-torque motor........................................................................... Pr. 71 = "14"

3. In the parameter setting mode, read the following parameters and set desired values. (Note 1)

Setting Range Factory SettingParameter

Number Name FR-B FR-B3

Setting Increments

FR-B FR-B3

82 Motor exciting current 0 to ****, 9999 1 9999

90 Motor constant R1 0 to ****, 9999 1 9999

91 Motor constant R2 0 to ****, 9999 1 9999

92 Motor constant L1 0 to ****, 9999 1 9999

93 Motor constant L2 0 to ****, 9999 1 9999

94 Motor constant X 0 to ****, 9999 1 9999

4. Return the Pr. 77 setting to the original value.

PARAMETERS

113

Note: 1. Pr. 90 to Pr. 94 values may only be read when the Pr. 80 and Pr. 81 settings are other than "9999" (advanced magnetic flux vector control selected).

2. Set "9999" in Pr. 90 to Pr. 94 to use the standard motor constants (including those for the constant-torque motor).

3. Set "3" (standard motor) or "13" (constant-torque motor) in Pr. 71 to use the constants measured in the offline auto tuning.

4. As the motor constants measured in the offline auto tuning have been converted into internal data (****), refer to the following setting example when making setting: Setting example: To slightly increase Pr. 90 value

When Pr. 90 is displayed "2516", set 2642, i.e. 25161.05=2641.8, in Pr. 90. (The value displayed has been converted into a value for internal use. Hence, simple addition of a given value to the displayed value has no significance.)

Pr. 96 Refer to Pr. 82.

Pr. 110, Pr. 111 Refer to Pr. 7.

Pr. 114, Pr. 115 Refer to Pr. 48.

Pr. 116 Refer to Pr. 42.

4.2.36 Computer link operation (Pr. 117 to Pr. 124)

Pr. 117 "station number"

Pr. 118 "communication speed"

Pr. 119 "stop bit length"

Pr. 120 "parity check presence"

Pr. 121 "number of communication retries"

Pr. 122 "communication check time interval"

Pr. 123 "waiting time setting"

Pr. 124 "CRLF presence/absence selection"

Used to perform required settings for RS-485 communication between the inverter and personal computer. The motor can be run from the PU connector of the inverter using RS-485 communication.

Communication specifications Conforming standard RS-485 Number of inverters connected 1:N (maximum 32 inverters) Communication speed Selected between 19200, 9600 and 4800bps Control protocol Asynchronous Communication method Half-duplex

Character system ASCII (7 bits/8 bits) selectable Stop bit length Selectable between 1 bit and 2 bits. Terminator CR/LF (presence/absence selectable)

Parity check Selected between presence (even/odd) or absenceCheck system Sumcheck Present

C om

m un

ic at

io n

sp ec

ifi ca

tio ns

Waiting time setting Selectable between presence or absence

4

PARAMETERS

114

For the data codes of the parameters, refer to the data code list in the appendices. Factory Setting Setting RangeParameter

Number FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3 117 0 0 to 31 118 192 48, 96, 192

Data length 8 0, 1119 1 Data length 7 10, 11 120 2 0, 1, 2 121 1 0 to 10, 9999 122 0 0 to 999.8s, 9999 123 9999 0 to 150ms, 9999 124 1 0, 1, 2

To make communication between the personal computer and inverter, the communication specifications must be set to the inverter initially. If initial setting is not made or there is a setting fault, data transfer cannot be made. Note: After making the initial setting of the parameters, always reset the inverter. After you have changed the

communication-related parameters, communication cannot be made if the inverter is not reset. SettingParameter

Number Name FR-B FR-B3

Description

117 Station number 0 to 31

Station number specified for communication from the PU connector. Set the inverter station numbers when two or more inverters are connected to one personal computer.

48 4800 baud 96 9600 baud118

Communi- cation speed 192 19200 baud

0 Stop bit length 1 bit 8 bits

1 Stop bit length 2 bits 10 Stop bit length 1 bit

119 Stop bit length/data length 7 bits 11 Stop bit length 2 bits

0 Absent 1 Odd parity present120

Parity check presence/ absence 2 Even parity present

0 to 10 Set the permissible number of retries at occurrence of data receive error. If the number of consecutive errors exceeds the permissible value, the inverter will come to an alarm stop.

121 Number of communica- tion retries 9999

(65535)

If a communication error occurs, the inverter will not come to an alarm stop. At this time, the inverter can be coasted to a stop by MRS or RES input. During an error, the light fault signal (LF) is given to the open collector output. Allocate the used terminal with any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 195 (output terminal function selection).

0 No communication

0.1 to 999.8 Set the communication check time [s] interval. If no-communication state persists for longer than the permissible time, the inverter will come to an alarm stop.

122

Communi- cation check time interval

9999 Communication check suspended 0 to 150 Set the waiting time between data transmission to the inverter and response.123 Waiting

time setting 9999 Set with communication data. 0 Without CR/LF 1 With CR, Without LF124

CR, LF presence/ absence selection 2 With CR/LF

PARAMETERS

115

(1) Communication protocol

Data communication between the computer and inverter is performed using the following procedure:

*1

*2

Computer

Inverter

(Data flow)

Computer

(Data flow)

Inverter

Data read

Data write

Time 1)

2) 3)

4) 5)

*1. If a data error is detected and a retry must be made, execute retry operation from the user program. The inverter comes to an alarm stop if the number of consecutive retries exceeds the parameter setting.

*2. On receipt of a data error occurrence, the inverter returns "reply data 3)" to the computer again. The inverter comes to an alarm stop if the number of consecutive data errors reaches or exceeds the parameter setting.

(2) Communication operation presence/absence and data format types

Communication operation presence/absence and data format types are as follows:

No. Operation Run Command

Running Frequency

Parameter Write

Inverter Reset

Monitor- ing

Para- meter Read

1) Communication request is sent to the inverter in accordance with the user program.

A A A A B B

2) Inverter data processing time Present Present Present Absent Present Present No error

Request accepted C C C Absent E

E E

3)

Reply data from the inverter (Data 1) is checked for error)

With error request rejected D D D Absent F F

4) Computer processing delay time Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent No error

No processing Absent Absent Absent Absent G G

5)

Answer from computer in response to reply data 3) (Data 3) is checked for error)

With error data 3) is output Absent Absent Absent Absent H H

4

PARAMETERS

116

(3) Data format

Hexadecimal data is used. Data is automatically transferred in ASCII between the computer and inverter. Data format types

1) Communication request data from computer to inverter

*3 ENQ *4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

*3 ENQ *4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

*3 ENQ *4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

[Data write]

Format A

[Data read]

Format A'

Format B

Inverter station number

Instruction code

*5 Waiting

time

Data

Sum sheck

Inverter station number

Inverter station number

Instruction code

Instruction code

*5 Waiting

time

*5 Waiting

time

Data

Sum sheck

Sum sheck

Number of characters

Number of characters

Number of characters

Note: 1. The inverter station numbers may be set between H00 and H1F (stations 0 and 31) in hexadecimal.

2. *3 indicates the control code. 3. *4 indicates the CR or LF code.

When data is transmitted from the computer to the inverter, codes CR (carriage return) and LF (line feed) are automatically set at the end of a data group on some computers. In this case, setting must also be made from the inverter according to the computer. Also, the presence and absence of the CR and LF codes can be selected using Pr. 124.

4. For *5, create the communication request data with no "waiting time" in the data format when Pr. 123 "waiting time setting" 9999. (The number of characters decreases by 1.)

2) Send data from inverter to computer during data write

*3 ACK *4

1 2 3 4

*3 NAK

1 2 3 4

*4

5

[No data error detected] [Data error detected]

Format C Format D Inverter station number

Inverter station number

Error code

Number of characters Number of characters

3) Reply data from inverter to computer during data read

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

[No data error detected]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

*3 STXFormat E

Inverter station number

Read data

Sum check

Number of characters

Format E'

*3 ETX *4Read data

Inverter station number

Sum check *4*3

ETX *3

STX

[Data error detected]

Format F

*3 NAK

Error code *4

Inverter station number

4) Send data from computer to inverter during data read

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

[No data error detected]

*3 ACKFormat G

Inverter station number

Number of characters

Format H*4 *3 NAK

[Data error detected]

*4 Inverter station number

Number of characters

PARAMETERS

117

(4) Data definitions

1) Control codes Signal ASCII Code Description STX H02 Start of Text (Start of data) ETX H03 End of Text (End of data) ENQ H05 Enquiry (Communication request) ACK H06 Acknowledge (No data error detected) LF H0A Line Feed CR H0D Carriage Return

NAK H15 Negative Acknowledge (Data error detected)

2) Inverter station number Specify the station number of the inverter which communicates with the computer.

3) Instruction code Specify the processing request (e.g. operation, monitoring) given by the computer to the inverter. Hence, the inverter can be run and monitored in various ways by specifying the instruction code as appropriate.

4) Data Indicates the data such as frequency and parameters transferred to and from the inverter. The definitions and ranges of set data are determined in accordance with the instruction codes. (Refer to 208.)

5) Waiting time Specify the waiting time between the receipt of data at the inverter form the computer and the transmission of reply data. Set the waiting time in accordance with the response time of the computer between 0 and 150ms in 10ms increments (e.g. 1 = 10ms, 2 = 20ms).

Computer

Inverter

Inverter

Computer

Inverter data processing time =waiting time + data check time (set value10ms) (12ms)

(The number of characters is decreased by 1.) Note : When Pr. 123 "waiting time setting" , 9999, create the communication request data with no "waiting time" in the data format.

4

PARAMETERS

118

6) Sum check code The sum check code is 2-digit ASCII (hexadecimal) representing the lower 1 byte (8 bits) of the sum (binary) derived from the checked ASCII data.

30 + 31 + 31 + 37 + 37 + 30

=130

10 1 E 1 0 7 A D F 4

H05 H30 H31 H31H45 H31 H30 H37 H41 H44 H46 H34

(Example1)

ComputerInverter

ASCII code

Station number

Instruction code

*W ai

tin g

tim e

Data Sum check code

Binary code

Sum

30 + 31 + 45 + 31 + 31 + 30 + 37 + 41 + 44

=1F4

HH H H H H H H H

H

0 1 1 7 0 3 0

H02 H30 H31 H37H31 H37 H30 H03 H33 H30

7

(Example2)

InverterComputer

ASCII code

Binary code

Sum check code

STX Station number Read data ETX

Sum

HH H H H H

H

ENQ

*When Pr. 123 "waiting time setting" 9999, create the communication request data with no "waiting time" in the data format. (The number of characters is decreased by 1.)

7) Error code If any error is found in the data received by the inverter, its definition is sent back to the computer together with the NAK code. (Refer to page 123)

Note: 1. When the data from the computer has an error, the inverter will not accept that data. 2. Any data communication, e.g. run command, monitoring, is started when the computer

gives a communication request. Without the computer's command, the inverter does not return any data. For monitoring, therefore, design the program to cause the computer to provide a data read request as required.

3. Data for link parameter expansion setting differs as indicated below between access to Pr. 1 to Pr. 99 values and access to Pr. 110 to Pr. 905:

Instruction Code Data

Read H7F Link parameter expansion setting

Write HFF

H00: Pr. 1 to Pr. 99 values are accessible. H01: Pr. 110 to Pr. 159, Pr. 200 to Pr. 231 and Pr. 900 to

Pr. 905 values are accessible. H02: Pr. 160 to Pr. 199 and Pr. 232 to Pr. 285 values are

accessible. H03: Pr. 300 to Pr. 399 values are accessible. H09: Pr. 990, Pr. 991 value is accessible.

PARAMETERS

119

(5) Instructions for the program

1) If the data from the computer is in error, the inverter will not accept that data. Hence, always insert a data- error retry program in the user program.

2) Since the computer always requests any data communication, such as operation command or monitoring, the inverter will not return data without the computer's request. Hence, design the program so that the computer gives a data read request for monitoring, etc. as required.

3) Program example When the operation mode is switched to communication operation

I/O file initial setting

10 OPEN "COM1: 9600, E, 8, 2, HD" AS#1 20 COMST1, 1, 1: COMST1, 2, 1 30 ON COM (1) GOSUB*REC 40 COM (1) ON 50 D$= "01FB10002" 60 S=0 70 FOR I=1 TO LEN (D$) 80 A$=MID$ (D$, I, 1) 90 A=ASC (A$) 100 S=S+A 110 NEXTI 120 D$=CHR$ (&H5) +D$+RIGHT$ (HEX$ (S) , 2) 130 PRINT#1, D$ 140 GOTO 50 1000 *REC 1010 IF LOC (1)=0 THEN RETURN 1020 PRINT "RECEIVE DATA" 1030 PRINT INPUT$ (LOC (1) , #1) 1040 RETURN

Initial setting of I/O file : Communication file opening : Circuit control signal (RS, ER) ON/OFF setting : Interrupt definition at data receive : Interrupt enable Transmission data setting

Sum code calculation

: Addition of control and sum codes Data transmission

Interrupt data receive : Interrupt occurrence at data receive

Receive data processing Data import Screen display

General flowchart Line number

10

40

50

140

Transmission data processing

Data setting Sum code calculation Data transmission

Interrupt

1000

1040

to

to to

4

PARAMETERS

120

CAUTION When the inverter's communication check time interval is not set, interlocks are provided to disable operation to prevent hazard. Always set the communication check time interval before starting operation.

Data communication is not started automatically but is made only when the computer provides a communication request. If communication is disabled during operation due to signal cable breakage etc, the inverter cannot be stopped. When the communication check time interval has elapsed, the inverter will come to an alarm stop (E.PUE). The inverter can be coasted to a stop by switching on its RES signal or by switching power off.

If communication is halted due to signal cable breakage, computer fault etc., the inverter does not detect such a fault. This should be fully noted.

PARAMETERS

121

After completion of parameter setting, set the instruction codes and data and start communication from the computer to allow various types of operation control and monitoring.

No. Item Instruction Code Description Number of

Data Digits

Read H7B H0000: Communication option operation H0001: External operation H0002: Communication operation (PU connector)1 Operation

mode Write HFB

H0000: Communication option operation H0001: External operation H0002: Communication operation (PU connector)

4 digits

Output frequency [speed] H6F

H0000 to HFFFF: Output frequency (hexadecimal) in 0.01Hz increments [Speed (hexadecimal) in 1r/min increments if Pr. 37 = 1 to 9998 or Pr. 144 = 2 to 10, 102 to 110.]

4 digits

Output current H70 H0000 to HFFFF: Output current (hexadecimal) in 0.01A increments 4 digits

Output voltage H71 H0000 to HFFFF: Output voltage (hexadecimal) in 0.1V increments 4 digits

Special monitor H72 H0000 to HFFFF: Monitored data selected by instruction code HF3 4 digits

H01 to H0E Monitor selection data

Data Description Incre- ments Data Description Incre-

ments

H01 Output frequency

0.01Hz H09 Regenerative brake

0.1%Read H73

H02 Output current 0.01A H0A

Electronic overcurrent protection load factor

0.1%

H03 Output voltage 0.1V H0B Output current peak value

0.01A

H05 Frequency setting

0.01Hz H0C Converter output voltage peak value

0.1V

H06 Running speed

r/min H0D Input power 0.01kW

H07 Motor torque 0.1% H0E Output power 0.01kW

Special monitor selection No.

Write HF3

2 digits

H0000 to HFFFF: Two most recent alarm definitions

Read data: [Example] H30A0

Most recent alarm (HA0)

b15 b8b7 b0

0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 1 1

(Previous alarm ........ THT) (Most recent alarm ..... OPT)

Previous alarm (H30)

Alarm definition display example (for instruction code H74)

Alarm data Data Description Data Description Data Description H00 No alarm H51 UVT HB1 PUE H10 0C1 H60 OLT HB2 RET H11 0C2 H70 BE HC1 CTE H12 0C3 H80 GF HC2 P24 H20 0V1 H81 LF HD5 MB1 H21 0V2 H90 OHT HD6 MB2 H22 0V3 HA0 OPT HD7 MB3 H30 THT HA1 OP1 HD8 MB4 H31 THM HA2 OP2 HD9 MB5 H40 FIN HA3 OP3 HDA MB6 H50 IPF HB0 PE HDB MB7

2

M on

ito rin

g

Alarm definition H74 to H77 4 digits

4

PARAMETERS

122

No. Item Instruction Code Description

Number of Data Digits

3 Run command HFA

b0: b1: Forward rotation (STF) b2: Reverse rotation (STR) b3: b4: b5: b6: b7:

0 0 0 0 0 0 01 b7 b0

[Example 1] H02 ... Forward rotation [Example 2] H00 ... Stop

(For example 1) 2 digits

4 Inverter status monitor H7A

b0: Inverter running (RUN) * b1: Forward rotation b2: Reverse rotation b3: Up to frequency (SU) * b4: Overload (OL) * b5: Instantaneous power failure (IPF) * b6: Frequency detection (FU) * b7: Alarm occurrence *

0 0 0 0 0 0 01 b7 b0

[Example 1] H02 ... During forward rotation [Example 2] H80 ... Stop due to alarm

(For example 1)

*The output data depends on the Pr. 190 to Pr. 195 settings.

2 digits

Set frequency read (E2PROM) H6E

Set frequency read (RAM) H6D

Reads the set frequency (RAM or E2PROM). H0000 to H2EE0: 0.01Hz increments (hexadecimal) 4 digits

Set frequency write (E2PROM) HEE

5

Set frequency write (RAM) HED

H0000 to H9C40: 0.01Hz increments (hexadecimal) [0 to 120Hz (22K or less)/0 to 60Hz(30K or more)] To change the set frequency consecutively, write data to the inverter RAM. (Instruction code: HED)

4 digits

6 Inverter reset HFD H9696: Resets the inverter.

As the inverter is reset on start of communication by the computer, the inverter cannot send reply data back to the computer.

4 digits

7 Alarm definition batch clear HF4 H9696: Batch clear of alarm history 4 digits

All parameters return to the factory settings. Any of four different clear operations is performed according to the data.

Pr.

Data

Communi- cation Pr. Calibration Other Pr.

HEC HF3 HFF

H9696 H9966 H5A5A H55AA

8 All clear HFC

When all parameter clear is executed for H9696 or H9966, communication- related parameter settings also return to the factory settings. When resuming operation, set the parameters again.

4 digits

H9669: User clear is made. Communi

-cation Pr.

Calib- ration Other Pr.

HEC HF3 HFF

9 User clear HFC 4 digits

10 Parameter write H80 to HE3 11 Parameter read H00 to H63

Refer to the data list (page 208) and write and/or read parameter values as required. Note that some parameters may not be accessible. 4 digits

Read H7F

12 Link parameter expansion setting Write HFF

H00 to H6C and H80 to HEC parameter values are changed. H00: Pr. 0 to Pr. 96 values are accessible. H01: Pr. 110 to Pr. 158 , Pr. 200 to Pr. 231 and Pr. 900 to Pr. 905 values are accessible. H02: Pr. 160 to Pr. 199 and Pr. 232 to Pr. 287 values are accessible. H03: Pr. 300 to Pr. 342 values are accessible. H09: Pr. 990, Pr. 991 value is accessible.

2 digits

Read H6C

When setting the programmed operation (data code H3D to H5A, HBD to HDA) parameter

H00: Time H01: Time H02: Rotation direction

6 3 3 B

Time (Minute) Minute (Second)

13

Second parameter changing (Code FF = 1)

Write HEC

When setting the bias/gain (data code H5E to HBA, HDE to HED) parameter H00: Offset/gain H01: Analog H02: Analog value of terminal

2 digits

PARAMETERS

123

The corresponding error code in the following list is displayed if an error is detected in any communication request data form the computer.

Error Code Item Definition Inverter Operation

H0 Computer NAK error The number of errors consecutively detected in communication request data from the computer is greater than allowed number of retry times.

H1 Parity error The parity check result does not match the specified parity.

H2 Sum check error The sum check code in the computer does not match that of the data received by the inverter.

H3 Protocol error Data received by the inverter is in the wrong protocol, data receive is not completed within the given time, or CR and LF are not as set in the parameter.

H4 Framing error The stop bit length is not as specified.

H5 Overrun error The computer has sent new data before the inverter completes receiving the preceding data.

Brought to an alarm stop (E.PUE) if error occurs continuously more than the allowable number of retry times.

H6

H7 Character error The character received is invalid (other than 0 to 9, A to F, control code).

Does not accept receive data but is not brought to alarm stop.

H8 H9

HA Mode error Parameter write was attempted in other than the computer link operation mode or during inverter operation.

HB Instruction code error The specified command does not exist.

HC Data range error Invalid data has been specified for parameter write, frequency setting, etc.

Does not accept or receive data but is not brought to alarm stop.

HD HE HF

4

PARAMETERS

124

(6) Communication specifications for RS-485 communication Operation Mode

Operation Location Item Communication Operation from PU

Connector

External Operation

Computer Link Operation (inboard option used)

Run command (start) Enable Disable Disable

Running frequency setting Enable Enable

(Combined operation mode)

Disable

Monitoring Enable Enable Enable Parameter write Enable (*4) Disable (*4) Disable (*4) Parameter read Enable Enable Enable Inverter reset Enable Enable Enable

Computer user program via PU connector

Stop command (*3) Enable Enable Enable Run command Disable Disable Enable (*1) Running frequency setting Disable Disable Enable (*1) Monitoring Enable Enable Enable Parameter write Disable (*4) Disable (*4) Enable (*4) Parameter read Enable Enable Enable Inverter reset Disable Disable Enable

Computer user program via inboard option

Stop command (*3) Disable Disable Enable Inverter reset Enable Enable Enable Run command Disable Enable Enable (*1)Control circuit terminal Running frequency setting Disable Enable Enable (*1)

(*1) As set in the operation and speed command write parameters. (*2) At occurrence of RS-485 communication fault, the inverter cannot be reset from the computer. (*3) As set in Pr. 75. (*4) As set in Pr. 77.

(7) Operation at alarm occurrence Operation Mode

Fault Location Description Communication Operation

(PU connector)

External Operation

Computer link Operation

(inboard option used) Inverter operation Stop Stop Stop

PU connector Continued Continued ContinuedInverter fault Communication Inboard option Continued Continued Continued Inverter operation Stop/continued (*5) Continued Continued

PU connector Stop Stop Stop Communication error (Communication from PU connector)

Communication Inboard option Continued Continued Continued

Inverter operation Continued Continued Stop/continued (*6) PU connector Continued Continued Continued

Communication error (Inboard option) Communication Inboard option Stop Stop Stop

(*5) Can be selected using the corresponding parameter (factory-set to continue) (*6) Can be selected using the corresponding parameter (factory-set to stop)

(8) Communication error Fault Location Error Message

Communication error (Communication from PU connector) E.PUE

Communication error (Inboard option) E.OP1 to E.OP3

PARAMETERS

125

Pr. 73 "0-5/0-10V selection" Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" Pr. 180 to Pr. 186

(input terminal function selection) Pr. 190 to Pr.195

(output terminal function selection) Pr. 902 to Pr. 905

(frequency setting voltage (current) bias and gain)

Related parameters

4.2.37 PID control (Pr. 128 to Pr. 134)

Pr. 128 "PID action selection"

Pr. 129 "PID proportional band"

Pr. 130 "PID integral time"

Pr. 131 "upper limit"

Pr. 132 "lower limit"

Pr. 133 "PID action set point for PU operation"

Pr. 134 "PID differential time"

The inverter can be used to exercise process control, e.g. flow rate, air volume or pressure.

The voltage input signal (0 to 5V or 0 to 10V) or Pr. 133 setting is used as a set point and the 4 to 20mADC current input signal used as a feedback value to constitute a feedback system for PID control.

Factory Setting Setting RangeParameter Number FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3

Remarks

128 10 10, 11, 20, 21 129 100% 0.1 to 1000%, 9999 9999: No proportional control 130 1 s 0.1 to 3600 s, 9999 9999: No integral control 131 9999 0 to 100%, 9999 9999: Function invalid 132 9999 0 to 100%, 9999 9999: Function invalid 133 0% 0 to 100% 134 9999 0.01 to 10.00 s, 9999 9999: No differential control

(1) Basic PID control configuration

+ -

x

y

fi IM y

Ti S 11+ +Td S

Kp: Proportional constant Ti: Integral time S: Operator Td: Differential time

Set point

Deviation

KpPID operation

Manipulated variable

Inverter drive circuit

Motor

Process value

4

PARAMETERS

126

(2) PID action overview 1) PI action

A combination of proportional control action (P) and integral control action (I) for providing a manipulated variable in response to deviation and changes with time.

[Operation example for stepped changes of process value]

Note: PI action is the sum of P and I actions.

Time

Time

Time

Process value

P action

I action

PI action

Deviation Set point

2) PD action A combination of proportional control action (P) and differential control action (D) for providing a manipulated variable in response to deviation speed to improve the transient characteristic.

[Operation example for proportional changes of process value]

Note: PD action is the sum of P and D actions. Time

Time

Time

Deviation

P action

D action

PD action

Set point

Process value

3) PID action The PI action and PD action are combined to utilize the advantages of both actions for control.

Note: The PID action is the sum of P and I and D actions.

4) Reverse action Increases the manipulated variable (output frequency) if deviation X (set point - process value) is positive, and decreases the manipulated variable if deviation is negative.

X>0

X<0 +

- Process value

Set point

[Heating]

Process value

Cold fi up Hot fi down

Deviation Set point

PARAMETERS

127

5) Forward action Increases the manipulated variable (output frequency) if deviation X (set point - process value) is negative, and decreases the manipulated variable if deviation is positive.

X>0

X<0 +

-

Set point Too cold fi down Hot fi up

Set point

[Cooling]

Process value

Process value

Deviation

Relationships between deviation and manipulated variable (output frequency) Deviation

Positive Negative Reverse action Forward action

(3) Wiring example

Sink logic Pr. 183 = 14 Pr. 192 = 16 Pr. 193 = 14 Pr. 194 = 15

NFB

0 24V

AC1 200/220V 50/60Hz

R S T

STF

STR

RT(Note 3)

SD

10

2

5

1

4

U V W

(Note 2) FU OL

SE

(Process values) 4 20mADC

IM P

-+ + +-

(OUT) (24V)

IPF

(Note 1)

Power supply

Forward rotation

Reverse rotation

PID control selection

Setting potentiometer (Set point setting)

Deviation signal

Inverter Motor Pump

Upper limit

Lower limit Forward rotation output Reverse rotation output

Output signal common

For 2-wire type Detector

For 3-wire type

DC power supply

(COM)

Note: 1. The power supply must be selected in accordance with the power specifications of the detector used.

2. The output signal terminals used depends on the Pr. 191 to Pr. 194 settings. 3. The input signal terminals used depends on the Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 settings.

4

PARAMETERS

128

(4) I/O signals Signal Terminal Used Function Description Remarks

X14 Depending on Pr. 180 to Pr. 186

PID control selection Switch on X14 to select PID control. Set any of "10, 11, 20

and 21" in Pr. 128. 2 2 Set point input Enter the set point for PID control.

1 1 Deviation signal input Enter the deviation signal calculated externally.In

pu t

4 4 Process value input

Enter the 4 to 20mADC process value signal from the detector.

FUP Upper limit output Output to indicate that the process value signal exceeded the upper limit value.

FDN Lower limit output Output to indicate that the process value signal exceeded the lower limit value.

(Pr. 128 = 20, 21)

RL

Depending on Pr. 190 to Pr. 195

Forward (reverse) rotation direction output

"Hi" is output to indicate that the output indication of the parameter unit is forward rotation (FWD) or "Low" to indicate that it is reverse rotation (REV) or stop (STOP).

(Pr. 128 = 10, 11, 20, 21)

O pe

n co

lle ct

or o

ut pu

t

O ut

pu t

SE SE Output terminal common Common to terminals FUP, FDN and RL

To start PID control, switch on the X14 signal. When this signal is off, ordinary inverter operation is performed without the PID action being performed. Enter the set point across inverter terminals 2-5 or into Pr. 133 and enter the process value signal across inverter terminals 4-5. When entering the externally calculated deviation signal, enter it across terminals 1-5. At this time, set "10" or "11" in Pr. 128.

Item Entry Description

Set 0V as 0% and 5V as 100%. When "1, 3, 5, 11, 13 or 15" is set in Pr. 73 (5V selected for terminal 2).Set point Across terminals 2-5

Set 0V as 0% and 10V as 100%. When "0, 2, 4, 10, 12 or 14" is set in Pr. 73 (10V selected for terminal 2).

Set point Pr. 133 Set the set point (%) in Pr. 133. Set -5V as -100%, 0V as 0% and +5V as +100%.

When "2, 3, 5, 12, 13 or 15" is set in Pr. 73 (5V selected for terminal 1).Deviation

signal Across terminals 1-5 Set -10V as -100%, 0V as 0% and +10V as +100%.

When "0, 1, 4, 10, 11 or 14" is set in Pr. 73 (10V selected for terminal 1).

Process value Across terminals 4-5 4mADC is equivalent to 0% and 20mADC to 100%.

PARAMETERS

129

(5) Parameter setting Parameter Number Setting Name Description

10 For heating, pressure control, etc.

PID reverse action

11 For cooling, etc.

Deviation value signal input (terminal 1) PID forward

action

20 For heating, pressure control, etc.

PID reverse action

128

21

PID action selection

For cooling, etc.

Process value input (terminal 4) PID forward

action

0.1 to 1000%

If the proportional band is narrow (parameter setting is small), the manipulated variable varies greatly with a slight change of the process value. Hence, as the proportional band narrows, the response sensitivity (gain) improves but the stability deteriorates, e.g. hunting occurs. Gain Kp = 1/proportional band

129

9999

PID proportional band

No proportional control

0.1 to 3600 s Time required for the integral (I) action to provide the same manipulated variable as that for the proportional (P) action. As the integral time decreases, the set point is reached earlier but hunting occurs more easily.130

9999

PID integral time

No integral control.

0 to 100% Set the upper limit. If the feedback value exceeds the setting, the FUP signal is output. (Process value of 4mA is equivalent to 0% and 20mA to 100%.)131

9999 Upper limit

No function

0 to 100% Set the lower limit. (If the process value goes out of the setting range, an alarm can be output. In this case, the process value of 4mA is equivalent to 0% and 20mA to 100%.)132

9999

Lower limit

No function

133 0 to 100% PID action set point for PU operation

Only valid for the PU command in the PU operation or PU/external combined mode. For external operation, the voltage across 2-5 is the set point. (Pr. 902 value is equivalent to 0% and Pr. 903 value to 100%.)

0.01 to 10.00 s Time only required for the differential (D) action to provide the same process value as that for the proportional (P) action. As the differential time increases, greater response is made to a deviation change.134

9999

PID differential time

No differential control.

(6) Adjustment procedure

Set the I/O terminals and PID control terminals. Pr. 128 = 10, 11, 20, 21

Parameter setting

Terminal setting

Switch X14 signal on.

Run

Adjust the PID control parameters, Pr. 128 to Pr. 134.

4

PARAMETERS

130

(7) Calibration example

(A detector of 4mA at 0C and 20mA at 50C is used to adjust the room temperature to 25C under PID control. The set point is given to across inverter terminals 2-5 (0-5V).)

*When calibration is required, use Pr. 902 to Pr. 905 to calibrate the detector output and set point setting input in the PU mode during an inverter stop.

Yes

No

START

Determine the set point.

Determine the set point of the item to be adjusted.

Convert the set point into %.

Calculate the ratio (%) of the set point to the detector output.

Make calibration.

Set the set point.

Enter a voltage to across terminals 2-5 according to the set point (%).

Operation

Set the proportional band and integral time to slightly higher values and the differential time to a slightly lower value, and switch on the start signal.

Is the process value steady?

Adjust parameters.

Set the proportional band and integral time to slightly higher values and set the differential time to a slightly lower value to stabilize the process value.

END

Optimize parameters.

While the process value is steady, the proportional band and integral time may be reduced and the differential time increased throughout the operation.

Set the room temperature to 25C. Set Pr. 128 and switch on the X14 signal to enable PID control.

Detector specifications When the detector used has the specifications that 0C is equivalent to 4mA and 50C to 50mA, the set point of 25C is 50% because 4mA is equivalent to 0% and 20mA to 100%.

When the set point setting input (0 to 5V) and detector output (0 to 20mA) must be calibrated, make the following calibration*.

Set point = 50% Since the specifications of terminal 2 are such that 0% is equivalent to 0V and 100% to 5V, enter 2.5V into terminal 2.

For PU operation, set the set point (0 to 100%) in Pr. 133. During operation, set the proportional band and integral time to slightly higher values and set the differential time to a slightly lower value. In accordance with the system operation, reduce the proportional band and integral time and increase the differential time.

PARAMETERS

131

1. Apply the input voltage of 0% set point setting (e.g. 0V) to across terminals 2-5. 2. Make calibration using Pr. 902. At this time, enter the frequency (e.g. 0Hz) which should be output by the

inverter at the deviation of 0%. 3. Apply the voltage of 100% set point setting (e.g. 5V) to across terminals 2-5. 4. Make calibration using Pr. 903. At this time, enter the frequency (e.g. 60Hz) which should be output by the

inverter at the deviation of 100%.

1. Apply the output current of 0% detector setting (e.g. 4mA) to across terminals 4-5. 2. Make calibration using Pr. 904. 3. Apply the output current of 100% detector setting (e.g. 20mA) to across terminals 4-5. 4. Make calibration using Pr. 905. Note: The frequencies set in Pr. 904 and Pr. 905 should be the same as set in Pr. 902 and Pr. 903.

The results of the above calibration are as shown below:

100

0 0 5 (V)

(%)

[Set point setting]

100

0 0 20 (mA)

(%)

4

[Detection value]

60

0 0 100

Deviation (%)

[Manipulated variable] Manipulated variable (Hz)

Note: 1. If the multi-speed (RH, RM, RL) signal or jog operation (jog) signal is entered with the X14 signal on, PID control is stopped and multi-speed or jog operation is started.

2. When "20" or "21" is set in Pr. 128, note that the input across inverter terminals 1-5 is added to the set point across terminals 2-5.

3. When "5" (programmed operation mode) is selected for Pr. 79, PID control operation cannot be performed. In this setting, programmed operation is performed.

4. When "6" (switch-over mode) is selected for Pr. 79, PID is made invalid. 5. When "9999" is set in Pr. 22, the stall prevention level is the value entered from terminal 1. When

using terminal 1 as the edit input terminal for PID, therefore, set a value other than "9999" in Pr. 22.

6. When the terminal functions are changed using Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 and/or Pr. 190 to Pr. 195, the other functions may be affected. Confirm the functions of the corresponding terminals before making settings.

7. When PID control is selected, the minimum frequency is the frequency set in Pr. 902 and the maximum frequency is the frequency set in Pr. 903. (The Pr. 1 "maximum frequency" and Pr. 2 "minimum frequency" settings are also valid.)

4

PARAMETERS

132

Pr. 190 to Pr. 195 (output terminal function selection)

Related parameters

4.2.38 Output current detection function (Pr. 150, Pr. 151)

Pr. 150 "output current detection level"

Pr. 151 "output current detection period"

If the output current remains higher than the Pr. 150 setting during inverter operation for longer than the time set in Pr. 151, the output current detection signal (Y12) is output from the inverter's open collector output terminal. (Use any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 195 to assign the terminal used for Y12 signal output.)

Factory Setting Setting RangeParameter Number FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3

150 150% 0 to 200.0% 151 0 0 to 10 s

Pr.151

Pr.150

OFF ON OFF

Minimum 100ms

Time

Output current detection signal

O ut

pu t c

ur re

nt

Refer to the following list and set the parameters: Parameter Number Description

150 Set the output current detection level. 100% is the rated inverter current.

151 Set the output current detection time. Set a period of time from when the output current rises to or above the set point to when the output current detection signal (Y12) is output.

Note: 1. Once switched on, the output current detection signal is held on for at least 100ms. 2. When the terminal functions are changed using Pr. 190 to Pr. 195, the other functions may be

affected. Confirm the functions of the corresponding terminals before making settings. 3. Valid also during execution of offline auto tuning.

PARAMETERS

133

Pr. 190 to Pr. 195 (output terminal function selection)

Related parameters

4.2.39 Zero current detection (Pr. 152, Pr. 153)

Pr. 152 "zero current detection level"

Pr. 153 "zero current detection period"

When the inverter's output current falls to "0", torque will not be generated. This may cause a gravity drop when the inverter is used in vertical lift application. To prevent this, the output current "zero" signal can be output from the inverter to close the mechanical brake when the output current has fallen to "zero".

If the output current remains lower than the Pr. 152 setting during inverter operation for longer than the time set in Pr. 153, the zero current detection (Y13) signal is output from the inverter's open collector output terminal. (Use any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 195 to assign the terminal used for Y13 signal output.)

Factory Setting Setting RangeParameter Number FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3

152 5.0% 0 to 200.0% 153 0.5 s 0 to 1 s

Output current 0 [A]

OFF ON

OFF ON

Pr.152

OFF ON

100 ms (Note1)

Start signal

Pr. 152 "zero current detection level"

Zero current detection signal output(Y13)

Pr. 153 "detection time" Pr. 153 "detection time"

Refer to the following list and set the parameters: Parameter Number Description

152 Set the zero current detection level. Set this parameter to define the percentage of the rated current at which the zero current will be detected.

153 Set the zero current detection time. Set a period of time from when the output current drops to or below the Pr. 152 setting to when the zero current detection signal (Y13) is output.

Note: 1. If the current rises to or above the preset detection level and the condition is not satisfied, the zero current detection signal is held on for about 100ms.

2. When the terminal functions are changed using Pr. 190 to Pr. 195, the other functions may be affected. Confirm the functions of the corresponding terminals before making settings.

3. Valid also during execution of offline auto tuning.

CAUTION The zero current detection level setting should not be too high, and the zero current detection time setting should not be too long. Otherwise, the detection signal may not be output when torque is not generated at a low output current.

To prevent the machine and equipment from resulting in hazardous conditions by use of the zero current detection signal, install a safety backup such as an emergency brake.

Pr. 154 Refer to Pr. 22.

4

PARAMETERS

134

4.2.40 RT signal activated condition selection (Pr. 155)

Pr. 155 "RT signal activated condition"

Set the condition of activating the RT terminal to select the second control functions by switching on-off the RT signal.

Factory Setting Setting RangeParameter Number FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3

155 0 0, 10

Refer to the following table and set the parameter: Pr. 155 Setting Description

0 Made valid immediately by switching the RT signal on-off.

10 Made valid only when the RT signal is on at constant speed. (Invalid during acceleration/deceleration)

4.2.41 Stall prevention function and current limit function (Pr. 156)

Pr. 156 "stall prevention operation selection"

You can make setting to disable stall prevention caused by overcurrent, make setting to disable the fast- response current limit which limits the current to prevent the inverter from resulting in an overcurrent trip if an excessive current occurs due to sudden load variation or ON-OFF, etc. in the output side of the running inverter, and set the OL signal output delay.

Factory Setting Setting RangeParameter Number FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3

156 0 0 to 31, 100, 101

Pr. 44, Pr. 45, Pr. 48, Pr. 49 (second function selection) Pr. 81 "number of motor poles" Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 (input terminal function selection)

Related parameters

Pr. 22 "stall prevention operation level" Pr. 23 "stall prevention operation level at

double speed" Pr. 48 "second stall prevention operation

frequency" Pr. 114 "third stall prevention operation

current" Pr. 115 "third stall prevention operation

frequency" Pr. 154 "voltage reduction selection

during stall prevention operation" Pr. 157 "OL signal waiting time"

Related parameters

PARAMETERS

135

Refer to the following table and set the parameter as required: Stall Prevention

...Activated ...Not activatedPr. 156 Setting

Fast-Response Current Limit

...Activated ...Not activated Acceleration Constant speed Deceleration

OL Signal Output ...Operation continued ...Operation not

continued (Note 1) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

Driving100 Regenerative Driving101

(Note 3) Regenerative

Note 1: When "Operation not continued for OL signal output" is selected, the "E.OLT" alarm code (stopped by stall prevention) is displayed and operation stopped. (Alarm stop display "E.OLT")

2: If the load is heavy, the lift is predetermined, or the acceleration/deceleration time is short, the stall prevention may be activated and the motor not stopped in the preset acceleration/deceleration time. Therefore, set optimum values to the Pr. 156 stall prevention operation level. (When the output voltage reduces during stall prevention operation, an overcurrent trip will be less liable to occur but the torque decreases. Set "0" in Pr. 154 when the torque may be reduced.)

3: At the setting of "101", the fast-response current limit can be disabled in the driving mode as compared to the setting of "100".

4

PARAMETERS

136

Pr. 190 "RUN terminal function selection" Pr. 191 "SU terminal function selection" Pr. 192 "IPF terminal function selection" Pr. 193 "OL terminal function selection" Pr. 194 "FU terminal function selection" Pr. 195 "A, B, C terminal function selection"

Related parameters

CAUTION Always perform test operation. Stall prevention operation performed during acceleration may increase the acceleration time. Stall prevention operation performed during constant speed may cause sudden speed changes. Stall prevention operation performed during deceleration may increase the deceleration time, increasing the deceleration distance.

4.2.42 OL signal output timer (Pr. 157)

Pr. 157 "OL signal waiting time"

Use this parameter to set whether the overload alarm signal (OL signal) is output immediately or a preset period of time after occurrence of an overload status.

Factory Setting Setting RangeParameter Number FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3

Remarks

157 0 0 to 25 s, 9999 9999: No signal output

Set time (s)

Overload status (OL output)

OL output signal

Refer to the following table and set the parameter: Pr. 157 Setting Description

0 Output immediately. 0.1 to 25 Output after the set time (s) have elapsed.

9999 Overload alarm signal is not output.

Pr. 158 Refer to Pr. 54.

PARAMETERS

137

4.2.43 User group selection (Pr. 160, Pr. 173 to Pr. 176)

Pr. 160 "user group read selection"

Pr. 173 "user group 1 registration"

Pr. 174 "user group 1 deletion"

Pr. 175 "user group 2 registration"

Pr. 176 "user group 2 deletion"

Pr. 160 "user group read selection" is used to limit the parameters which may be read. From among all parameters, a total of 32 parameters can be registered to two different user groups. The registered parameters may only be accessed for reading and writing. Other parameters than those registered to the user groups cannot be read.

Factory Setting Setting RangeParameter Number FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3

Remarks

160 0 0, 1, 10, 11 173 0 0 to 999 174 0 0 to 999, 9999 9999: Batch deletion 175 0 0 to 999 176 0 0 to 999, 9999 9999: Batch deletion

(1) Parameter registration to user group (when registering Pr. 4 to user group 1)

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

Pr. 173 reading

SET

SET

1.5 s

The number of parameters registered for user setting appears.

Using the [UP/DOWN] key, choose the parameter number to be registered.

Pr. 3 is registered to user group 1.

Using the [UP/DOWN] key, move to the next parameter to be registered. Using the [SET] key, make registration.

... ..

Flickering

... ..

... ..

... ..

(2) Parameter deletion from user group (when deleting Pr. 5 from user group 1)

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

Pr. 174 reading SET

SET

1.5 s

The number of parameters registered for user setting appears.

Using the [UP/DOWN] key, choose the parameter number to be deleted.

Pr. 5 is deleted from user group 1.

Using the [UP/DOWN] key, choose the parameter to be deleted. Using the [SET] key, make deletion.

... ..

Flickering

... ..

... ..

... ..

4

PARAMETERS

138

Pr. 52 "DU/PU main display data selection"

Related parameter

(3) By setting the required value in Pr. 160, make the user groups valid or invalid. Pr. 160 Setting Description

0 All parameters can be accessed for reading and writing (Factory setting) 1 Parameters registered to user group 1 may only be accessed for reading and writing. 10 Parameters registered to user group 2 may only be accessed for reading and writing. 11 Parameters registered to user groups 1 and 2 may only be accessed for reading and writing.

Note: 1. Pr. 77, Pr. 160 and Pr. 991 values can always be read independently of the user group setting. 2. When Pr. 173 or Pr. 174 is read, the number of parameters registered to user group 1 appears.

When Pr. 175 or Pr. 176 is read, the number of parameters registered to user group 2 appears. 3. "0" set in the second digit of the 2-digit Pr. 160 setting is not displayed. However, it is displayed

when "0" is set in the first digit only. 4. When "9999" is set in Pr. 174 or Pr. 176, the parameters registered to the corresponding user

group is batch-deleted.

Pr. 162 to Pr. 165 Refer to Pr. 57.

4.2.44 Watt-hour meter clear/actual operation hour meter clear (Pr. 170, Pr. 171)

Pr. 170 "watt-hour meter clear"

Pr. 171 "actual operation hour meter clear"

You can clear the watt-hour value and actual operation hour monitoring function. Factory Setting Setting RangeParameter

Number FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3 170 0 0 171 0 0

Write "0" in the parameters to clear the watt-hour value and actual operation hour.

Pr. 173 to Pr. 176 Refer to Pr. 160.

PARAMETERS

139

4.2.45 Input terminal function selection (Pr. 180 to Pr. 186)

Pr. 180 "RL terminal function selection"

Pr. 181 "RM terminal function selection"

Pr. 182 "RH terminal function selection"

Pr. 183 "RT terminal function selection"

Pr. 184 "AU terminal function selection"

Pr. 185 "JOG terminal function selection"

Pr. 186 "CS terminal function selection"

Use these parameters to select/change the input terminal functions. Factory Setting Setting RangeParameter

Number Terminal Symbol FR-B FR-B3

Factory-Set Terminal Function FR-B FR-B3

180 RL 0 Low-speed operation command (RL) 181 RM 1 Middle-speed operation command (RM) 182 RH 2 High-speed operation command (RH) 183 RT 3 Second function selection (RT) 184 AU 4 Current input selection (AU) 185 JOG 5 Jog operation selection (JOG)

186 CS 6 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure selection (CS)

0 to 9, 12, 14, 16, 19, 20, 22,

23, 9999

0 to 99, 9999

4

PARAMETERS

140

Refer to the following list and set the parameters:

Setting Signal Name Functions Relevant Parameters

Pr. 59 = 0 Low-speed operation command Pr. 4 to Pr. 6

Pr. 24 to Pr. 27 Pr. 232 to Pr. 239

Pr. 59 = 1, 2 * Remote setting (setting clear) Pr. 59

Pr. 79 = 5 * Programmed operation group selection

Pr. 79, Pr. 200, Pr. 201 to Pr. 210, Pr. 211 to Pr. 220, Pr. 221 to Pr. 230, Pr. 231

0 RL

Pr. 270 = 1, 3 * Stop-on-contact selection 0 Pr. 270, Pr. 275, Pr. 276

Pr. 59 = 0 Middle-speed operation command Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239

Pr. 59 = 1, 2 * Remote setting (deceleration) Pr. 591 RM

Pr. 79 = 5 * Programmed operation group selection

Pr. 79, Pr. 200, Pr. 201 to Pr. 210, Pr. 211 to Pr. 220, Pr. 221 to Pr. 230, Pr. 231

Pr. 59 = 0 High-speed operation command Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239

Pr. 59 = 1, 2 * Remote setting (acceleration) Pr. 592 RH

Pr. 79 = 5 * Programmed operation group selection

Pr. 79, Pr. 200, Pr. 201 to Pr. 210, Pr. 211 to Pr. 220, Pr. 221 to Pr. 230, Pr. 231

Second function selection Pr. 44 to Pr. 50 3 RT Pr.270 = 1, 3 * Stop-on-contact selection 1 Pr. 270, Pr. 275, Pr. 276 4 AU Current input selection Refer to page 10 5 JOG Jog operation selection Pr. 15, Pr. 16 6 CS Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure selection Pr. 57, Pr. 58, Pr. 162 to Pr. 165

7 OH

External thermal relay input** The externally provided overheat protection thermal relay, motor-embedded temperature relay or the like is operated to stop the inverter.

Refer to page 174

8 REX 15-speed selection (combination with RL, RM, RH) Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239

9 X9 Third function Pr. 110 to Pr. 116 10 X10 FR-HC connection (inverter operation enable) Pr. 30, Pr. 70 11 X11 FR-HC connection (instantaneous power failure detection) Pr. 30, Pr. 70 12 X12 PU operation external interlock Pr. 79 13 X13 External DC dynamic braking start Pr. 10 to Pr. 12 14 X14 PID control valid terminal Pr. 128 to Pr. 134 15 BRI Brake opening completion signal Pr. 278 to Pr. 285 16 X16 PU-external operation switch-over Pr. 79 17 X17 Load pattern selection forward/reverse rotation boost Pr. 14 18 X18 Advanced magnetic flux vector-V/F switch-over Pr. 80, Pr. 81, Pr. 89 19 X19 Load torque high-speed frequency Pr. 271 to Pr. 274

20 X20 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration C switch-over terminal (only when FR-A5AP option is fitted) Pr. 380 to Pr. 383

22 X22 Orientation command (Note 8) (only when FR-A5AP option is fitted) Pr. 350 to Pr. 369

23 LX Pre-excitation (Note 9) (only when FR-A5AP option is fitted) Pr. 80, Pr.81, Pr. 359, Pr. 369, Pr. 370 9999 No function

*: When Pr. 59 = "1 or 2", Pr. 79 = "5", and Pr. 270 = "1 or 3", the functions of the RL, RM, RH and RT signals change as listed above. **: Operated when the relay contact "opens".

PARAMETERS

141

Note: 1. One function can be assigned to two or more terminals. In this case, the terminal inputs are ORed.

2. The speed command priorities are higher in order of jog, multi-speed setting (RH, RM, RL) and AU.

3. When HC connection (inverter operation enable signal) is not selected, the MRS terminal shares this function. When using the FR-HC, the explosion-proof certification test is required separately.

4. Do not use advanced magnetic flux vector-V/F switch-over (X18). In addition, the load pattern selection forward/reverse rotation boost (X17) does not function.

5. Use common terminals to assign programmed operation group selection, multi-speeds (7 speeds) and remote setting. They cannot be set individually. (Common terminals are used since these functions are designed for speed setting and need not be set at the same time.)

6. Stop-on-contact control selection, Pr. 270 = "1 or 3", shares RT with multi-speed setting (low speed), and its allocation cannot be changed.

7. When "7" is set in Pr. 79 and the PU operation external interlock (X12) signal is not assigned, the MRS signal acts as this function.

8. When a stop position is entered externally for orientation control, the FR-A5AX (12-bit digital input) is required.

9. Made valid when vector control servo lock is set valid. 10. When using orientation control, the explosion-proof certification test is required separately

depending on the application.

4

PARAMETERS

142

4.2.46 Output terminal function selection (Pr. 190 to Pr. 195)

Pr. 190 "RUN terminal function selection"

Pr. 191 "SU terminal function selection"

Pr. 192 "IPF terminal function selection"

Pr. 193 "OL terminal function selection"

Pr. 194 "FU terminal function selection"

Pr. 195 "A, B, C terminal function selection"

You can change the functions of the open collector and contact output terminals. Factory Setting Setting RangeParameter

Number Terminal Symbol FR-B FR-B3

Factory-Set Terminal Function FR-B FR-B3

190 RUN 0 Inverter running 191 SU 1 Up to frequency

192 IPF 2 Instantaneous power failure/undervoltage

193 OL 3 Overload alarm 194 FU 4 Output frequency detection 195 A, B, C 99 Alarm output

0 to 16, 21 to 31, 34 to 116,

121 to 131, 134 to 199,

9999

0 to 199, 9999

Refer to the following table and set the parameters: Setting

Positive logic

Negative logic

Signal Name Function Operation Related

parameter

0 100 RUN Inverter running Output during operation when the inverter output frequency rises to or above the starting frequency.

1 101 SU Up to frequency Refer to Pr. 41 "up-to-frequency sensitivity". (Note 2) Pr. 41

2 102 IPF Instantaneous power failure or undervoltage

Output when an instantaneous power failure or undervoltage occurs.

3 103 OL Overload alarm Output while stall prevention function is activated. Pr. 22, Pr. 23,

Pr. 66, Pr. 148, Pr. 149, Pr. 154

4 104 FU Output frequency detection Refer to Pr. 42, Pr. 43 (output frequency detection). Pr. 42, Pr. 43

5 105 FU2 Second output frequency detection

Refer to Pr. 50 (second output frequency detection). Pr. 50

6 106 FU3 Third output frequency detection

Refer to Pr. 116 (third output frequency detection). Pr. 116

7 107 RBP Regenerative brake pre- alarm

Output when 85% of the regenerative brake duty set in Pr. 70 is reached. Pr. 70

8 108 THP Electronic overcurrent protection pre-alarm

Output when the cumulative electronic overcurrent protection value reaches 85% of the preset level. Pr. 9

9 109 PRG Programmed mode Output in the programmed mode. (Note 3) Pr. 79, Pr. 200 to Pr. 231

10 110 PU PU operation mode Output when the PU operation mode is selected.

11 111 RY Inverter operation ready Output when the inverter can be started by switching the start signal on or while it is running.

12 112 Y12 Output current detection Refer to Pr. 150 and Pr. 151 (output current detection). Pr. 150, Pr. 151

13 113 Y13 Zero current detection Refer to Pr. 152 and Pr. 153 (zero current detection). Pr. 152, Pr. 153

14 114 FDN PID lower limit 15 115 FUP PID upper limit

16 116 RL PID forward-reverse rotation output

Refer to Pr. 128 to Pr. 134 (PID control). Pr. 128 to Pr. 134

PARAMETERS

143

Setting Positive

logic Negative

logic

Signal Name Function Operation Related

parameter

17 MC1 Commercial power supply- inverter switch-over MC1

18 MC2 Commercial power supply- inverter switch-over MC2

19 MC3 Commercial power supply- inverter switch-over MC3

Refer to Pr. 135 to Pr.139 (commercial power supply-inverter switch-over).

Pr. 135 to Pr. 139

20 120 BOF Brake opening request Refer to Pr. 278 to Pr. 285 (brake sequence functions).

Pr. 278 to Pr. 285

25 125 FAN Fan fault output Output when a fan fault occurs. Pr. 244

26 126 FIN Fin overheat pre-alarm Output when the heat sink temperature reaches about 85% of the fin overheat protection temperature.

27 127 ORA In-position 28 128 ORM Orientation error

When orientation is valid (only when FR-A5AP option is loaded)

29 129 Y29 Overspeed detection 30 130 Y30 Forward running output 31 131 Y31 Reverse running output

For PLG feedback control, vector control (only when the FR-A5AP option is loaded)

32 132 Y32 Regeneration status output 33 133 RY2 Operation ready 2

For vector control (only when the FR-A5AP option is loaded)

98 198 LF Minor fault output Output when a minor fault occurs. (Refer to page 174.)

99 199 ABC Alarm output Output when the inverter's protective function is activated to stop the output (major fault).

9999 No function

0 to 99: Positive logic 100 to 199: Negative logic

Note: 1. Under PLG feedback control (when the FR-A5AP option is loaded), the operations of the up-to- frequency SU and frequency detection FU, FU2, FU3 are as follows: SU, FU: The actual speed (frequency) provided by the PLG feedback signal is output at or above the frequency specified for detection. FU, FU3: The inverter output frequency is output at or above the frequency specified for detection.

2. When the frequency setting is varied with the analog signal or the [UP/DOWN] key of the operation panel, note that the output of the SU (up-to-frequency) signal may alternate between ON and OFF due to that varying speed and the timing of the varying speed dependent on the acceleration/deceleration time setting.

3. This signal is output when "5" is set in Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" and the external operation mode is selected (the inverter goes into the programmed mode).

4. The same function may be set to more than one terminal. 5. When the function is activated, the terminal conducts with the settings of 0 to 99 and does not

conduct with the settings of 100 to 199. 6. Pr. 190 to Pr. 195 do not function if the values set are other than the above. 7. When Pr. 76 = 1 or 3, the output signals of the SU, IPF, OL and FU output terminals conform to

Pr. 76. When an inverter alarm occurs, the signal outputs are switched over to alarm code outputs.

8. The output assignment of the RUN terminal and alarm output relay conforms to the above setting independently of Pr. 76.

4

PARAMETERS

144

Pr. 77 "parameter write disable selection"

Related parameter

4.2.47 User's initial value setting (Pr. 199)

Pr. 199 "user's initial value setting"

Among the parameters, you can set user-only parameter initial values. These values may be set to 16 parameters. By performing user clear operation from the operation panel or parameter unit, you can initialize the parameters to the user-set initial values. Note that the parameters of which initial values have not been set are initialized to the factory settings by user clear operation.

You can read the user's initial value list in the help mode of the parameter unit (FR-PU04). Factory Setting Setting RangeParameter

Number FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3 199 0 0 to 999, 9999

The read Pr. 199 value is displayed as the number of parameters registered.

(1) To set "1" in Pr. 7 and "2" in Pr. 8 as user's initial values. (Operation from the FR-DU04)

6) Through the above steps, the initial values of Pr. 7 and Pr. 8 are registered.

1) Set "1" (target initial value) in Pr. 7.

2) Set "2" (target initial value) in Pr. 8.

3) Press the [SET] key to read Pr. 199. The number of parameters having user's initial values are then displayed.

4) Further press the [SET] key for 1.5 s. The parameter setting screen is then displayed.

5) Select Pr. 7 and Pr. 8 with the [UP/DOWN] key and press the [SET] key for 1.5 s to enter.

The settings of the parameters whose numbers are set in Pr. 199 (i.e. Pr. 7 = 1, Pr. 8 = 2 in the above example) are user's initial values.

(2) Deletion of user's initial values By writing "9999" to Pr. 199 (and pressing the [SET] key for 1.5 s), the user's initial values registered are batch-deleted.

Note: 1. When user's initial values for Pr. 902 to Pr. 905 are set, one parameter uses the area of two parameters for registration.

2. As this setting is concerned with user-cleared initial values, the parameter numbers, which cannot be cleared, cannot be set.

3. The operation panel (FR-DU04) cannot be used to refer to user's initial values. 4. Values cannot be registered to Pr. 201 to Pr. 231.

PARAMETERS

145

4.2.48 Programmed operation function (Pr. 200 to Pr. 231)

Pr. 200 "programmed operation minute/second selection"

Pr. 201 to Pr. 210 "program set 1 1 to 10"

Pr. 211 to Pr. 220 "program set 2 11 to 20"

Pr. 221 to Pr. 230 "program set 3 21 to 30"

Pr. 231 "timer setting"

In programmed operation, automatic operation is performed under the control of the internal timer in accordance with the preset time of day, running frequency and rotation direction.

This function is made valid when the following parameter is set to the following value: Pr. 79 = "5" (programmed operation) You can select the time unit for programmed operation between "minute/second" and "hour/minute". The start time of day, rotation direction and running frequency are defined as one point and every 10 points are grouped into three: Group 1: Pr. 201 to Pr. 210 Group 2: Pr. 211 to Pr. 220 Group 3: Pr. 221 to Pr. 230 Use Pr. 231 to set the time of day when programmed operation is started.

Factory Setting Setting RangeParameter Number FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3

Remarks

200 0 0 to 3 0, 2 [minute/second] 1, 3 [hour/minute]

201 to 210 0,9999,0 0 to 2 0 to 120/0 to 60, 9999

0 to 99.59

0 to 2 0 to 400, 9999

0 to 99.59

0 to 2: Rotation direction 0 to 120/0 to 60, 9999, 0 to 400: Frequency (22K or less/30K or more) 0 to 99.59: Time

211 to 220 0,9999,0 0 to 2 0 to 120/0 to 60, 9999

0 to 99.59

0 to 2 0 to 400, 9999

0 to 99.59

0 to 2: Rotation direction 0 to 120/0 to 60, 9999, 0 to 400: Frequency (22K or less/30K or more) 0 to 99.59: Time

221 to 230 0,9999,0

0 to 2: Rotation direction 0 to 120/0 to 60, 9999:

Frequency 0 to 99.59: Time

0 to 2

0 to 400, 9999

0 to 99.59

0 to 2: Rotation direction

0 to 120/0 to 60, 9999, 0 to 400: Frequency (22K or less/30K or more) 0 to 99.59: Time

231 0 0 to 99.59

For sink logic

STF RH RM RL STR SD

FU OL PF SU SE

I

1 2 3

U,V,W

Output signal common

Programmed operation start

Group selection

Timer reset Input signal common

Inverter

Motor

Terminal function Pr. 79 = 5

Terminal function Pr. 76 = 3

Group run signals (Open collector)

Time-out signal

R,S,T

Pr. 76 "alarm code output selection" Pr. 79 "operation mode selection"

Related parameters

4

PARAMETERS

146

(1) Set the time unit for programmed operation in Pr. 200. Select either of "minute/second" and "hour/minute".

Setting Description 0 Minute/second unit (voltage monitor) 1 Hour/minute unit (voltage monitor) 2 Minute/second unit (reference time of day monitor) 3 Hour/minute unit (reference time of day monitor)

Note: 1. When "2" or "3" is set in Pr. 200, the reference time-of-day monitor screen is displayed instead of the voltage monitor screen.

2. Note that when the Pr. 200 setting is changed, the units for Pr. 201 to Pr. 231 setting will change.

(2) The inverter has an internal timer (RAM). When the reference time of day is set in Pr. 231, programmed operation is started at this time of day. 1) Setting range

The time unit depends on the Pr. 200 setting. Pr. 200 Setting Pr. 231 Setting Range Pr. 200 Setting Pr. 231 Setting Range

0 Maximum 99 minutes 59 seconds 2 Maximum 99 minutes 59 seconds 1 Maximum 99 hours 59 minutes 3 Maximum 99 hours 59 minutes

Note: The reference time-of-day timer returns to "0" when both the start signal and group select signal are entered. Set the reference time of day in Pr. 231 when both signals are on.

2) Resetting the reference time of day The reference time of day is cleared by switching on the timer reset signal (STR) or by resetting the inverter. Note that the reference time-of-day value set in Pr. 231 is also reset to "0".

(3) Program setting The rotation direction, running frequency and start time of day can be set by using Pr. 201 to Pr. 230.

No.1 Pr. 201 2 Pr. 202 3 Pr. 203 4 Pr. 204

10 Pr. 210

No.11 Pr. 211

20 Pr. 220

No.21 Pr. 221

30 Pr. 230

Setting Point Rotation Direction, Frequency, Start Time of Day

Group 3

Group 1

Group 2

Setting Range Factory SettingParameter

Number Name FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3

Remarks

0 to 2 0 Rotation direction setting 0: Stop, 1: Forward rotation, 2: Reverse rotation

0 to 120Hz/

0 to 60Hz

0 to 400Hz 9999 Frequency setting (22K or less/30K or more)201 to 230

Programmed operation minute/second selection

0 to 99:59 0 Time of day setting

PARAMETERS

147

(Example: Set point No. 1, forward rotation, 30Hz, 4 hours 30 minutes)

1) Read Pr. 201 value. 2) Enter "1" (forward rotation) in Pr. 201 and press the [SET] key ([WRITE] key when using the FR-PU04

parameter unit). 3) Enter 30 (30Hz) and press the [SET] key ([WRITE] key when using the FR-PU04 parameter unit). (Note 1) 4) Enter "4.30" and press the [SET] key ([WRITE] key when using the FR-PU04 parameter unit). (Note 2) 5) Press the [UP] key to move to the next parameter (Pr. 202), and press the [SET] key ([READ] key when

using the FR-PU04 parameter unit) to display the current setting. Hereafter, press the [UP] key to advance the parameter one by one.

Note 1: To make a stop, write "0" in the rotation direction and frequency. Set "9999" for no setting.

2: An error will result if 4.80 is entered (59 minutes or 59 seconds is exceeded).

Assuming that operation has been programmed as indicated in the following table, the operation pattern is as shown in the figure below:

No. Operation Parameter Setting

1 Forward rotation, 20Hz, 1 hour 0 minutes Pr. 201 = 1, 20, 1:00

2 Stop, 3 hours 0 minutes Pr. 202 = 0, 0, 3:00

3 Reverse rotation, 30Hz, 4 hours 0 minutes Pr. 203 = 2, 30, 4:00

4 Forward rotation, 10Hz, 6 hours 0 minutes Pr. 204 = 1, 10, 6:00

5 Forward rotation, 35Hz, 7 hours 30 minutes Pr. 205 = 1, 35, 7:30

6 Stop, 9 hours 0 minutes Pr. 206 = 0, 0, 9:00

20Hz

0 1 3 4

6 9

10Hz

32 4 5 6

7:30

35Hz

Time of day

Set point

Forward rotation

1

(4) Input signals Name Description Signal Level Remarks

Group signal RH (group 1) RM (group 2) RL (group 3)

Used to select the group for programmed operation.

Timer reset signal (STR) Input to zero the reference time of day. Programmed operation start signal (STF) Input to start programmed operation.

Photocoupler isolated

May also be driven by transistor. When ic = 10mA, Vec<0.5V should be satisfied.

(5) Output signals Name Description Signal Level Remarks

Time-out signal (SU) Output on completion of the operation of the selected group and cleared on timer reset.

Group select signals (FU, OL, IPF)

Output during running of corresponding group's program and cleared on timer reset.

Open collector output (isolated)

Permissible load 24VDC, 0.1A Only when Pr. 76 = 3

4

PARAMETERS

148

(6) Operation 1) Ordinary operation

After completion of all preparations and settings, turn on the desired group select signal (any of RH (group 1), RM (group 2) and RL (group 3)), then turn on the start signal (STF). This causes the internal timer (reference time of day) to be reset automatically and the operation of that group to be performed in sequence in accordance with the settings. When the operation of the group ends, a signal is output from the time-out output terminal. (The open collector signal of SU is turned on.) Note: Use the programmed operation function with "5" set in Pr. 79. Programmed operation will not be

performed if any of the group select signals is switched on during PU operation or data link operation.

t1 t2 t3 t4 t5 t6

f1 f2 f3 f4

f5 0 0

Note that the operation is not started if the timer reset signal (STR) is on.

Start signal STF

Group 1 RH

Inverter output frequency

Time-out signal (SU)

Setting of group 1

2) Multi-group select operation When two or more groups are selected at the same time, the operations of the selected groups are executed in sequence of group 1, group 2 and group 3. For example, if group 1 and group 2 have been selected, the operation of group 1 is first carried out, and after that operation ends, the reference time of day is reset, the operation of group 2 is started, and the time-out signal (SU) is output after the operation of group 2 ends.

t1 t2 t3 t4 t5 t1 t2 t3 t4 t5 t6

f1 f2 f3 f4

f5 f1 f2 f3 f4 0 0 0

0 t'1 t'2 t'3

t'4 t'5 t'1 t'2 t'3 t'4 t'5

Time-out signal (SU)

Start signal STF

Group 1 RH Group 2 RM

Inverter output frequency

Group 1 select signal (FU)

Group 2 select signal (OL)

Setting of group 1 Setting of group 2

(7) To repeat the operation of the same group, reset the timer using the time-out signal as shown below.

1) To repeat the operation of only group 1 2) To repeat the operation of groups 1 and 2

(Group 2)

STF

STR

SU

SD

SE

Inverter

(Group 3)

(Group 1) RH RM RL

(Group 2)

STF

STR

SU

SD

SE

Inverter

(Group 3)

(Group 1) RH RM RL

PARAMETERS

149

Note: 1. If the inverter power is switched off, then on (including an instantaneous power failure) during the execution of the programmed operation, the internal timer is reset and the inverter does not restart if the power is restored. To resume the operation, turn the programmed operation start signal (STF) off, then on. (At this time, when it is required to set the reference time of day, switch the start signal on before setting.)

2. When the inverter is wired for programmed operation specifications, the following signals are invalid:AU, STOP, 2, 4, 1, JOG

3. During programmed operation, the inverter cannot be operated in any other mode. When the programmed operation start signal (STF) and timer reset signal (STR) are ON, the operation mode cannot be switched between PU operation and external operation.

Pr. 232 to Pr. 239 Refer to Pr. 4.

Pr. 240 Refer to Pr. 72.

4.2.49 Cooling fan operation selection (Pr. 244)

Pr. 244 "cooling fan operation selection"

You can control the operation of the cooling fan built in the inverter. Whether there is the cooling fan or not depends on the model. Refer to the standard specifications (page 194).

Factory Setting Setting RangeParameter Number FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3

244 0 0, 1

Setting Description

0 Operated at power on (independently of whether the inverter is running or at a stop).

1 Cooling fan on-off control valid (The cooling fan is always on while the inverter is running. During a stop, the inverter status is monitored and the fan switches on-off according to temperature.)

In either of the following cases, fan operation is regarded as faulty, [FN] is shown on the operation panel, and the fan fault (FAN) and light fault (LF) signals are output. Use Pr. 190 to Pr. 195 (multi-function outputs) to allocate the terminals used to output the FAN and LF signals. 1) Pr. 244 = "0"

When the fan comes to a stop with power on. 2) Pr. 244 = "1"

When the fan stops during the fan ON command while the inverter is running, or when the fan starts during the fan OFF command.

Note: When the terminal functions are changed using Pr. 190 to Pr. 195, the other functions may be affected. Confirm the functions of the corresponding terminals before making setting.

4

PARAMETERS

150

Pr. 7 "acceleration time" Pr. 8 "deceleration time" Pr. 44 "second acceleration/deceleration time" Pr. 45 "second deceleration time" Pr. 110 "third acceleration/deceleration time" Pr. 111 "third deceleration time"

Related parameters

4.2.50 Stop selection (Pr. 250)

Pr. 250 "stop selection"

Used to select the stopping method (deceleration to a stop or coasting) when the start signal (STF/STR) switches off.

Factory Setting Setting RangeParameter

Number FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3 250 9999 0 to 100 s, 9999

(1) Pr. 250 = "9999" When the start signal switches off, the motor is decelerated to a stop.

Time

ON OFF

DC brake

Start signal

O ut

pu t f

re qu

en cy

(H z)

Decelerated when start signal switches off.

Deceleration time (time set in Pr. 8, etc.)

(2) Pr. 250 = other than "9999" (Output is shut off after the set time has elapsed) The output is shut off when the time set in Pr. 250 has elapsed after the start signal had switched off. The motor coasts to a stop.

OFF

OFF

Start signal

RUN signal

Time

Output is shut off when time set in Pr. 250 has elapsed after start signal had switched off.

Motor coasts to a stop.

ON

ON

O ut

pu t f

re qu

en cy

(H z)

Note: 1. The RUN signal switches off when the output stops. 2. When the start signal is switched on again during motor coasting, the motor starts at 0Hz.

PARAMETERS

151

4.2.51 Output phase failure protection selection (Pr. 251)

Pr. 251 "Output phase failure protection selection"

You can make invalid the output phase failure protection (E.LF) function which stops the inverter output if one of the three phases (U, V, W) on the inverter's output side (load side) becomes open.

Setting Range Factory SettingParameter

Number FR-B FR-B3

Minimum Setting Increments FR-B FR-B3

Description

251 0, 1 1 1 0: Without output phase failure protection 1: With output phase failure protection

4.2.52 Override bias/gain (Pr. 252, Pr. 253)

Pr. 252 "override bias"

Pr. 253 "override gain"

You can extend the 50% to 150% override range (to 0% to 200%), which is covered when Pr. 73 "0-5V/0-10V selection" is used to select the override, and set the override value as desired.

Setting Range Factory SettingParameter Number FR-B FR-B3

Minimum Setting Increments FR-B FR-B3

252 0 to 200% 0.1% 50% 253 0 to 200% 0.1% 150%

O ve

rri de

v al

ue (%

)

Pr. 252

0V 2.5V (5V)

5V (10V)

0

50

100

150

200

Factory setting (50% to 150%)

Voltage across 2-5

Pr. 253

Pr. 73 "0-5V/0-10V selection" Related parameters

4

PARAMETERS

152

4.2.53 Power failure-time deceleration-to-stop function (Pr. 261 to Pr. 266)

Pr. 261 "power failure stop selection"

Pr. 262 "subtracted frequency at deceleration start"

Pr. 263 "subtraction starting frequency"

Pr. 264 "power-failure deceleration time 1"

Pr. 265 "power-failure deceleration time 2"

Pr. 266 "power-failure deceleration time switch-over frequency"

When an instantaneous power failure or undervoltage occurs, the inverter can be decelerated to a stop. Remove the jumpers from across terminals R-R1 and terminals S-S1, and connect terminal R1 to terminal P, and terminal S1 to terminal N.

Factory Setting Setting RangeParameter

Number FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3 Remarks

261 0 0, 1 262 3Hz 0 to 20Hz 263 60Hz 0 to 120Hz/0 to 60Hz, 9999 0 to 120Hz, 9999 22K or less/30K or more 264 5 s 0 to 3600/0 to 360 s 265 9999 0 to 3600/0 to 360 s, 9999 266 60Hz 0 to 120Hz/0 to 60Hz 0 to 400Hz 22K or less/30K or more

Pr.262 Pr.264

Pr.265

Pr.266 Time

Power supply

O ut

pu t

fre qu

en cy

(H z)

Switch-over frequency

Subtracted frequency Power-failure deceleration time 1

Power-failure deceleration time 2

SettingParameter Number FR-B FR-B3

Description

0 Coasting to stop When undervoltage or power failure occurs, the inverter output is shut off.261

1 When undervoltage or power failure occurs, the inverter is decelerated to a stop.

262 0 to 20Hz Normally, operation can be performed with the factory setting unchanged. The frequency can be adjusted within the range 0 to 20Hz according to the load specifications (inertia moment, torque).

0 to 120Hz/

0 to 60Hz

0 to 120Hz

If the output frequency at occurrence of undervoltage or power failure is equal to or greater than the frequency set in Pr. 263, deceleration starts at the value found by subtracting the frequency set in Pr. 262 from the output frequency at that time. If the output frequency at occurrence of undervoltage or power failure is less than the frequency set in Pr. 263, the inverter is decelerated to a stop, starting at the output frequency at that time.

263

9999 The inverter is decelerated to a stop, starting at the value found by subtracting the frequency set in Pr. 262 from the output frequency at occurrence of undervoltage or power failure.

Pr. 21 = 0 0 to 3600 s264 Pr. 21 = 1 0 to 360 s Set a deceleration slope down to the frequency set in Pr. 266. Set the slope in terms of time required for deceleration from the frequency set in Pr. 20 to 0Hz.

Pr. 21 = 0 0 to 3600 s Pr. 21 = 1 0 to 360 s

Set a deceleration slope below the frequency set in Pr. 266. Set the slope in terms of time required for deceleration from the frequency set in Pr. 20 to 0Hz.265

9999 Same slope as in Pr. 264

266

0 to 120Hz/

0 to 60Hz

0 to 400Hz

Set the frequency at which the deceleration slope is is switched from the Pr. 264 setting to the Pr. 265 setting.

Pr. 20 "acceleration/deceleration reference frequency"

Related parameter

PARAMETERS

153

Note: 1. This function is invalid when the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function is activated.

2. If (output frequency at occurrence of undervoltage or power failure) minus (frequency set in Pr. 262) is negative, the calculation result is regarded as 0Hz.

3. The power failure stop function is not activated during a stop or error. 4. If power is restored during deceleration, the inverter is kept decelerating to a stop.

To restart, switch off the start signal once, then switch it on again. 5. This function is invalid when the high power factor converter is used (Pr. 30 = 2).

CAUTION If power-failure deceleration operation is set, some loads may cause the inverter to trip and the motor to coast. If the motor does not give enough regenerative energy, the motor will coast.

4.2.54 Stop-on-Contact, Load torque high-speed frequency selection (Pr. 270)

Pr. 270 "stop-on-contact/load torque high-speed frequency control selection"

Load torque high-speed frequency control automatically sets the maximum operating frequency according to the load. Specifically, the weight of the load is determined after a start by the average current at a given time; when the load is light, the preset frequency can be increased for operation. When the load is light, speed can be automatically increased in a sky parking lot, for example, to reduce incoming and outgoing times.

Using Pr. 270, select high-speed frequency control (control, which automatically switches between high- and middle-speed operations according to load torque). Refer to Pr. 275 and Pr. 276 when you selected stop-on-contact control for the FR-B3 series. For function details of load torque high-speed frequency control, refer to Pr. 271 to Pr. 274.

Factory Setting Setting RangeParameter Number FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3

Description

0 0 Without stop-on-contact control and load torque high-speed frequency control 1 Stop-on-contact control

2 2 Load torque high-speed frequency control270 0

3 Stop-on-contact + load torque high-speed frequency control

Stop-on-contact control is not available for the FR-B series.

Pr. 271 "high-speed setting maximum current"

Pr. 272 "mid-speed setting minimum current"

Pr. 273 "current averaging range" Pr. 274 "current averaging filter

constant" Pr. 275 "stop-on-contact exciting

current low-speed multiplying factor" Pr. 276 "stop-on-contact PWM carrier

frequency"

Related parameters

4

PARAMETERS

154

Pr. 4 "multi-seed setting (high speed)" Pr. 5 "multi-seed setting (middle speed)" Pr. 6 "multi-seed setting (low speed)" Pr. 59 "remote setting function selection" Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 (input terminal function selection) Pr. 270 "stop-on-contact/load torque high-speed frequency control selection"

Related parameters

4.2.55 High-speed frequency control (Pr. 271 to Pr. 274)

Pr. 271 "high-speed setting maximum current"

Pr. 272 "mid-speed setting minimum current"

Pr. 273 "current averaging range"

Pr. 274 "current averaging filter constant"

Used to set the current, averaging range, etc. required when "2" is set in Pr. 270 to select load torque high- speed frequency control.

Factory Setting Setting RangeParameter Number FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3 Remarks

271 50% 0 to 200% 272 100% 0 to 200%

273 9999 0 to 120Hz/0 to 60Hz, 9999

0 to 400Hz, 9999 22K or less/30K or more

274 16 1 to 4000

The lift with a light load or without a load is moved faster than the lift with a load. (The output frequency is increased.)

Whether there is a load or not, the lift is moved vertically at the same speed.

Light

Faster

Sink logic Pr. 186 = 19

R U S V T W

MC

STF

SD

NFB

Motor

Power supply 200 to 240VAC or 380 to 480VAC

Start signal

Load torque high-speed frequency function selection CS (Note)

Mech- anical brake

Note: The input signal terminal used depends on the Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 settings.

PARAMETERS

155

CS

STF (STR) OFF ON

Pr.5

Pr.4

Pr.5 A

Pr.51 2 Pr.51

2

B

Terminal

Less than 1/2 rated current and driven load

Not less than rated current or regenerative load

When operation is performed with X19 (load detection high-speed frequency function selection) signal on, the inverter automatically varies the maximum frequency between Pr. 4 "multi-speed setting (high speed)" and Pr. 5 "multi-speed setting (middle speed)" settings as shown below according to the average current flowing during acceleration from the frequency half of the Pr. 5 setting to the frequency set in Pr. 5.

Example:1. If the average current is not more than half of the rated inverter current, the maximum frequency is the value set in Pr. 4 as shown in operation example A .

2. If the average current is not less than the rated inverter current, the maximum frequency is the value set in Pr. 5 as shown in operation example B .

Pr.5

Pr.271 (50%)

Pr.272 (100%) Average current

Fr eq

ue nc

y

Pr.4

1) Set "2" in Pr. 270. 2) Assign X19 (load detection high-speed frequency function selection) to the input terminal using any of

Pr. 180 to Pr. 186. 3) Refer to the following table and set the parameters:

SettingParameter Number Name FR-B FR-B3 Description

4 Multi-speed setting (high speed) 0 to

120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz

0 to 400Hz

Set the higher-speed frequency. (22K or less/30K or more)

5 Multi-speed setting (middle speed) 0 to

120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz

0 to 400Hz

Set the lower-speed frequency. (22K or less/30K or more)

271 High-speed setting maximum current 0 to 200% 272 Mid-speed setting minimum current 0 to 200%

Set the upper and lower limits of the current at high and middle speeds.

0 to 120Hz/

0 to 60Hz

0 to 400Hz

Average current during acceleration from (Pr. 273 1/2) Hz to (Pr. 273) Hz can be achieved. (22K or less/30K or more)273 Current averaging range

9999 Average current during acceleration from (Pr. 5 1/2) Hz to (Pr. 5) Hz is achieved.

274 Current averaging filter constant 1 to 4000

Set the time constant of the primary delay filter relative to the output current. (The time constant [ms] is 0.75 Pr. 274 and the factory setting is 12ms.) A larger setting provides higher stability but poorer response.

4

PARAMETERS

156

Note: 1. This function is only valid in the external operation mode. This function is not activated when "1" or "2" (remote setting function) is selected for Pr. 59.

2. If the current averaging zone includes the low output region, the output current may increase in the constant-output region. When the current is low, the running frequency increases, increasing the deceleration time.

3. The fast-response current limit function is invalid. 4. Can be activated at every start. 5. When the terminal functions are changed using Pr. 180 to Pr. 186, the other functions may be

affected. Confirm the functions of the corresponding terminals before making settings.

CAUTION

When the load is light, the motor may accelerate suddenly up to the maximum frequency, causing hazardous conditions. Provide sufficient interlocks on the machine side before starting operation.

Set frequency reference table for load torque high-speed frequency control The following table lists the frequencies set when the load torque high-speed frequency control signal (X19) and multi-speed terminals (RH, RM, RL) are selected together:

Input Signals X19 RH RM RL Set Frequency

Conforms to load torque high-speed frequency control. Speed 1 (high speed) Pr. 4 Speed 2 (middle speed) Pr. 5 Speed 3 (low speed) Pr. 6 Speed 1 (high speed) Pr. 4 Speed 2 (middle speed) Pr. 5 Speed 3 (low speed) Pr. 6 Speed 6 Pr. 26 Speed 5 Pr. 25 Speed 4 Pr. 24 Speed 6 Pr. 26 Speed 4 Pr. 24 Speed 7 Pr. 27 Speed 5 Pr. 25 Speed 7 Pr. 27 Setting using terminal 2, 1, 4, JOG

indicates that the signal is on.

Note: 1. Assumes that the external operation command mode is selected and the remote setting function is not selected.

2. Multi-speeds override the main speeds (across terminals 2-5, 4-5, 1-5). 3. When the 12-bit digital speed input (option FR-A5AX) is selected, the above list is invalid.

(The 12-bit digital speed input has the highest priority.) 4. Jog operation overrides the above list.

Function list (The following specifications apply to the external operation mode.)

Pr. 270 Setting Load Torque High-Speed Frequency Control Stop-On-Contact Control Multi-Speeds (7 speeds)

0 1 2 3

: Indicates that the function is valid.

PARAMETERS

157

Pr. 4 "multi-seed setting (high speed)" Pr. 5 "multi-seed setting (middle speed)" Pr. 6 "multi-seed setting (low speed)" Pr. 48 "second stall prevention operation current" Pr. 72 "PWM frequency selection" Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 (input terminal function selection) Pr. 270 "stop-on-contact/load torque high-speed frequency control selection"

Related parameters

Restrictions when 1 to 3 are selected for Pr. 270 Under the following conditions, the functions of Pr. 270 settings "1 to 3" are made invalid: PU operation Programmed operation PU + external combined PID control Remote setting function mode Orientation control (option FR-A5AP) Jog operation (common to PU and external operations)

4.2.56 Stop-on-contact control function (Pr. 275, Pr. 276)

Pr. 275 "stop-on-contact exciting current low-speed multiplying factor"

Pr. 276 "stop-on-contact PWM carrier frequency"

Set "1" or "3" (stop-on-contact control) in Pr. 270. Also, for the FR-B3 series, stop-on-contact control can function because you have to select advanced magnetic flux vector control.

Factory Setting Setting RangeParameter

Number FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3 275 9999 0 to 1000%, 9999 276 9999 0 to 15, 9999

Lift

Vibration Complete stop

Lift

4

PARAMETERS

158

Sink logic

NFB R

S

T

STF RH RM RL RT

SD

U

V

W

MC

Motor Power supply 200-240VAC or 380-480VAC

Stop-on-contact selection 2

Start signal Multi-speed selection 1

Multi-speed selection 2 Stop-on-contact selection 1

Mechanical brake

(a) (b) (c)

Time

Pr.4

RH ON OFF

RM ON OFF

RL ON OFF

RT ON OFF

Pr.5

Pr.6

Output frequency

0

Ordinary mode Stop-on-contact control

Goes into stop-on-contact control mode when both RL and RT switch on. Note: (RL and RT may be switched on in any order with any time difference.) (a) Acceleration time (Pr. 7) (b) Deceleration time (Pr. 8) (c) Second deceleration time (Pr. 44)

Note: The input signal terminals used depend on the Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 settings.

When both the RT and RL terminals are switched on, the inverter enters the stop-on-contact mode, in which operation is performed at the frequency set in Pr. 6 "multi-speed setting (low speed)" independently of the preceding speed.

Note: 1. By increasing the Pr. 275 setting, the low-speed (stop-on-contact) torque increases, but the overcurrent alarm (E.OCT) may occur or the machine may oscillate in a stop-on-contact state.

2. The stop-on-contact function is different from the servo lock function, and if used to stop or hold a load for an extended period, the function can cause the motor to overheat. After a stop, immediately reset this function and use a mechanical brake to hold the load.

3. Under the following operating conditions, the stop-on-contact function is made invalid: PU operation Programmed operation PU + external operation PID control function operation Remote setting function operation Orientation control function operation Jog operation

PARAMETERS

159

1) Select advanced magnetic flux vector control and set "1" or "3" in Pr. 270. 2) Refer to the following list and set the parameters:

Parameter Number Name Setting Description

6 Multi-speed setting (low speed) 0 to 400Hz

Set the output frequency for stop-on-contact control. The frequency should be as low as possible (about 2Hz). If it is set to more than 30Hz, the operating frequency will be 30Hz. When stop-on-contact control is to be exercised during PLG feedback control, PLG feedback control is made invalid when the inverter enters the stop-on-contact control mode.

48 Second stall prevention operation current 0 to 200% Set the stall prevention operation for stop-on-contact control.

0 to 1000% Usually set a value between 130% and 180%. Set the force (holding torque) for stop-on-contact control.275

Stop-on-contact exciting current low-speed multiplying factor 9999 No compensation

0 to 15 Set a PWM carrier frequency for stop-on-contact control. (Valid at the frequency of 3Hz or less) (Note)276 Stop-on-contact PWM

carrier frequency 9999 Conforms to the Pr. 72 "PWM frequency selection".

Note: Set the Pr. 276 value in accordance with the setting of Pr. 72.

Function switch-over when stop-on-contact control is selected

Operation Mode (External) Ordinary Operation Stop-on-Contact Control

RL RT RL RTRL, RT terminals Main function Either is OFF ON ON

Remarks

Output frequency for a stop on contact

Multi-speeds 0 to 5V, 0 to 10V 4 to 20mA

Pr. 6 "low-speed frequency"

Stall prevention operation level

Pr. 22 (stall prevention operation level)

Pr. 48 (second stall prevention operation current)

When RL and RT are on, Pr. 49 (second stall prevention operation frequency) is invalid.

Exciting current low-speed multiplying factor

The current is compensated for by the multiplying factor (0 to 1000%) set in Pr. 275 before RL and RT are switched on.

Carrier frequency Pr. 72 "PWM frequency

selection" (0 to 15)

Pr. 276 (stop-on-contact PWM carrier frequency) (0 to 15, 9999)

Fast-response current limit Yes No 4

PARAMETERS

160

Frequencies set in stop-on-contact control (Pr. 270 = 1 or 3) (In external operation mode) The following table lists the frequencies set when the input terminals (RH, RM, RL, RT, JOG) are selected together.

Input Signals

RH RM RL RT JOG Set Frequency

Stop-on- Contact Control

Function

Remarks

Speed 1 (high speed) Pr. 4 Speed 2 (middle speed) Pr. 5 Speed 3 (low speed) Pr. 6 According to 0-5V, 0-10V, 4-20mA Jog frequency Pr. 15

Speed 6 Pr. 26 Middle speed when Pr. 26 = 9999

Speed 5 Pr. 25 Low speed when Pr. 25 = 9999 Speed 1 (high speed) Pr. 4 Jog frequency Pr. 15 Speed 4 Pr. 24 Low speed when Pr. 24 = 9999 Speed 2 (middle speed) Pr. 5 Jog frequency Pr. 15 Speed 3 (low speed, stop-on-contact frequency) Pr. 6 Jog frequency Pr. 15 Jog frequency Pr. 15 Jog frequency Pr. 15 Jog frequency Pr. 15 Jog frequency Pr. 15 Speed 3 (low speed, stop-on-contact frequency) Pr. 6 Jog frequency Pr. 15 Jog frequency Pr. 15 Speed 3 (low speed, stop-on-contact frequency) Pr. 6 Jog frequency Pr. 15

Speed 6 Pr. 26 Middle speed when Pr. 26 = 9999

Speed 7 Pr. 27 Low speed when Pr. 27 = 9999 Jog frequency Pr. 15 Jog frequency Pr. 15 Jog frequency Pr. 15 Jog frequency Pr. 6 Speed 3 (low speed, stop-on-contact frequency) Pr. 6 Jog frequency Pr. 15 According to 0-5V, 0-10V, 4-20mA

* indicates that the function is selected.

Note: 1. indicates that the signal is on. 2. Indicates that the remote setting function is not selected. (The remote setting function disables

stop-on-contact control.) 3. The selection of the 12-bit digital speed input FR-A5AX (option) makes the above list invalid.

Note that when both RL and RT are on, the frequency is as set in Pr. 6 and stop-on-contact control is exercised.

4. The jog frequency has the highest priority. 5. When the terminal functions are changed using Pr. 180 to Pr. 186, the other functions may be

affected. Confirm the functions of the corresponding terminals before making settings.

PARAMETERS

161

Pr. 60 "intelligent mode selection" Pr. 80 "motor capacity" Pr. 81 "number of motor poles" Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 (input terminal function selection) Pr. 190 to Pr. 195 (output terminal function selection)

Related parameters

4.2.57 Brake sequence function (Pr. 278 to Pr. 285)

Pr. 278 "brake opening frequency"

Pr. 279 "brake opening current"

Pr. 280 "brake opening current detection time"

Pr. 281 "brake operation time at start"

Pr. 282 "brake operation frequency"

Pr. 283 "brake operation time at stop"

Pr. 284 "deceleration detection function selection"

Pr. 285 "overspeed detection frequency"

This function is used to output from the inverter the mechanical brake opening completion signal timing signal in vertical lift and other applications. This function prevents the load from dropping with gravity at starting due to the operation timing fault of the mechanical brake or an overcurrent alarm from occurring at a stop, ensuring secure operation.

The mechanical brake opening completion signal may either be entered or not entered into the inverter. In the FR-B3 series, this function is made valid by setting "7" or "8" in Pr. 60 and further selecting advanced magnetic flux vector control in the external operation mode. (With the exception of Pr. 285)

Factory Setting Setting RangeParameter

Number FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3 278 3Hz 0 to 30Hz 279 130% 0 to 200% 280 0.3 s 0 to 2 s 281 0.3 s 0 to 5 s 282 6Hz 0 to 30Hz 283 0.3 s 0 to 5 s 284 0 0, 1

285 9999 0 to 30Hz, 9999

Cannot be set for the FR-B series.

Sink logic Pr. 184 = 15 Pr. 190 = 20

R U

S V

T W

MC

STF

RH

SD SE

MC MC

24VDC

*

NFB

Brake opening request signal (BOF signal) *Note the permissible current of the inverter's internal transistor. (24VDC 0.1A)

Start signal

Multi-speed signal

Brake opening completion signal

(Note 2) RUN

AU (Note 1)

Mechanical brake

Motor

(BRI signal)

Note: 1. The input signal terminal used depends on the Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 settings. 2. The output signal terminal used depends on the Pr. 190 to Pr. 195 settings.

4

PARAMETERS

162

At start: When the start signal is input to the inverter, the inverter starts running. When the output frequency reaches the value set in Pr. 278 and the output current is not less than the value set in Pr. 279, the inverter outputs the brake opening request signal (BOF) after the time set in Pr. 280 has elapsed. When the time set in Pr. 281 elapses after the brake opening completion signal (BRI) was activated, the inverter increases the output frequency to the set speed. At stop: When the speed has decreased to the frequency set in Pr. 282, the brake opening request signal (BOF) is switched off. When the time set in Pr. 283 elapses after the brake operation confirmation signal (BRI) was activated, the inverter output is switched off. * If Pr. 60 = "8" (mechanical brake opening completion signal not input), this time is the time after the

brake opening request signal is output.

1) Pr. 60 = "7" (brake opening completion signal input)

STF

ON

ON

Pr.280Pr.278

Pr.13 Pr.281

Pr.278Pr.282

Pr.283

ON

Pr.279

Time

Target frequency

Output frequency

Output current

Brake opening request (BOF signal)

Brake opening completion (BRI signal)

Electromagnetic brake operation Closed Opened Closed

2) Pr. 60 = "8" (mechanical brake opening completion signal not input)

STF

ON

ON

Pr.280Pr.278

Pr.13 Pr.281

Pr.278Pr.282

Pr.283

Pr.279

Time

Target frequency

Output frequency

Output current

Brake opening request (BOF signal)

Electromagnetic brake operation Closed Opened Closed

PARAMETERS

163

(1) Parameter setting

1) Select advanced magnetic flux vector control. (Pr. 80, Pr. 81 "9999") 2) Set "7 or 8" (brake sequence mode) in Pr. 60.

To ensure more complete sequence control, it is recommended to set "7" (brake opening completion signal input) in Pr. 60. Note that the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function is not activated when the brake sequence mode is selected.

3) Refer to the following table and set the parameters:

Parameter Number Name Setting Description

278 Brake opening frequency 0 to 30Hz Set to the rated slip frequency of the motor + about 1.0Hz.

This parameter may only be set if Pr. 278 Pr. 282.

279 Brake opening current 0 to 200% Generally, set this parameter to about 50 to 90%. If the setting is too low, the load is liable to drop with gravity at start. Suppose that the rated inverter current is 100%.

280 Brake opening current detection time 0 to 2 s Generally, set this parameter to about 0.1 to 0.3 seconds.

281 Brake operation time at start 0 to 5 s

Pr. 60 = 7: Set the mechanical delay time until the brake is loosened. Pr. 60 = 8: Set the mechanical delay time until the brake is loosened + about 0.1-0.2 s.

282 Brake operation frequency 0 to 30Hz

At this frequency, the brake opening request signal (BOF) is switched off. Generally, set this parameter to the Pr. 278 setting + 3-4Hz. This parameter may only be set if Pr. 282 Pr. 278.

283 Brake operation time at stop 0 to 5 s

Pr. 60 = 7: Set the mechanical delay time until the brake is closed + 0.1 seconds. Pr. 60 = 8: Set the mechanical delay time until the brake is closed + about 0.2 to 0.3 s.

0 Deceleration is not detected.

284 Deceleration detection function selection 1

If deceleration is not normal during deceleration operation, the inverter alarm (E.MB2) is provided to shut off the output and switch off the brake opening request signal (BOF).

0 to 30Hz If (detected frequency) - (output frequency) > Pr. 285 in the PLG feedback control mode, the inverter alarm (E.MB1) is provided to shut off the output and switch off the brake opening request signal (BOF).285 Overspeed detection

frequency 9999 Overspeed is not detected.

Note: When using this function, set the acceleration time to 1 second or longer.

(2) Explanations of terminals used

The terminals must be allocated using Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 and Pr. 190 to Pr. 195.

Brake Sequence Mode Signal Terminals Used Pr. 60 = 7 (with mechanical brake

opening completion signal) Pr. 60 = 8 (without mechanical

brake opening completion signal) BOF According to Pr. 190 to Pr. 195 Brake opening request Brake opening request BRI According to Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 Brake opening completion signal

Note: 1. The brake opening completion signal (BRI) is a parameter valid when Pr. 60 = 7. 2. When the terminal functions are changed using Pr. 180 to 186 and Pr. 190 to Pr. 195, the other

functions may be affected. Confirm the functions of the corresponding terminals before making settings.

4

PARAMETERS

164

(3) Protective functions

If any of the following errors occur in the brake sequence mode, the inverter results in an alarm, shuts off the output and switches off the brake opening request signal (BOF terminal). On the operation panel (FR-DU04) LED and parameter unit (FR-PU04) screen, the following errors are displayed:

Error Display Error Display

E.MB1 (Detected frequency) - (output frequency) > Pr. 286 in the PLG feedback control mode. (Overspeed detection function)

E.MB2 Deceleration is not normal during deceleration operation (Use Pr. 284 to select this function.) (Except stall prevention operation)

E.MB3 Brake opening request signal (BOF) switched on though the motor is at a stop. (Gravity drop prevention function)

E.MB4 More than 2 seconds after the run command (forward or reverse rotation) is input, the brake opening request signal (BOF) does not switch on.

E.MB5 More than 2 seconds after the brake opening request signal switched on, the brake opening completion signal (BRI) does not switch on.

E.MB6 Though the inverter had switched on the brake opening request signal (BOF), the brake opening completion signal (BRI) switched off during that period.

E.MB7 More than 2 seconds after the brake opening request signal (BOF) switched off at a stop, the brake opening completion signal (BRI) does not switch off.

Note: During PLG feedback control (when the FR-A5AP option is loaded), overspeed detection (Pr. 285) is valid if the Pr. 60 setting is other than "7 or 8". When using PLG feedback control, the explosion-proof certification test is required separately.

PARAMETERS

165

4.2.58 Droop control (Pr. 286, Pr. 287)

Pr. 286 "Droop gain"

Pr. 287 "Droop filter constant"

This function balances the load in proportion to the load torque with or without PLG, and provides speed drooping characteristics. This is effective in balancing the load when using multiple inverters.

The output frequency is varied according to the amount of torque current during unbalanced flux vector control and vector control. The drooping amount at the rated torque is set by the droop gain as a percentage using the rated frequency as a reference.

Droop compensation frequency = Amount of torque current after filtering Rated current

Rated frequency droop gain 100

Confirm the following items when using the droop control. 1. This function is valid when Pr. 286 "0" during unbalanced flux vector and vector control. 2. This function is valid when the operation state is constant speed operation. 3. The upper limit of the droop compensation frequency is 120Hz. 4. The rated current follows the value set in Pr. 9 "Motor rated current".

Factory setting Setting rangeParameter No. FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3 286 0% 0 to 100% 287 0.3s 0.00 to 1.00s

Cannot be set for the FR-B series.

Droop gain

Torque 100%

Droop compensation frequency

Fr eq

ue nc

y

Refer to the following table and set each parameter.

Parameter No. Details

286 Set the drooping amount at the rated torque as a percentage with respect to the rated frequency. When the setting value is "0", the function will be invalid (no droop control).

287 Set the time constant of the filter applied on the torque amount current.

Pr. 9 "electronic thermal O/L relay" Pr. 71 "applied motor" Pr. 84 "rated motor frequency"

Related parameters

4

PARAMETERS

166

Pr. 54 "FM terminal function selection" Pr. 55 "frequency monitoring reference" Pr. 56 "current monitoring reference" Pr. 158 "AM terminal function selection"

Related parameters

4.2.59 Meter (frequency meter) calibration (Pr. 900, Pr. 901)

Pr. 900 "FM terminal calibration"

Pr. 901 "AM terminal calibration"

By using the operation panel/parameter unit, you can calibrate a meter connected to terminal FM to full scale. Terminal FM provides the pulse output. By setting Pr. 900, you can calibrate the meter connected to the inverter from the parameter unit without providing a calibration resistor. You can display a digital value on a digital counter using the pulse train signal from terminal FM. A 1440pulses/s output is provided at the full scale value as explained in the section of Pr. 54. When the running frequency has been selected for monitoring, the ratio of this FM terminal output frequency can be set in Pr. 55.

() (+)

1mA

8VDC

T2

T1 FM (AM)

SD (5)

() (+) FM (AM)

SD (5)

Note: The parameter is factory-set to 1mA full-scale or 1440pulses/s FM output frequency at 60Hz.

Meter 1mA full scale Analog meter (Digital meter)

Pulse width T1 Pulse period T2

:Adjusted with Pr. 900 :Set in Pr. 55 (frequency monitoring) Set in Pr. 56 (current monitoring)

1440 pulses/s

Terminal AM is factory-set to provide a 10VDC output in the full-scale state of each monitored data. Pr. 901 allows the output voltage ratio (gain) to be adjusted according to the meter reading. Note that the maximum output voltage is 10VDC.

(1)Calibration of terminal FM 1) Connect a meter (frequency meter) across inverter terminals FM-SD. (Note the polarity. FM is the

positive terminal.) 2) When a calibration resistor has already been connected, adjust the resistance to "0" or remove the

resistor. 3) Set any of "1 to 3, 5, 6, 8, 10 to 14, 17, 18 and 21" in Pr. 54.

When the running frequency or inverter output current has been selected as the output signal, preset in Pr. 55 or Pr. 56 the running frequency or current at which the output signal is 1440pulses/s. At this 1440pulses/s, the meter normally deflects to full scale.

PARAMETERS

167

(2)Calibration of terminal AM 1) Connect a 0-10VDC meter (frequency meter) across inverter terminals AM-5. (Note the polarity. AM is

the positive terminal.) 2) Set any of "1 to 3, 5, 6, 8, 10 to 14, 17, 18 and 21" in Pr. 158.

When the running frequency or inverter output current has been selected as the output signal, preset in Pr. 55 or Pr. 56 the running frequency or current at which the output signal is 10V.

3) When outputting a signal which cannot achieve a 100% value easily by operation, e.g. output current, set "21" in Pr. 158 and perform the following operation. After that, set "2" (output current, for example) in Pr. 158.

When operation panel (FR-DU04) is used

8) Press the [STOP/RESET] key to stop the inverter.

1) Select the PU operation mode.

2) Set the running frequency.

3) Press the [SET] key.

4) Read Pr. 900 "FM terminal calibration" or Pr. 901 "AM terminal calibration".

5) Press the [FWD] key to run the inverter. (Motor need not be connected.)

7) Press the [SET] key for about 1.5 s.

6) Hold down the [UP/DOWN] key to adjust the meter pointer to the required position. (Depending on the setting, the pointer may take some time to move.)

Note: 1. Pr. 900 is factory-set to 1mA full-scale or 1440pulses/s FM output frequency at 60Hz. The maximum pulse train output of terminal FM is 2400pulses/s.

2. When a frequency meter is connected across terminals FM-SD to monitor the running frequency, the FM terminal output is filled to capacity at the factory setting if the maximum output frequency reaches or exceeds 100Hz. In this case, the Pr. 55 setting must be changed to the maximum frequency.

3. For the operation procedure using the parameter unit (FR-PU04), refer to the FR-PU04 instruction manual.

4

PARAMETERS

168

4.2.60 Frequency setting voltage (current) bias and gain (Pr. 902 to Pr. 905)

Pr. 902 "frequency setting voltage bias"

Pr. 903 "frequency setting voltage gain"

Pr. 904 "frequency setting current bias"

Pr. 905 "frequency setting current gain"

You can set the output frequency as desired in relation to the frequency setting signal (0 to 5V, 0 to 10V or 4 to 20mADC).

The "bias" and "gain" functions are used to adjust the relationship between the input signal entered from outside the inverter to set the output frequency, e.g. 0 to 5VDC, 0 to 10VDC or 4 to 20mADC, and the output frequency.

Use Pr. 902 to set the bias frequency at 0V. Use Pr. 903 to set the output frequency relative to the frequency command voltage set in Pr. 73. Use Pr. 904 to set the bias frequency at 4mA. Use Pr. 905 to set the output frequency relative to the 20mA frequency command current (4 to 20mA).

Setting RangeParameter Number Factory Setting

FR-B FR-B3 Remarks

902 0V 0Hz 0 to 10V 0 to 60Hz 0 to 10V 0 to 60Hz

903 5V 60Hz 0 to 10V 1 to 120Hz/ 1 to 60Hz 0 to 10V 1 to 400Hz 22K or less/30K or more

904 4mA 0Hz 0 to 20mA 0 to 60Hz 0 to 20mA 0 to 60Hz

905 20mA 60Hz 0 to 20mA 1 to 120Hz/ 1 to 60Hz 0 to 20mA 1 to 400Hz 22K or less/30K or more

60Hz

Pr.902 Pr.904

Pr.903

Pr.73

Pr.905 Gain

O ut

pu t f

re qu

en cy

(H z)

Bias

Factory setting

Frequency setting signal0 0 4

0 5V 10V 20mA

100%

(1) The frequency setting voltage biases and gains may be adjusted in either of the following three ways: 1) Any point can be adjusted with a voltage applied across terminals 2-5. 2) Any point can be adjusted with no voltage applied across terminals 2-5. 3) Bias voltage is not adjusted.

(2) The frequency setting current biases and gains may be adjusted in either of the following three ways: 1) Any point can be adjusted with a current flowing at terminal 4. 2) Any point can be adjusted with no current flowing at terminal 4. 3) Bias current is not adjusted.

Pr. 20 "acceleration/deceleration reference frequency"

Pr. 73 "0-5V/0-10V selection" Pr. 79 "operation mode selection"

Related parameters

PARAMETERS

169

Pr. 903 "frequency setting voltage gain" (Pr.902, Pr. 904, Pr. 905 can also be adjusted similarly.)

When using the frequency setting signal from the operation panel (FR-DU04) to set the frequency.

(1)Power-on (monitoring mode)

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

(2)Choose the PU operation mode.

1) Using the MODE key, make sure that the PU operation mode has been selected.

Monitoring mode

MODE

Frequency setting mode

Parameter setting mode

Help mode Operation mode (PU operation mode)

MODE MODE

MODE MODE

Confirm that the PU operation mode ( ) has been chosen. In the JOG operation mode ( ) or external operation mode ( ), press the / key to display . If cannot be displayed by pressing the / key in the external operation mode ( ). (if Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" "0"), refer to 2) and set "1" (PU operation mode) in Pr. 79 "operation mode selection".

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

4

PARAMETERS

170

2) Set "1" (PU operation mode) in Pr. 79 "operation mode selection". Example: To change the external operation mode (Pr. 79=2) to the PU operation mode (Pr. 79=1)

SET

SET

Current setting Setting change

Press for 1.5 s

SET

Middle digit flickers Most significant digit flickers

SET

Least significant digit flickers

0 to 9

SET

Parameter setting mode

Using the key,

choose the "parameter

setting mode" as in 1).

MODE

7 times 9 times

Setting write

Flicker

0 to 9

If appears, make sure that the forward rotation (STF) or reverse rotation (STR) signal connected to the control terminal is not on. If it is on, turn it off.

SET

"1" (PU operation mode) has been set in Pr. 79. If appears, you did not press the key for 1.5 seconds when writing the setting. Restart the procedure from the beginning.

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

Press the key once, press the key, and restart the setting from the begining.

SET

PARAMETERS

171

(3)Read Pr. 903 and show the current setting of the gain frequency. (Pr. 902, Pr. 904 and Pr. 905 can also be adjusted similarly.)

SET

0 to 9 0 to 9

Most significant digit flickers.

Middle digit flickers.

Least significant digit flickers.

Current setting of gain frequency

SET

SET

SET

Parameter setting mode Using the key, choose the "parameter setting mode" as in (2)-1).MODE

9 times 3

times

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

(4)Set a gain frequency in Pr. 903 and show the analog voltage A/D value across terminals 2-5 in %. (when the frequency is set to 80Hz)

Press for 1.5 s

Current setting of gain frequency

Changing the gain frequency

Press to change the set frequency.

SET

In any of the methods in (5) to (7) on the following page, continue the setting until the analog voltage A/D value flickers. If you end the setting here, the gain frequency change will not be reflected.

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

Analog voltage A/D value (%) across terminals 2-5

4

PARAMETERS

172

1) When not adjusting the gain voltage go to (5) 2) When adjusting any point by applying a voltage go to (6) 3) When adjusting any point without applying a voltage go to (7)

(5)How to adjust the gain frequency only without the voltage being adjusted

Press for 1.5 s SET

Flicker

Press the or key once to display the current analog voltage adjustment.

Example: When analog voltage adjustment value is 100%(5V)

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

Analog voltage A/D value (%) across terminals 2-5

(6)How to adjust any point by applying a voltage across terminals 2-5 (e.g. from the external potentiometer) (current: across terminals 4-5) (When applying 5V)

Press for 1.5 s

Flicker

Apply a 5V voltage. (Turn the external potentiometer connected across terminals 2-5 to maximum.)

SET

When the potentiometer is at the maximum position, the value is nearly 100.

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

Analog voltage A/D value (%) across terminals 2-5

(7)How to adjust any point without applying a voltage across terminals 2-5 (without a current flowing across terminals 4-5) (when changing from 4V (80%) to 5V (100%))

Press for 1.5 s

Flicker

SET

Press the or key once to display the current analog voltage calibration value.

Set the gain voltage (%) with the key. [0(%) for 0V (0mA), 100(%) for 5V (10V, 20mA)]

/

/

FR-DU04 CONTROL PANEL

Hz

MON EXT PU

A V

REV FWD

Analog voltage A/D value (%) across terminals 2-5

(8)Press the SET key to shift to the next parameter.

(9)Re-set Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" according to the operation mode to be used.

PARAMETERS

173

Note: 1. If the Pr. 903 or Pr. 905 (gain adjustment) value is changed, the Pr. 20 value does not change. The input signal to terminal 1 (frequency setting auxiliary input) is added to the frequency setting signal.

2. For the operation procedure using the parameter unit (FR-PU04), refer to the FR-PU04 instruction manual.

CAUTION

Be careful when setting any value other than "0" as the bias frequency at 0V. Even without the speed command, the motor will start running at the set frequency by merely switching on the start signal.

4.2.61 Buzzer control (Pr. 990)

Pr. 990 "buzzer control"

You can make the buzzer "beep" when you press any key of the operation panel or parameter unit.

Factory Setting Setting RangeParameter Number FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3

Remarks

990 1 0, 1 0: Without beep, 1: With beep

4

MEMO

5

CHAPTER 5 PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

This chapter explains the "protective functions" of this product. Always read the instructions before using the equipment.

5.1 Errors (Alarms) ........................................................174 5.2 Troubleshooting .......................................................184 5.3 Precautions for Maintenance and Inspection ...........186

Chapter 1

Chapter 2

Chapter 3

Chapter 4

Chapter 5

Chapter 6

Chapter 7

5.1 Errors (Alarms) PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

174

5 PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS5.1 Errors (Alarms)

If any fault has occurred in the inverter, the corresponding protective function is activated and the error (alarm) indication appears automatically on the PU display. When the protective function is activated, refer to "5.2 Troubleshooting" and clear up the cause by taking proper action. If an alarm stop has occurred, the inverter must be reset to restart it.

When the protective function is activated, take the corresponding corrective action, then reset the inverter, and resume operation.

Resetting method When the protective function is activated and the inverter has stopped its output, the inverter output is kept stopped (and the motor is coasted to a stop). Unless reset, therefore, the inverter cannot restart. To reset, use any of the following methods: switch power off once, then on again; short reset terminal RES-SD for more than 0.1 seconds, then open; or press the [RESET] key of the operation panel or parameter unit (use the help function of the parameter unit). If RES-SD are kept shorted, the operation panel shows "Err." and the parameter unit indicates that the inverter is being reset.

5.1.1 Error (alarm) definitions (1) Major faults

Operation Panel Indication E.OC1 FR-PU04 OC During Acc

Name Overcurrent shut-off during acceleration

Description

When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds approximately 200% of the rated current during acceleration, the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. The inverter output is stopped when the start signal is entered with power supplied to the R1 and S1 terminals only.

Check point Check for sudden acceleration. Check for output short circuit. Check that main circuit power (R, S, T) is supplied.

Corrective action

Increase the acceleration time. If "E.OC1" is always lit at a start, disconnect the motor once and then start the

inverter. If "E.OC1" is still lit, contact your sales representative. Supply main circuit power (R, S, T).

Operation Panel Indication E.OC2 FR-PU04 Stedy Spd OC

Name Overcurrent shut-off during constant speed

Description When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds approximately 200% of the rated current during constant speed, the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output.

Check point Check for sudden load change. Check for output short circuit.

Corrective action Keep load stable.

PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

175

Operation Panel Indication E.OC3 FR-PU04 OC During Dec

Name Overcurrent shut-off during deceleration

Description When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds approximately 200% of the rated current during deceleration (other than acceleration or constant speed), the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output.

Check point Check for sudden speed reduction. Check for output short circuit. Check for too fast operation of motor's mechanical brake.

Corrective action Increase the deceleration time. Check mechanical brake operation.

Operation Panel Indication E.OV1 FR-PU04 OV During Acc

Name Regenerative overvoltage shut-off during acceleration

Description

If regenerative energy causes the inverter's internal main circuit DC voltage to reach or exceed the specified value, the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. It may also be activated by a surge voltage generated in the power supply system.

Check point Check for too slow acceleration. Corrective action Decrease the acceleration time.

Operation Panel Indication E.OV2 FR-PU04 Stedy Spd OV

Name Regenerative overvoltage shut-off during constant speed

Description

If regenerative energy causes the inverter's internal main circuit DC voltage to reach or exceed the specified value, the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. It may also be activated by a surge voltage generated in the power supply system.

Check point Check for sudden load change.

Corrective action Keep load stable. Use the brake unit or power return converter (FR-RC) as required.

Operation Panel Indication E.OV3 FR-PU04 OV During Dec

Name Regenerative overvoltage shut-off during deceleration or stop

Description

If regenerative energy causes the inverter's internal main circuit DC voltage to reach or exceed the specified value, the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. It may also be activated by a surge voltage generated in the power supply system.

Check point Check for sudden speed reduction.

Corrective action

Increase the deceleration time. (Set the deceleration time which meets load GD2) Decrease the braking duty. Use the brake unit or power return converter (FR-RC) as required.

5

PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

176

Operation Panel Indication E.THM FR-PU04 Motor Ovrload

Name Motor overload shut-off (electronic overcurrent protection) (Note 1)

Description

The electronic overcurrent protection in the inverter detects motor overheat due to overload or reduced cooling capability during constant-speed operation. When 85% of the preset value is reached, pre-alarm (TH indication) occurs. When the specified value is reached, the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. When a special motor such as a multi-pole motor or two or more motors are run, provide a thermal relay in the inverter output side since the motor(s) cannot be protected by the electronic overcurrent protection.

Check point Check the motor for use under overload.

Corrective action Reduce the load weight. For a constant-torque motor, change the Pr. 71 setting to the constant-torque

motor setting.

Operation Panel Indication E.THT FR-PU04 Inv. Overload

Name Inverter overload shut-off (electronic overcurrent protection) (Note 1)

Description

If a current of more than 150% of the rated output current flows and overcurrent shut-off does not occur (200% or less), inverse-time characteristics cause the electronic overcurrent protection to be activated to stop the inverter output in order to protect the output transistors. (Overload immunity 150%, 60 seconds.)

Check point Check the motor for use under overload. Corrective action Reduce the load weight.

Note 1: Resetting the inverter initializes the internal heat integrating data of the electronic overcurrent protection.

Operation Panel Indication E.IPF FR-PU04 Inst. Pwr. Loss

Name Instantaneous power failure protection (Note 2)

Description

If a power failure occurs for longer than 15ms (this also applies to inverter input shut-off), the instantaneous power failure protective function is activated to stop the inverter output in order to prevent the control circuit from malfunctioning. At this time, the alarm warning output contacts open (across terminals B-C) and close (across terminals A-C). (Note 2) If a power failure persists for longer than 100ms, the alarm warning output is not provided, and the inverter restarts if the start signal is on upon power restoration. (The inverter continues operating if an instantaneous power failure is within 15ms.)

Check point Find the cause of instantaneous power failure occurrence.

Corrective action

Remedy the instantaneous power failure. Prepare a backup power supply for instantaneous power failure. Set the function of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure. (Refer to page 87.)

Note 2: When an instantaneous power failure occurs, the alarm display and alarm output are not provided, but the inverter performs protective operation to prevent a fault from occurring in itself. In some operating status (load size, acceleration/deceleration time setting, etc.), overcurrent or other protection may be activated upon power restoration.

PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

177

Operation Panel Indication E.UVT FR-PU04 Under Voltage

Name Undervoltage protection

Description

If the power supply voltage of the inverter reduces, the control circuit will not operate properly and will result in decreased motor torque or increased heat generation. To prevent this, if the power supply voltage reduces below 150V (about 300V for the 400V class), this function stops the inverter output. When a jumper is not connected across P-P1, the undervoltage protective function is activated.

Check point Check for start of large-capacity motor. Check that a jumper or DC reactor is connected across terminals P-P1.

Corrective action Check the power supply system equipment such as power supply. Connect a jumper or DC reactor across terminals P-P1.

Operation Panel Indication E.FIN FR-PU04 H/Sink O/Temp

Name Fin overheat

Description If the cooling fin overheats, the overheat sensor is actuated to stop the inverter output.

Check point Check for too high ambient temperature. Check for cooling fin clogging.

Corrective action Set the ambient temperature to within the specifications.

Operation Panel Indication E.GF FR-PU04 Ground Fault

Name Output side ground fault overcurrent protection

Description This function stops the inverter output if a ground fault overcurrent flows due to a ground fault which occurred in the inverter's output side (load side).

Check point Check for a ground fault in the motor and connection cable. Corrective action Remedy the ground fault portion.

Operation Panel Indication E.OHT FR-PU04 OH Fault

Name External thermal relay operation (Note 3)

Description

If the external thermal relay designed for motor overheat protection or the internally mounted temperature relay in the motor switches on (contacts open), the inverter output is stopped. If the relay contacts are reset automatically, the inverter will not restart unless it is reset.

Check point Check for motor overheating. Check that the value of 7 (OH signal) is set correctly in any of Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 (input terminal function selection).

Corrective action Reduce the load and operating duty.

Note 3: The output terminals used must be allocated using Pr. 190 to Pr. 195 (output terminal function selection). This function is activated only when OH has been set to any of Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 (input terminal function selection).

5

PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

178

Operation Panel Indication E.BE FR-PU04 Br. Cct. Fault

Name Brake transistor alarm detection

Description If the brake circuit fault has occurred due to damaged brake transistors, etc., this function stops the inverter output. In this case, the inverter power must be switched off immediately.

Check point Reduce load GD2. Check that the frequency of using the brake is proper.

Corrective action Change the inverter.

Operation Panel Indication E.OLT FR-PU04 Still Prev STP ( OL shown during stall

prevention operation) Name Stall prevention

Description The running frequency has fallen to 0 by stall prevention activated. (OL while stall prevention is being activated.)

Check point Check the motor for use under overload. Corrective action Reduce the load weight.

Operation Panel Indication E.OPT FR-PU04 Option Fault

Name Option alarm

Description

Stops the inverter output if the dedicated option used in the inverter results in setting error or connection (connector) fault. Appears by connecting an AC power supply to R, S, T when you have set high power factor converter connection.

Check point Check that the plugged-in option connector is plugged securely.

Corrective action Connect the plugged-in option securely. Contact your sales representative.

Operation Panel Indication

E.OP1 to OP3

FR-PU04 Option slot alarm 1 to 3

Name Option slot alarm

Description Stops the inverter output if a functional alarm occurs in the plug-in option loaded in the corresponding slot (e.g. communication alarm of the communication option).

Check point Check for a wrong option function setting and operation. (1 to 3 indicates the option slot numbers.)

Corrective action Confirm the option function setting, etc.

Operation Panel Indication E.PE FR-PU04 Corrupt Memry

Name Parameter storage device alarm

Description Stops the inverter output if a fault occurs in the E2PROM device which stores parameter settings.

Check point Check for too many number of parameter write times. Corrective action Contact your sales representative.

PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

179

Operation Panel Indication E.PUE FR-PU04 PU Leave Out

Name Parameter unit disconnection

Description

This function stops the inverter output if communication between the inverter and PU is suspended, e.g. the operation panel or PU is disconnected, when "2", "3", "16" or "17" was set in Pr. 75 "reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection". This function stops the inverter output if the number of successive communication errors is greater than the permissible number of retries when the Pr. 121 value is "9999" for RS-485 communication from the PU connector. This function stops the inverter output if communication is broken for the time set in Pr. 122.

Check point Check for loose fitting of the DU or PU. Check the Pr. 75 setting.

Corrective action Fit the DU and PU securely.

Operation Panel Indication E.RET FR-PU04 Retry No Over

Name Retry count exceeded

Description If operation cannot be resumed properly within the number of retries set, this function stops the inverter output.

Check point Find the cause of alarm occurrence. Corrective action Eliminate the cause of the error preceding this error indication.

Operation Panel Indication E.LF FR-PU04

Name Output phase failure protection

Description This function stops the inverter output if one of the three phases (U, V, W) on

the inverters output side (load side) results in open phase. Check if the rated motor current is extremely lower than the rated inverter current.

Check point Check the wiring (Check the motor for a fault).

Corrective action Check the cables properly. Check the setting of Pr. 251 "output phase failure protection selection".

Operation Panel Indication E.CPU FR-PU04 CPU Fault

Name CPU error

Description If the arithmetic operation of the built-in CPU does not end within a predetermined period, the inverter self-determines it as an alarm and stops the output.

Check point

Corrective action Make connection securely. Contact your sales representative.

E. 6 Fault 6Operation Panel Indication E. 7

FR-PU04 Fault 7

Name CPU error

Description If the arithmetic operation of the peripheral circuit of the built-in CPU does not end within a predetermined period or if there is an error in the receive data of the built-in CPU, the inverter self-determines it as an alarm and stops the output.

Check point Check for a loose connector.

Corrective action Make connection securely. Contact your sales representative.

5

PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

180

Operation Panel Indication E.P24 FR-PU04

Name 24VDC power output short circuit

Description

When the 24VDC power output from the PC terminal is shorted, this function shuts off the power output. At this time, all external contact inputs switch off. The inverter cannot be reset by entering the RES signal. To reset, use the operation panel or switch power off, then on again.

Check point Check for a short circuit in the PC terminal output. Corrective action Remedy the short circuit portion.

Operation Panel Indication E.CTE FR-PU04

Name Operation panel power supply short circuit

Description

When the operation panel power supply (P5S of the PU connector) is shorted, this function shuts off the power supply output. At this time, the operation panel (parameter unit) cannot be used and RS-485 communication from the PU connector cannot be made. To reset, enter the RES signal or switch power off, then on again.

Check point Check for a short circuit in the PU connector cable. Corrective action Check the PU and cable.

Operation Panel Indication

E.MB1 to 7

FR-PU04

Name Brake sequence error (Note 5)

Description The inverter output is stopped when a sequence error occurs during use of the brake sequence function (Pr. 278 to Pr. 285).

Check point Find the cause of alarm occurrence. Corrective action Perform parameter setting check and wiring properly.

Note 5: No indication for the FR-B series.

(2) Minor fault

Operation Panel Indication FN FR-PU04 Fan fault

Name Fan fault

Description For the inverter, which contains a cooling fan, FN appears on the operation panel when the cooling fan stops due to a fault or operates differently from the setting of Pr. 244 "cooling fan operation selection".

Check point Check the cooling fan for a fault. Corrective action Change the fan.

PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

181

(3) Warnings

Operation Panel Indication OL FR-PU04 OL (Stall Prev STP)

Name Stall prevention (Over current)

During acceleration

If a current of more than 150% (Note 4) of the rated inverter current flows in the motor, this function stops the increase in frequency until the overload current reduces to prevent the inverter from resulting in overcurrent shut-off. When the overload current has reduced below 150%, this function increases the frequency again.

Description

During constant- speed operation

If a current of more than 150% (Note 4) of the rated inverter current flows in the motor, this function lowers the frequency until the overload current reduces to prevent overcurrent shut-off. When the overload current has reduced below 150%, this function increases the frequency up to the set value.

During deceleration

If a current of more than 150% (Note 4) of the rated inverter current flows in the motor, this function stops the decrease in frequency until the overload current reduces to prevent the inverter from resulting in overcurrent shut-off. When the overload current has reduced below 150%, this function decreases the frequency again.

Check point Check the motor for use under overload.

Corrective action The acceleration time may change. Increase the stall prevention operation level using Pr. 22 "stall prevention operation level" or make the stall prevention inoperative using Pr. 156 "stall prevention operation selection".

Note 4: The stall prevention operation current may be set as desired. It is factory-set to 150%.

Operation Panel Indication oL FR-PU04 oL

Name Stall prevention (overvoltage)

Description During deceleration

If the regenerative energy of the motor increases too much to exceed the brake capability, this function stops the decrease in frequency to prevent overvoltage shut-off. As soon as the regenerative energy has reduced, deceleration resumes.

Check point Check for sudden speed reduction.

Corrective action The deceleration time may change. Increase the deceleration time using Pr. 8 "deceleration time".

Operation Panel Indication PS FR-PU04 PS

Name PU stop

Description A stop made by pressing the [STOP] key of the PU has been set in Pr. 75 "PU stop selection".

Check point Check for a stop made by pressing the STOP key of the operation panel. Corrective action Refer to page 98.

5

PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

182

Operation Panel Indication Err.

Description

This alarm appears if: The RES signal is on. You attempted to set any parameter value in the external operation mode. You attempted to change the operation mode during operation. You attempted to set any parameter value outside its setting range. Normal communication cannot be made between the PU and inverter. You attempted to make parameter setting when Pr. 77 "parameter write disable

selection" has been set to disable parameter write. Corrective action Perform operation correctly.

5.1.2 To know the operating status at the occurrence of an alarm When any alarm has occurred, the display automatically switches to the indication of the corresponding protective function (error). By pressing the [MODE] key at this point without resetting the inverter, the display shows the output frequency. In this way, it is possible to know the running frequency at the occurrence of the alarm. It is also possible to know the current in the same manner. However, these values are not stored in memory and are erased when the inverter is reset.

5.1.3 Correspondences between digital and actual characters There are the following correspondences between the actual alphanumeric characters and the digital characters displayed on the operation panel:

Actual Digital Actual Digital Actual Digital 0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9 J

I

H

G

F

E

A

B

C

D

L

M

N

O

P

T

U

V

r

-

o

S

PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

183

5.1.4 Alarm code output

By setting Pr. 76 "alarm code output selection", an alarm definition can be output as a 4-bit digital signal. This signal is output from the open collector output terminals equipped as standard on the inverter. Correlations between alarm definitions and alarm codes are as follows.

Output Terminal Signal On-OffOperation Panel Display

(FR-DU04) SU IPF OL FU Alarm Code Alarm Output (across B-C)

E.OC1 0 0 0 1 1 E.OC2 0 0 1 0 2 E.OC3 0 0 1 1 3

Provided (Open)

E.OV1 E.OV2 E.OV3

0 1 0 0 4 Provided (Open)

E.THM 0 1 0 1 5 E.THT 0 1 1 0 6 Provided (Open)

E.IPF 0 1 1 1 7 Provided (Open) E.UVT 1 0 0 0 8 Provided (Open) E.FIN 1 0 0 1 9 Provided (Open) E. BE 1 0 1 0 A Provided (Open) E. GF 1 0 1 1 B Provided (Open) E.OHT 1 1 0 0 C Provided (Open)

E.OLT 1 1 0 1 D Not provided (Provided when OLT is displayed) (Open)

E.OPT 1 1 1 0 E Provided (Open) E.OP1 to E.OP3 1 1 1 0 E Provided (Open)

E. PE Provided (Open) E.PUE Provided (Open) E.RET Provided (Open) E.LF Provided (Open)

E.CPU Provided (Open) E. 6 Provided (Open) E. 7

1 1 1 1 F

Provided (Open)

(Note) 0: Output transistor OFF, 1: Output transistor ON (common terminal SE) The alarm output assumes that Pr. 195 setting is "99" (factory setting).

5.1.5 Resetting the inverter

Performing any of the following operations can reset the inverter. Note that the electronic overcurrent protection's internal heat calculation value and the number of retries are cleared (erased) by resetting the inverter.

Operation 1: Using the operation panel (FR-DU04), press the [RESET] key to reset the inverter. Operation 2: Switch power off once, then switch it on again. Operation 3: Switch on the reset signal (RES). 5

5.2 Troubleshooting PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

184

5.2 Troubleshooting

POINT: Check the corresponding areas. If the cause is still unknown, it is recommended to initialize the parameters (return to factory settings), re-set the required parameter values, and check again.

5.2.1 Motor remains stopped 1) Check the main circuit

Check that a proper power supply voltage is applied (operation panel display is provided). Check that the motor is connected properly. Check that the conductor across P1-P is connected.

2) Check the input signals Check that the start signal is input. Check that both the forward and reverse rotation start signals are not input. Check that the frequency setting signal is not zero. Check that the AU signal is on when the frequency setting signal is 4 to 20mA. Check that the output stop signal (MRS) or reset signal (RES) is not on. Check that the CS signal is not off when automatic restart after instantaneous power failure is selected (Pr. 57 = other than "9999").

3) Check the parameter settings Check that the reverse rotation prevention (Pr. 78) is not selected. Check that the operation mode (Pr. 79) setting is correct. Check that the bias and gain (Pr. 902 to Pr. 905) settings are correct. Check that the starting frequency (Pr. 13) setting is not greater than the running frequency. Check that various operational functions (such as three-speed operation), especially the maximum frequency (Pr. 1), are not zero.

4) Check the load Check that the load is not too heavy. Check that the shaft is not locked.

5) Others Check that the ALARM lamp is not lit. Check that the Pr. 15 "jog frequency" setting is not lower than the Pr. 13 "starting frequency" value.

5.2.2 Motor rotates in opposite direction Check that the phase sequence of output terminals U, V and W is correct. Check that the start signals (forward rotation, reverse rotation) are connected properly.

5.2.3 Speed greatly differs from the setting Check that the frequency setting signal is correct. (Measure the input signal level.) Check that the following parameter settings are proper: Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 902 to Pr. 905. Check that the input signal lines are not affected by external noise. (Use shielded cables) Check that the load is not too heavy.

5.2.4 Acceleration/deceleration is not smooth Check that the acceleration and deceleration time settings are not too short. Check that the load is not too heavy.

5.2.5 Motor current is large Check that the load is not too heavy.

PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

185

5.2.6 Speed does not increase Check that the maximum frequency (Pr. 1) setting is correct. Check that the load is not too heavy. (In agitators, etc., load may become heavy in winter.) Check that the brake resistor is not connected to terminals P-P1 by mistake.

5.2.7 Speed varies during operation

1) Inspection of load Check that the load is not varying.

2) Inspection of input signal Check that the frequency setting signal is not varying. Check that the frequency setting signal is not affected by induced noise.

3) Others Check that the wiring length is correct in V/F control. In the FR-B3 series, check that the settings of the applied motor capacity (Pr. 80) and the number of

applied motor poles (Pr. 81) are proper for the inverter capacity and motor capacity under advanced magnetic flux vector control.

In the FR-B3 series, check that the offline auto tuning (Pr. 96) setting is proper.

5.2.8 Operation mode is not changed properly

If the operation mode is not changed properly, check the following: 1. External input signal ........Check that the STF or STR signal is off.

When it is on, the operation mode cannot be changed. 2. Parameter setting ............Check the Pr. 79 setting.

When the setting of Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" is "0" (factory setting), switching input power on places the inverter in the external operation mode. Press the operation panel's [MODE] key three times and press the [UP] key (press the [PU] key for the parameter unit (FR-PU04)). This changes the external operation mode into the PU operation mode. For any other setting (1 to 8), the operation mode is limited according to the setting.

5.2.9 Operation panel (FR-DU04) display is not provided Make sure that the operation panel is connected securely with the inverter.

5.2.10 POWER lamp is not lit Make sure that the wiring and installation are correct.

5.2.11 Parameter write cannot be performed Make sure that operation is not being performed (signal STF or STR is not ON). Make sure that you pressed the [SET] key ([WRITE] key) for longer than 1.5 seconds. Make sure that you are not attempting to set the parameter outside the setting range. Make sure that you are not attempting to set the parameter in the external operation mode. Check Pr. 77 "parameter write disable selection".

5

5.3 Precautions for Maintenance and Inspection PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

186

5.3 Precautions for Maintenance and Inspection

The pressure-resistant, explosion-proof motor driving inverter is a static unit mainly consisting of semiconductor devices. Daily inspection must be performed to prevent any fault from occurring due to adverse influence by the operating environment, such as temperature, humidity, dust, dirt and vibration, changes in the parts with time, service life, and other factors.

5.3.1 Precautions for maintenance and inspection For some short time after the power is switched off, a high voltage remains in the smoothing capacitor. When accessing the inverter for inspection, switch power off. When more than 10 minutes have elapsed, make sure that the voltage across the main circuit terminals P-N of the inverter is 30VDC or less using a tester, etc.

5.3.2 Check items (1) Daily inspections

Check the following: 1) Motor operation fault 2) Improper installation environment 3) Cooling system fault 4) Unusual vibration and noise 5) Unusual overheating and discoloration

During operation, check the inverter input voltages using a tester.

(2) Cleaning

Always run the inverter in a clean state. When cleaning the inverter, gently wipe dirty areas with a soft cloth immersed in neutral detergent or ethanol.

Note: Do not use solvent, such as acetone, benzene, toluene and alcohol, as they will cause the inverter surface paint to peel off. Do not use detergent or alcohol to clean the display and other sections of the operation panel (FR- DU04) or parameter unit (FR-PU04) as these sections do not like them.

5.3.3 Periodic inspection Check the areas inaccessible during operation and requiring periodic inspection. For periodic inspection, consult us. 1) Cooling system: .....................Clean the air filter, etc. 2) Screws and bolts: ..................These parts may become loose due to vibration, temperature changes, etc.

Check that they are tightened securely and retighten as necessary. 3) Conductors and insulating materials: Check for corrosion and damage. 4) Insulation resistance: Measure. 5) Cooling fan, smoothing capacitor, relay: Check and change if necessary.

PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

187

5.3.4 Insulation resistance test using megger

1) Before performing the insulation resistance test using a megger on the external circuit, disconnect the cables from all terminals of the inverter so that the test voltage is not applied to the inverter.

2) For the continuity test of the control circuit, use a meter (high resistance range) and do not use the megger or buzzer.

3) For the inverter, conduct the insulation resistance test on the main circuit only as shown below and do not perform the test on the control circuit. (Use a 500VDC megger.)

R S T

U V W

IM Inverter

Motor Power supply

500VDC megger

Ground terminal

5.3.5 Pressure test

Do not conduct a pressure test. The inverter's main circuit uses semiconductors, which may be deteriorated if a pressure test is made.

5.3.6 Daily and Periodic Inspection Interval

Periodic*Area of Inspec-

tion

Inspection Item Description Daily 1

year 2

years

Method Criterion Instrument

Surrounding environment

Check ambient temperature, humidity, dusts, dirt, etc.

(Refer to page 7)

Ambient temperature: (constant torque) 10C to +50C, non-freezing.

Thermometer, hygrometer, recorder

Overall unit Check for unusual vibration and noise.

Visual and auditory checks. No fault.General

Power supply voltage

Check that main circuit voltage is normal.

Measure voltage across inverter terminals R-S-T.

Within permissible AC voltage fluctuation (Refer to page 194)

Meter, digital multimeter

General

(1) Check with megger (across main circuit terminals and ground terminal).

(2) Check for loose screws and bolts.

(3) Check for overheat- ing of each part.

(4) Clean.

(1) Disconnect all cables from inverter and measure across terminals R, S, T, U, V, W and ground terminal with megger.

(2) Re-tighten. (3) Visual check.

(1) 5M or more. (2), (3) No fault.

500VDC class megger

Conductors, cables

(1) Check conductors for distortion.

(2) Check cable sheaths for breakage.

(1), (2) Visual check. (1), (2) No fault.

Main circuit

Terminal block Check for damage. Visual check. No fault

5

PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

188

Interval Periodic*Area of

Inspec- tion

Inspection Item Description Daily 1

year 2

years

Method Crlterlon Instrument

Inverter module, Converter module

Check resistance across terminals.

Disconnect cables from inverter and measure across terminals R, S, T P, N and U, V, W P, N with a meter range of 100.

(Refer to page 189) Analog meter

Smoothing capacitor

(1) Check for liquid leakage.

(2) Check for safety valve projection and bulge.

(3) Measure electrostatic capacity.

(1), (2) Visual check. (3) Measure with

capacity meter.

(1), (2) No fault. (3) 85% or more

of rated capacity. Capacity

meter

Relay

(1) Check for chatter during operation.

(2) Check for rough surface on contacts.

(1) Auditory check. (2) Visual check.

(1) No fault. (2) No fault.

Main circuit

Resistor

(1) Check for crack in resistor insulation.

(2) Check for open cable.

(1) Visual check. Cement resistor, wire-wound resistor.

(2) Disconnect one end and measure with a meter.

(1) No fault. (2) Error should

be within 10% of indicated resistance value.

Meter, digital multimeter

Control circuit Protec- tive circuit

Operation check

(1) Check balance of output voltages across phases with inverter operated independently.

(2) Perform sequence protective operation test to make sure of no fault in protective and display circuits.

(1) Measure voltage across inverter output terminals U- V-W.

(2) Simulatively connect or disconnect inverter protective circuit output terminals.

(1) Phase-to- phase voltage balance within 4V (8V) for 200V (400V).

(2) Fault must occur because of sequence.

Digital multimeter, rectifier type voltmeter

Cooling system Cooling fan

(1) Check for unusual vibration and noise.

(2) Check for loose connection.

(1) Turn by hand with power off.

(2) Visual check

No unusual vibration, unusual noise.

Display (1) Check if LED lamp

is blown. (2) Clean.

(1) Light indicator lamps on panel.

(2) Clean with rag.

(1) Check that lamps are lit.

Display

Meter Check that reading is normal.

Check reading of meters on panel.

Must satisfy specified and management values.

Voltmeter, ammeter, etc.

General

(1) Check for unusual vibration and noise.

(2) Check for unusual odor.

(1) Auditory, sensory, visual checks.

(2) Check for unusual odor due to overheating, damage, etc.

(1), (2) No fault.

Motor

Insulation resistance

Check with megger (across terminals and ground terminal).

Disconnect cables from U, V, W, including motor cables.

5M or more 500V megger

Note: The value for the 400V class is indicated in the parentheses. *For periodic inspection, consult Mitsubishi.

PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

189

Checking the inverter and converter modules

(1) Disconnect the external power supply cables (R, S, T) and motor cables (U, V, W). (2) Prepare a meter. (Use 100 range.)

Change the polarity of the tester alternately at the inverter terminals R, S, T, U, V, W, P and N, and check for continuity.

Note: 1. Before measurement, check that the smoothing capacitor is discharged. 2. At the time of discontinuity, the measured value is an approximately value. may not be

indicated if there is instantaneous continuity under the influence of the smoothing capacitor. At the time of continuity, the measured value is several to several ten depending on the module type, circuit tester type, etc. If all measured values are almost the same, the modules are satisfactory.

Tester Polarity Tester Polarity

Measured Value Measured Value

R P Discontinuity R N Continuity D1

P R Continuity D4

N R Discontinuity S P Discontinuity S N Continuity

D2 P S Continuity

D5 N S Discontinuity

T P Discontinuity T N Continuity

C on

ve rte

r m od

ul e

D3 P T Continuity

D6 N T Discontinuity

U P Discontinuity U N Continuity TR1

P U Continuity TR4

N U Discontinuity V P Discontinuity V N Continuity

TR3 P V Continuity

TR6 N V Discontinuity

W P Discontinuity W N Continuity

In ve

rte r m

od ul

e

TR5 P W Continuity

TR2 N W Discontinuity

D1 D2 D3

D4 D5 D6

TR1 TR3 TR5

TR4 TR6 TR2

U

V

W

R

S

T

C

P

N

Inverter moduleConverter module

5

PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

190

5.3.7 Replacement of parts

The inverter consists of many electronic parts such as semiconductor devices. The following parts may deteriorate with age because of their structures or physical characteristics, leading to reduced performance or failure of the inverter. For preventive maintenance, the parts must be changed periodically.

Replacement Parts of the Inverter Part Name Standard Replacement Interval Description Cooling fan 2 to 3 years Change (as required)

Smoothing capacitor in main circuit 5 years Change (as required) Smoothing capacitor on control board 5 years Change the board (as required)

Relays Change as required

Note: For part replacement, contact the nearest Mitsubishi FA center.

(1) Cooling fan

The cooling fan cools heat-generating parts such as the main circuit semiconductor devices. The life of the cooling fan bearing is usually 10,000 to 35,000 hours. Hence, the cooling fan must be changed every 2 to 3 years if the inverter is run continuously. When unusual noise and/or vibration is noticed during inspection, the cooling fan must be changed immediately.

Removal 1) Push the catches from above and remove the fan cover.

2) Disconnect the fan connector(s). 3) Remove the fan.

Reinstallation 1) After confirming the orientation of the fan, reinstall the fan so that the arrow on the left of "AIR FLOW" faces up.

AIR FLOW

2) Reconnect the fan connectors. When wiring, use care to avoid the cables being caught by the fan.

3) Reinstall the fan cover.

Fan cover

Fan

Fan connectors

PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

191

(2) Smoothing capacitors

A large-capacity aluminum electrolytic capacitor is used for smoothing the DC in the main circuit, and an aluminum electrolytic capacitor is also used for stabilizing the control power in the control circuit. Their characteristics are adversely affected by ripple current, etc. When the inverter is operated in an ordinary, air- conditioned environment, change the capacitors about every 5 years. When 5 years have elapsed, the capacitors will deteriorate more rapidly. Check the capacitors at least every year (less than six months if their life will be expired soon). Check the following: 1) Case (side faces and bottom face for expansion) 2) Sealing plate (for remarkable warping and extreme cracks) 3) Explosion-proof valve (for excessive valve expansion and operation) 4) Appearance, external cracks, discoloration, leakage. When the measured capacitance of the capacitor has

reduced below 85% of the rating, change the capacitor. It is recommended to use simple equipment, which is recently available on the market for measurement of capacitor capacitance.

(3) Relays

To prevent a contact fault, etc., relays must be changed according to the number of accumulative switching times (switching life). See the following table for the inverter parts replacement guide. Lamps and other short-life parts must also be changed during periodic inspection.

5.3.8 Inverter replacement The inverter can be changed with the control circuit wiring kept connected. Before replacement, remove the screws in the wiring cover of the inverter. 1) Remove the mounting screws in both ends of the control circuit terminal block. 2) With both hands, pull down the terminal block from the back of the control circuit terminals.

3) When installing the terminal block to a new inverter, exercise care not to bend the pins of the control circuit terminal block connector.

5

PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

192

5.3.9 Measurement of main circuit voltages, currents and power

Measurement of voltages and currents Since the voltages and currents on the inverter power supply and output sides include harmonics, accurate measurement depends on the instruments used and circuits measured. When instruments for commercial frequency are used for measurement, measure the following circuits using the instruments given on the next page.

+ -

Ar

As

At

Vr

Vs

Vt

W11

W12

W13

Au

Av

Aw

Vu

Vv

Vw

W12

W22

V

R

S

T

U

V

W

Inverter

P 2

3-phase power supply

Instrument types

Input voltage

Input current

Output voltage

Output current

To motor

N 5

Typical Measuring Points and Instruments

Note: Use an FFT to measure the output voltage accurately. Accurate measurement cannot be made if you use a tester or general measuring instrument.

PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

193

Measuring Points and Instruments

Item Measuring Point Measuring Instrument Remarks (Reference Measured Value) *

Power supply voltage V1 Across R-S, S-T and T-R Moving-iron type AC voltmeter Commercial power supply Within permissible AC voltage fluctuation (Refer to page 194)

Power supply side current I1 R, S and T line currents Moving-iron type AC ammeter

Power supply side power P1

At R, S and T, and across R-S, S-T and T-R

Electrodynamic type single- phase wattmeter

P1 = W11 + W12 + W13

(3-wattmeter method)

Power supply side power factor Pf1

Calculate after measuring power supply voltage, power supply side current and power supply side power.

100% 3 V1 I1

P1 Pf1 =

Output side voltage V2 Across U-V, V-Wand W-U Rectifier type AC voltmeter (Note 1) (Not moving-iron type)

Difference between phases is within 1% of maximum output voltage.

Output side current I2 U, V and W line currents Moving-iron type AC ammeter (Note 3)

Current should be equal to or less than rated inverter current. Difference between phases is 10% or lower.

Output side power P2 At U, V and W, and across U-V and V-W

Electrodynamic type single- phase wattmeter

P2 = W21 + W22

2-wattmeter method (or 3-wattmeter method)

Output side power factor Pf2

Calculate in similar manner to power supply side power factor.

100% 3 V2 I2

P2 Pf2 =

Converter output Across P-N Moving-coil type (such as tester)

POWER lamp lit 1.35 V1

Maximum 380V (760V) during regenerative operation

Across 2 (+) -5 0 to 5V/0 to 10VDC Across 1 (+) -5 0 to 5V/0 to 10VDCFrequency setting signal Across 4 (+) -5 4 to 20mADC Across 10 (+) -5 5VDCFrequency setting power

supply Across 10E (+) -5 10VDC

5 i

s co

m m

on .

Across FM (+) -SD

Approximately 5VDC at maximum frequency (without frequency meter)

8VDC

T1

T2

Pulse width T1: Adjusted by Pr.900

Pulse cycle T2: Set by Pr.55 (Valid for frequency

monitoring only)

Frequency meter signal

Across AM (+) -5 Approximately 10DVC at maximum frequency (without frequency meter)

Start signal Select signal

Across STF, STR, RH, RM, RL, JOG, RT, AU, STOP, CS (+) -SD

Reset Across RES (+) -SD Output stop Across MRS (+) -SD

Moving-coil type (Tester, etc. may be used) (Internal resistance: 50k or larger)

20 to 30VDC when open. ON voltage: 1VDC or less

SD is

c om

m on

.

Alarm signal Across A-C Across B-C

Moving-coil type (such as tester)

Continuity check (Note 2)

Across A-C: Discontinuity Continuity Across B-C: Continuity Discontinuity

Note 1. A tester will not obtain accurate data. 2. When Pr. 195 "A, B, C terminal function selection" setting is positive logic. 3. Since the carrier frequency of the low acoustic noise type FR-B3-N(H) exceeds 5kHz, do not use

the instrument because overcurrent losses occurring in the metallic parts inside the instrument may increase, leading to burnout. In this case, use an approximate effective value type instrument.

* Values in parentheses indicate those for 400V class.

5

MEMO

6

CHAPTER 6 SPECIFICATIONS

This chapter provides the "specifications" of this product. Always read the instructions before using the equipment.

6.1 Standard Specifications ...........................................194

Chapter 1

Chapter 2

Chapter 3

Chapter 4

Chapter 5

Chapter 6

Chapter 7

6.1 Standard Specifications SPECIFICATIONS

194

6 SPECIFICATIONS6.1 Standard Specifications

6.1.1 Model specifications FR-B series (most suitable for inverter-driven, variable-torque, pressure-resistant, explosion-proof motors)

200V class Type FR-B- 750 (Note 8) 1500 2200 3700 5.5K 7.5K 11K 15K 22K 30K 37K 45K

Variable torque type

0.2 (Note

8) 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 22 30 37 45

Applicable motor capacity (kW) (Note 1) Constant

torque type 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37

Rated capacity (kVA) (Note 2) 1.9 3.1 4.2 6.5 9.2 12.6 17.6 23.3 34 44 55 67

Continuous current (A) 5 8 11 17.5 24 33 46 61 90 115 145 175

Overload capacity (Note 3) 150% 60 s, 200% 0.5 s (inverse-time characteristics)

Voltage (Note 4) Three phase, 200V 50Hz, 220V 60Hz

Maximum value/time 150%/5 s 100%/5 s 20% (Note 5)

O ut

pu t

Regen- erative braking torque Permissible duty 3%ED 2%ED Continuous (Note 5)

Rated input AC voltage, frequency Three phase, 200V 50Hz, 200/220V 60Hz

Permissible AC voltage fluctuation 180 to 220V 50Hz, 180 to 242V 60Hz

Permissible frequency fluctuation 5%

Variable torque type 0.8 1.5 2.5 4.5 5.5 9 12 17 20 28 41 52 66 80

Po w

er s

up pl

y

Power supply system capacity (kVA) (Note 6) Constant

torque type 1.5 2.2 4.5 5.5 9 12 17 20 28 34 41 52 66

Protective structure (JEM 1030) Enclosed type (IP20) (Note 7) Open type (IP00) Cooling system Self-cooling Forced air cooling Approx. weight (kg), with DU 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 6.0 6.0 8.0 13.0 13.0 30.0 40.0 40.0

SPECIFICATIONS

195

400V class Type FR-B- 750 1500 2200 3700 7.5K 15K 22K 37K (Note 8) 55K

Variable torque type

0.2 (Note

8) 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 22 30 37 45

Applicable motor capacity (kW) (Note 1) Constant

torque type 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37

Rated capacity (kVA) (Note 2) 1.9 3 4.6 6.9 13 23.6 32.8 54 84

Continuous current (A) 2.5 4 6 9 17 31 43 71 110

Overload capacity (Note 3) 150% 60 s 200% 0.5 s (inverse-time characteristics)

Voltage (Note 4) Three phase, 400V 50Hz, 440V 60Hz

Maximum value/time 100%/5 s 20% (Note 5)

O ut

pu t

Regen- erative braking torque Permissible duty 2%ED Continuous (Note 5)

Rated input AC voltage, frequency Three phase, 400V 50Hz, 400/440V 60Hz

Permissible AC voltage fluctuation 360 to 440V 50Hz, 360 to 484V 60Hz

Permissible frequency fluctuation 5%

Variable torque type 0.8 1.5 2.5 4.5 5.5 9 12 17 20 28 41 52 66 80

Po w

er s

up pl

y

Power supply system capacity (kVA) (Note 6) Constant

torque type 1.5 4.5 5.5 9 12 17 20 28 34 41 52 66

Protective structure (JEM 1030) Enclosed type (IP20) (Note 7) Open type (IP00) Cooling system Self-cooling Forced air cooling Approx. weight (kg), with DU 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 6.0 13.0 13.0 35.0 36.0

Note: 1. The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable when Mitsubishi 4-pole pressure-resistant, explosion-proof motor is used. The motor is the X(E)F-(N)E series.

2. The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 220V for 200V class and 440V for 400V class.

3. The overload capacity indicated in % is the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated current. For repeated duty, allow time for the inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load.

4. The maximum output voltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage may be set as desired below the power supply voltage.

5. The torque indicated is the average value for deceleration from 60Hz to a stop and varies with motor loss.

6. The power supply capacity changes with the values of the power supply side inverter impedances (including those of the input reactor and cables).

7. The open type (IP00) is used when the inboard option is fitted after removal of the option wiring port cover.

8. When the inverter is used with this motor, the function of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure is limited. (Refer to Pr.75)

6

SPECIFICATIONS

196

6.1.2 Specifications common to the FR-B series

Control system Sine-wave PWM control (V/F constant control) Output frequency range 0.2 to 120Hz (22K or less), 0.2 to 60Hz (30K or more)

Analog input 0.015Hz/60Hz (terminal 2 input: 12 bits/0 to 10V, 11 bits/0 to 5V, terminal 1 input: 12 bits/-10 to +10V, 11 bits/-5 to +5V)

Frequency setting resolution Digital input 0.01Hz

Frequency accuracy Within 0.2% of maximum output frequency (25C 10C) for analog input, within 0.01% of set output frequency for digital input

Voltage/frequency characteristic Constant torque up to 60Hz, constant output between 60Hz and maximum. frequency (fixed)

Acceleration/deceleration time setting

0 to 3600 s (acceleration and deceleration can be set individually), linear or S-pattern acceleration/deceleration mode can be selected.

DC dynamic brake Whether 3Hz (fixed) operation is performed or not can be selected.

C on

tro l s

pe ci

fic at

io ns

Stall prevention operation level Operation current level can be set (0 to 200% variable), presence or absence can be selected.

Analog input 0 to 5VDC, 0 to 10VDC, 0 to 10VDC, 4 to 20mADCFrequency setting signal Digital input 3-digit BCD or 12-bit binary using operation panel or parameter unit

(when the FR-A5AX option is used)

Start signal Forward and reverse rotation, start signal automatic self-holding input (3-wire input) can be selected.

Multi-speed selection Up to 15 speeds can be selected. (Each speed can be set between 0 and the maximum frequency, running speed can be changed during operation from the PU (FR-DU04/FR-PU04).)

Second, third acceleration/ deceleration time selection

0 to 3600 s (up to three different accelerations and decelerations can be set individually.)

Jog operation selection Provided with jog operation mode select terminal (Note 1)

Current input selection Input of frequency setting signal 4 to 20mADC (terminal 4) is selected. Output stop Instantaneous shut-off of inverter output (frequency, voltage)

In pu

t s ig

na ls

Alarm reset Alarm retained at the activation of protective function is reset.

Operation functions

Maximum/minimum frequency setting, frequency jump operation, external thermal relay input selection, polarity reversible operation, automatic restart operation after instantaneous power failure, forward/reverse rotation prevention, operation mode selection, PID control, programmed operation, computer link operation (RS-485)

Operating status

5 different signals can be selected from inverter running, up to frequency, instantaneous power failure (undervoltage), frequency detection, second frequency detection, third frequency detection, during program mode operation, during PU operation, overload alarm, electronic overcurrent protection pre-alarm, zero current detection, output current detection, PID lower limit, PID upper limit, PID forward/reverse rotation, operation ready, fan fault and fin overheat pre-alarm minor fault. Open collector output.

Alarm (inverter trip) Contact output...1c contact (230VAC 0.3A, 30VDC 0.3A) Open collector...alarm code (4 bit) output

O pe

ra tio

na l s

pe ci

fic at

io ns

O ut

pu t s

ig na

ls

For meter

1 signal can be selected from output frequency, motor current (steady or peak value), output voltage, frequency setting, running speed, converter output voltage (steady or peak value), electronic overcurrent protection load factor, input power, output power, load meter, and motor exciting current. Pulse train output (1440 pulses/s/full scale) and analog output (0 to 10VDC).

Operating status

Selection can be made from output frequency, motor current (steady or peak value), output voltage, frequency setting, running speed, overload, converter output voltage (steady or peak value), electronic overcurrent protection load factor, input power, output power, load meter, motor exciting current, cumulative energization time, actual operation time, watt-hour meter, regenerative brake duty and motor load factor.

PU (FR-DU04 /FR-PU04)

Alarm definition

Alarm definition is displayed when protective function is activated. 8 alarm definitions are stored. (Four alarm definitions are only displayed on the operation panel.)

Operating status

Input terminal signal states, output terminal signal states, option fitting status, terminal assignment status

Alarm definition

Output voltage/current/frequency/cumulative energization time immediately before protective function is activated

D is

pl ay

Additional display on parameter unit (FR-PU04) only Interactive

guidance Operation guide and troubleshooting by help function

SPECIFICATIONS

197

Protective/alarm functions

Overcurrent shut-off (during acceleration, deceleration, constant speed), regenerative overvoltage shut-off, undervoltage, instantaneous power failure, overload shut-off (electronic overcurrent protection), brake transistor alarm (Note 2), ground fault current, output short circuit, main circuit device overheat, stall prevention, overload alarm, brake resistor overheat protection, fin overheat, fan fault, option fault, parameter error, PU disconnection, retry count exceeded, output phase failure, CPU error, 24VDC power output short circuit, operation panel power supply short circuit

Ambient temperature -10C to +50C (non-freezing) (-10C to +40C with FR-A5CV attachment)

Ambient humidity 90%RH or less (non-condensing) Storage temperature (Note 3) -20C to +65C

Ambience Indoors. (No corrosive and flammable gases, oil mist, dust and dirt.)En vi

ro nm

en t

Altitude, vibration Maximum 1000m above sea level for standard operation. 5.9m/s2 or less (conforming to JIS C0911)

Note: 1. Jog operation may also be performed from the operation panel or parameter unit. 2. Not provided for the FR-B-11K to 45K (200V class) and FR-B-15K to 55K (400V class) which do

not have a built-in brake circuit. 3. Temperature applicable for a short period in transit, etc.

6.1.3 Model specifications

FR-B3 series (most suitable for inverter-driven, constant-torque, pressure-resistant, explosion-proof motors) 200V class Type FR-B3-(N)- 400 750 1500 2200 3700 5.5K 7.5K 11K 15K 18.5K 22K 30K 37K

Applicable motor capacity (Note 1)

kW 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37

Rated capacity (kVA) (Note 2) 1.1 1.9 3.1 4.2 6.7 9.2 12.6 17.6 23.3 29 34 44 55

Continuous current (A) 3 5 8 11 17 24 33 46 61 76 90 115 145

Overload capacity (Note 3) 150% 60 seconds, 200% 0.5 seconds (inverse-time characteristics)

Voltage Output according to pressure-resistant, explosion-proof motor Maximum value/time 150% 5 seconds 100% 5 seconds 20% (Note 4)

O ut

pu t

Regen- erative braking torque

Permissi- ble duty 3%ED 2%ED Continuous (Note 4)

Rated input AC voltage, frequency Three phase, 200V 50Hz, 200/220V 60Hz

Permissible AC voltage fluctuation 180 to 220V 50Hz, 180 to 242V 60Hz

Permissible frequency fluctuation 5%

Po w

er s

up pl

y

Power supply system capacity (kVA) (Note 5)

1.5 2.5 4.5 5.5 9 12 17 20 28 34 41 52 66

Protective structure (JEM 1030) Enclosed type (IP20) (Note 6) Open type

(IP00) Cooling system Self-cooling Forced air cooling Approx. weight (kg), with DU 2.0 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 6.0 6.0 8.0 13.0 13.0 13.0 30.0 40.0

6

SPECIFICATIONS

198

400V class Type FR-B3-(N)H- 400 750 1500 2200 3700 5.5K 7.5K 11K 15K 18.5 K 22K 30K 37K

Applicable motor capacity (Note 1)

kW 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37

Rated capacity (kVA) (Note 2) 1.1 1.9 3 4.6 6.9 9.1 13 17.5 23.6 29 32.8 43.4 54

Continuous current (A) 1.5 2.5 4 6 9 12 17 23 31 38 43 57 71 Overload capacity (Note 3) 150% 60 seconds, 200% 0.5 seconds (inverse-time characteristics)

Voltage Output according to pressure-resistant, explosion-proof motor Maximum value/time 100% 5 seconds 20% (Note 4)

O ut

pu t

Regen- erative braking torque

Permissi-ble duty 2%ED Continuous (Note 4)

Rated input AC voltage, frequency Three phase, 400V/440V 60Hz

Permissible AC voltage fluctuation 360 to 440V 50Hz, 360 to 484V 60Hz

Permissible frequency fluctuation 5%

Po w

er s

up pl

y

Power supply system capacity (kVA) (Note 5)

1.5 2.5 4.5 5.5 9 12 17 20 28 34 41 52 66

Protective structure (JEM 1030) Enclosed type (IP20) (Note 6) Open type

(IP00) Cooling system Self-cooling Forced air cooling Approx. weight (kg), with DU 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 6.0 6.0 13.0 13.0 13.0 13.0 24.0 35.0

Note: 1. The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable when the Mitsubishi 4-pole pressure-resistant, explosion-proof motor is used. The motor is the X(E)F-(N)ECA-2 series for the FR-B3-(H)400 to 37K, and the X(E)F-(N)ECA-1 series for the FR-B3-N(H)400 to 37K.

2. The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 220V for 200V class and 440V for 400V class.

3. The overload capacity indicated in % is the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated current. For repeated duty, allow time for the inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load.

4. The torque indicated is the average value for deceleration from 60Hz to a stop and varies with motor loss.

5. The power supply capacity changes with the values of the power supply side inverter impedances (including those of the input reactor and cables).

6. The open type (IP00) is used when the inboard option is fitted after removal of the option wiring port cover.

SPECIFICATIONS

199

6.1.4 Specifications common to the FR-B3 series

Control system Soft-PWM control/high carrier frequency PWM control (advanced magnetic flux vector control can be selected)

Output frequency range 0.2 to 400Hz (may be used with the maximum frequency being restricted depending on the motor)

Analog input 0.015Hz/60Hz (terminal 2 input: 12 bits/0 to 10V, 11 bits/0 to 5V, terminal 1 input: 12 bits/10 to +10V, 11 bits/5 to +5V)

Frequency setting resolution Digital input 0.01Hz

Frequency accuracy Within 0.2% of maximum output frequency (25C 10C for analog input, within 0.01% of set output frequency for digital input

Voltage/frequency characteristic

Constant torque up to 60Hz, constant output from 60Hz to maximum frequency (when rated motor frequency is set to 60Hz)

Starting torque 150%: At 0.5Hz (for advanced magnetic flux vector control) Acceleration/deceleration time setting

0 to 3600 s (acceleration and deceleration can be set individually), linear or S-pattern acceleration/deceleration mode can be selected.

DC dynamic brake Operation frequency (0 to 120Hz), operation time (0 to 10 s), voltage (0 to 30%) variable

C on

tro l s

pe ci

fic at

io ns

Stall prevention operation level Operation current level can be set (0 to 200% variable), presence or absence can be selected.

Analog input 0 to 5VDC, 0 to 10VDC, 0 to 10VDC, 4 to 20mADCFrequency setting signal Digital input 3-digit BCD or 12-bit binary using operation panel or parameter unit

(when the FR-A5AX option is used)

Start signal Forward and reverse rotation, start signal automatic self-holding input (3-wire input) can be selected.

Multi-speed selection Up to 15 speeds can be selected [each speed can be set between 0 and 400Hz (may be used with the maximum frequency being restricted depending on the motor), running speed can be changed during operation from the PU (FR-DU04/FR-PU04)]

Second, third acceleration/ deceleration time selection

0 to 3600 seconds (up to three different accelerations and decelerations can be set individually.)

Jog operation selection Provided with jog operation mode select terminal (Note 1)

Current input selection Input of frequency setting signal 4 to 20mADC (terminal 4) is selected. Output stop Instantaneous shut-off of inverter output (frequency, voltage)

In pu

t s ig

na ls

Alarm reset Alarm retained at the activation of protective function is reset.

Operation functions

Maximum/minimum frequency setting, frequency jump operation, external thermal relay input selection, polarity reversible operation, automatic restart operation after instantaneous power failure, commercial power supply-inverter switch-over operation, forward/reverse rotation prevention, slip compensation, operation mode selection, offline auto tuning function, online auto tuning function, PID control, programmed operation, computer link operation (RS-485)

Operating status

5 different signals can be selected from inverter running, up to frequency, instantaneous power failure (undervoltage), frequency detection, second frequency detection, third frequency detection, during program mode operation, during PU operation, overload alarm, regenerative brake pre-alarm, electronic overcurrent protection pre-alarm, zero current detection, output current detection, PID lower limit, PID upper limit, PID forward/reverse rotation, commercial power supply-inverter switch-over MC1, 2, 3, operation ready, brake release request, fan fault and fin overheat pre-alarm minor fault. Open collector output.

Alarm (inverter trip) Contact output...change-over contact (230VAC 0.3A, 30VDC 0.3A) Open collector...alarm code (4 bit) output

O pe

ra tio

na l s

pe ci

fic at

io ns

O ut

pu t s

ig na

ls

For meter

1 signal can be selected from output frequency, motor current (steady or peak value), output voltage, frequency setting, running speed, motor torque, converter output voltage (steady or peak value), regenerative brake duty, electronic overcurrent protection load factor, input power, output power, load meter, and motor exciting current. Pulse train output (1440 pulses/s/full scale) and analog output (0 to 10VDC).

Operating status

Selection can be made from output frequency, motor current (steady or peak value), output voltage, frequency setting, running speed, motor torque, overload, converter output voltage (steady or peak value), electronic overcurrent protection load factor, input power, output power, load meter, motor exciting current, cumulative energization time, actual operation time, watt-hour meter, regenerative brake duty and motor load factor.

PU (FR-DU04 /FR-PU04)

Alarm definition

Alarm definition is displayed when protective function is activated. 8 alarm definitions are stored. (Four alarm definitions are only displayed on the operation panel.)

Operating status

Input terminal signal states, output terminal signal states, option fitting status, terminal assignment status

Alarm definition

Output voltage/current/frequency/cumulative energization time immediately before protective function is activated

D is

pl ay

Additional display on parameter unit (FR-PU04) only Interactive

guidance Operation guide and troubleshooting by help function

6

SPECIFICATIONS

200

Protective/alarm functions

Overcurrent shut-off (during acceleration, deceleration, constant speed), regenerative overvoltage shut-off, undervoltage, instantaneous power failure, overload shut-off (electronic overcurrent protection), brake transistor alarm (Note 2), ground fault current, output short circuit, main circuit device overheat, stall prevention, overload alarm, brake resistor overheat protection, fin overheat, fan fault, option fault, parameter error, PU disconnection, retry count exceeded, output phase failure, CPU error, 24VDC power output short circuit, operation panel power supply short circuit

Ambient temperature Constant torque: -10C to +50C (non-freezing) (-10C to +40C with FR-A5CV attachment)

Ambient humidity 90%RH or less (non-condensing) Storage temperature (Note 3) 20C to +65C Ambience Indoors. (No corrosive and flammable gases, oil mist, dust and dirt.)

En vi

ro nm

en t

Altitude, vibration Maximum 1000m above sea level for standard operation. After that derate by 3% for every extra 500m up to 2500m (91%). 5.9m/s2 or less (conforming to JIS C0911)

Note: 1. Jog operation may also be performed from the operation panel or parameter unit. 2. Not provided for the FR-B3-(N)11K to 37K and FR-B3-(N)H11K to 37K which do not have a built-

in brake circuit. 3. Temperature applicable for a short period in transit, etc.

SPECIFICATIONS

201

6.1.5 Outline drawings

FR-B-750 (200V class), FR-B3-(N)400, 750

Inverter Type D

FR-B-750 125

FR-B3-(N)400 110

FR-B3-(N)750 125

D110 26

0

95 6

5

24 5

2-6 hole

(Unit: mm)

FR-B-1500 to 3700 (200V class), FR-B3-(N)1500 to 3700

FR-B-750 to 3700 (400V class), FR-B3-(N)H400 to 3700

150

26 0

140

143

49.5

125 6

5 2-6 hole

24 5

Note: The cooling fan is not provided for the FR-B-750, 1500 (400V class) and FR-B3-(N)H400 to 1500.

(Unit: mm)

6

SPECIFICATIONS

202

FR-B-5.5K, 7.5K, 11K (200V class), FR-B3-(N)5.5K to 11K

FR-B-7.5K (400V class), FR-B3-(N)H5.5K, 7.5K

200V class Inverter Type H H1 D D1

FR-B-5.5K, FR-B3-(N)5.5K 260 245 170 84

FR-B-7.5K, FR-B3-(N)7.5K 260 245 170 84

FR-B-11K, FR-B3-(N)11K 300 285 190 101.5

400V class Inverter Type H H1 D D1

FR-B-7.5K, FR-B3-(N)H 5.5K, 7.5K

260 245 170 84

220

H

D

211

195 6

H 1

10.5 2-6 hole

D1

(Unit: mm)

FR-B-15K, 22K (200V class), FR-B3-(N)15K to 22K

FR-B-15K, 22K (400V class), FR-B3-(N)H11K to 22K

250

40 0

190

242

230

38 0101.5

10.5

10

2-10 hole

(Unit: mm)

SPECIFICATIONS

203

FR-B-30K, 37K, 45K (200V class), FR-B3-(N)30K to 37K

FR-B-37K, 55K (400V class), FR-B3-(N)H30K to 37K

D1

C W1

H

W D 3.2

H 1

2-C hole

W 2

H 2

200V class Inverter Type W W1 W2 H H1 H2 D D1 C

FR-B-30K, FR-B3-(N)30K 340 270 320 550 530 10 195 71.5 10

FR-B-37K, FR-B3-(N)37K 450 380 430 550 525 15 250 154 12

FR-B-45K 450 380 430 550 525 15 250 154 12

400V class Inverter Type W W1 W2 H H1 H2 D D1 C

FR-B3-(N)H30K 340 270 320 550 530 10 195 71.5 10 FR-B-37K,

FR-B3-(N)H37K 450 380 430 550 525 15 250 154 12

FR-B-55K 450 380 430 550 525 15 250 154 12

(Unit: mm)

6

SPECIFICATIONS

204

Operation panel (FR-DU04)

19 .7

5

3.25

3. 5

16.5 23.75

46 .5

17

54

81 .5

72 15 10.5

20

54

16 .5

46 .5

24

2-M3 threads Effective depth 4.5

2-4 hole

(Unit: mm)

Choose the mounting screws whose length will not exceed the effective depth of the mounting threads.

Parameter unit (FR-PU04)

40

23.75

11.75

81 .5

1.25

1. 5

13

17

16.5 1.

5

12 5

72 15 10.5

18 .5

40

80

48

5-M3 threads

24

13

2021 .5

14 .5

Effective depth 4.5

5-4 hole

(Unit: mm)

Choose the mounting screws whose length will not exceed the effective depth of the mounting threads.

7

CHAPTER 7 OPTIONS

This chapter describes the "options" of this product. Always read the instructions before using the equipment.

7.1 Option List................................................................205

Chapter 1

Chapter 2

Chapter 3

Chapter 4

Chapter 5

Chapter 6

Chapter 7

7.1 Option List OPTIONS

205

7 OPTIONS7.1 Option List

7.1.1 Stand-alone options

Name Type Application, Specifications, etc. Applicable Inverter

Parameter unit (8 languages) FR-PU04 Interactive parameter unit using LCD display (For use in Japanese,

English, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Swedish and Finnish) Parameter unit connection cable FR-CB2 Cable for connection of the operation panel or parameter unit.

Common to all models

Cooling fin protrusion attachment FR-A5CN Used to place only the heat generating section of the inverter in

the back of the control box.

1.5K to 55K, according to capacity

totally enclosed structure specification attachment

FR-A5CV By installing this option, the inverter meets the totally enclosed structure specifications (IP40).

0.75K to 22K, according to capacity

Attachment for conduit connection FR-A5FN Used to connect a conduit directly.

30K to 55K, according to capacity

Installation interchange attachment FR-A5AT Mounting plate used to make the mounting dimensions identical to

those of the FR-B series.

0.75K to 55K, according to capacity

EMC Directive compatible noise filer (Note 3)

SF Noise filer conforming to the EMC Directive (EN50081-2)

0.75K to 55K, according to capacity

Power factor improving DC reactor

FR-BEL-(H) (Note 1)

Used to improve the inverter input power factor (overall power factor about 95%) and cooperate with the power supply.

0.75K to 55K, according to capacity

Power factor improving AC reactor

FR-BAL-(H) (Note 1)

Used to improve the inverter input power factor (overall power factor about 90%) and cooperate with the power supply.

0.75K to 55K, according to capacity

Radio noise filter FR-BIF-(H) (Note 1) For radio noise reduction

FR-BSF01 For line noise reduction (applies to small capacities of 3.7kW or less)Line noise filter

FR-BLF For line noise reduction

Common to all models

BU brake unit (Note 3) BU-1500 to 15K, H7.5K to H30K

Used to improve the braking capability of the inverter (for high- inertia load or negative load).

Brake unit (Note 3) FR-BU-15K to 55K, H15K to H55K

Resistor unit (Note 3) FR-BR-15K to 55K, H15K to H55K

Used to improve the braking capability of the inverter (for high- inertia load or negative load). Use the brake unit and resistor unit together.

Power return converter (Note 3)

FR-RC-15K to 55K, H15K to H55K

High-function brake unit which can return motor-generated braking energy to the power supply.

According to capacity

Manual controller FR-AX (Note 4) For independent operation. With frequency meter, frequency setting potentiometer and start switch.

DC tach. follower FR-AL (Note 4) For joint operation using external signals. (0 to 5VDC, 0 to 10VDC) (1VA) (Note 2)

Three speed selector FR-AT (Note 4) For three-speed (high, middle, low) switching operation. (1.5VA)

Motorized speed setter FR-FK (Note 4) For remote operation. Allows operation to be controlled from several places. (5VA)

Ratio setter FR-FH (Note 4) For ratio control. Allows ratios to be set to five inverters. (3VA)

Common to all models

OPTIONS

206

Name Type Application, Specifications, etc. Applicable Inverter

PG follower (Note 4) FR-FP For follow-up operation using the signal of a pilot generator (PG). (2VA)

Master controller (Note 4) FR-FG For parallel operation of several (up to 35) inverters. (5VA)

Soft starter (Note 4) FR-FC For soft start and stop. Allows parallel operation and acceleration/deceleration. (3VA)

Deviation detector (Note 4) FR-FD For synchronous operation. Used with a deviation sensor and synchro. (5VA)

Preamplifier (Note 4) FR-FA Can be used as A/V conversion or operational amplifier. (3VA)

Pilot generator (Note 4) QVAH-10 For follow-up operation. 70/35VAC 500Hz (at 2500r/min)

Deviation sensor (Note 4) YVGC-500W-NS For synchronous operation (mechanical deviation detection). Output 90VAC/90

Frequency setting potentiometer (Note 4) WA2W 1k For frequency setting. Wire-wound type. 2W 1K

B characteristic.

Frequency meter (Note 4) YM206RI 1mA Dedicated frequency meter (up to 120Hz scale). Moving- coil DC ammeter.

Calibration resistor (Note 4) RV24YN 10k For calibration of the frequency meter. Carbon-film type. B characteristic.

Common to all models

Note: 1. "H" in the type code indicates 400V class. Power supply specifications of FR series controllers and setters: 200VAC 50Hz, 200V/220VAC 60Hz, 115VAC 60Hz.

2. Rated power consumption 3. When using this option, the explosion-proof certification test is required separately. 4. Options available in Japan only.

7

OPTIONS

207

7.1.2 Inboard dedicated options

Inboard options Name Type Function

12-bit digital input FR-A5AX Input interface used to set the inverter frequency accurately using external 3-digit BCD or

12-bit binary-coded digital signals. Gains and offsets can also be adjusted.

Digital output Among 21 standard output signals of the inverter, this option outputs any 7 selected signals from open collector output terminals.

Extension analog output

FR-A5AY Outputs extra 16 signals which can be monitored on the FM and AM terminals such as output frequency, output voltage and output current, etc.

20mADC or 5V (10V) DC meter can be connected.

Relay output FR-A5AR Among 21 standard output signals of the inverter, this option outputs any 3 selected signals from relay contact output terminals.

Orientation, PLG output (Note 3) (Note 4)

Used with a position detector (pulse encoder) installed on a machine tool spindle to stop the spindle in position (orientation control).

The motor speed is detected by the pulse encoder and this detection signal is fed back to the inverter to automatically compensate for speed variation. Hence, the motor speed can be kept constant if load variation occurs.

The current spindle position and actual motor speed can be monitored on the operation panel or parameter unit.

Pulse train input

FR-A5AP

A pulse train signal can be used to enter the speed command to the inverter.

Computer link Operation/monitoring/parameter change of the inverter can be performed under the control

of a user program from a computer, e.g. personal computer or FA controller, connected by a communication cable.

Relay output

FR-A5NR Any one-output signal can be selected from among the standard output signals of the

inverter and output as a relay contact (1c contact) signal.

Profibus DP FR-A5NP Operation/monitoring/parameter change of the inverter can be performed from a computer or PLC.

Device Net TM FR-A5ND Operation/monitoring/parameter change of the inverter can be performed from a computer or PLC.

CC-Link (Note 2) FR-A5NC Operation/monitoring/parameter change of the inverter can be performed from a PLC.

C om

m un

ic at

io n

Modbus Plus FR-A5NM Operation/monitoring/parameter change of the inverter can be performed from a computer or PLC.

Note: 1. Three inboard options may be mounted at the same time (the number of the same options mountable is only one, and only one of the communication options may be mounted.)

2. CC-Link stands for Control & Communication Link. 3. The FR-A5AX (12-bit digital input) is required for orientation control. 4. When using PLG feedback in this option, the explosion-proof certification test is required

separately. Also in the FR-B series, magnetic flux vector control operation cannot be performed.

8

APPENDICES

This chapter provides the "appendices" for use of this product. Always read the instructions before using the equipment.

Appendix 1 Data Code List ..................................................208

APPENDIX 1 Data Code List APPENDICES

208

APPENDICESAppendix 1 Data Code List

APPENDIX Data CodesFunc-

tion Parameter Number Name Read Write Link Parameter Extension

Setting (Data code 7F/FF) 1 Maximum frequency 01 81 0 2 Minimum frequency 02 82 0 4 Multi-speed setting (high speed) 04 84 0 5 Multi-speed setting (middle speed) 05 85 0 6 Multi-speed setting (low speed) 06 86 0 7 Acceleration time 07 87 0 8 Deceleration time 08 88 0Ba

si c

fu nc

tio ns

9 Electronic thermal O/L relay 09 89 0 10 DC injection brake operation frequency 0A 8A 0 11 DC injection brake operation time 0B 8B 0 12 DC injection brake voltage 0C 8C 0 13 Starting frequency 0D 8D 0 15 Jog frequency 0F 8F 0 16 Jog acceleration/deceleration time 10 90 0 17 MRS input selection 11 91 0 18 High-speed maximum frequency 12 92 0 20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency 14 94 0 21 Acceleration/deceleration time increments 15 95 0 22 Stall prevention operation level 16 96 0

23 Stall prevention operation level compensation factor at double speed 17 97 0

24 Multi-speed setting (speed 4) 18 98 0 25 Multi-speed setting (speed 5) 19 99 0 26 Multi-speed setting (speed 6) 1A 9A 0 27 Multi-speed setting (speed 7) 1B 9B 0 28 Multi-speed input compensation 1C 9C 0 29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern 1D 9D 0 30 Regenerative function selection 1E 9E 0 31 Frequency jump 1A 1F 9F 0 32 Frequency jump 1B 20 A0 0 33 Frequency jump 2A 21 A1 0 34 Frequency jump 2B 22 A2 0 35 Frequency jump 3A 23 A3 0 36 Frequency jump 3B 24 A4 0

St an

da rd

o pe

ra tio

n fu

nc tio

ns

37 Speed display 25 A5 0 41 Up-to-frequency sensitivity 29 A9 0

42 Output frequency detection 2A AA 0

O ut

pu t

te rm

in al

fu nc

tio ns

43 Output frequency detection for reverse rotation 2B AB 0 44 Second acceleration/deceleration time 2C AC 0 45 Second deceleration time 2D AD 0 48 Second stall prevention operation current 30 B0 0 49 Second stall prevention operation frequency 31 B1 0Se

co nd

fu nc

tio ns

50 Second output frequency detection 32 B2 0 52 DU/PU main display data selection 34 B4 0 53 PU level display data selection 35 B5 0 54 FM terminal function selection 36 B6 0 55 Frequency monitoring reference 37 B7 0D

is pl

ay fu

nc tio

ns

56 Current monitoring reference 38 B8 0

57 Restart coasting time 39 B9 0

Au to

m at

ic re

st ar

t fu

nc tio

ns

58 Restart cushion time 3A BA 0

APPENDICES

209

Data CodesFunc- tion

Parameter Number Name Read Write Link Parameter Extension

Setting (Data code 7F/FF)

Ad di

tio na

l fu

nc tio

n

59 Remote setting function selection 3B BB 0

60 Intelligent mode selection 3C BC 0 61 Reference I for intelligent mode 3D BD 0 62 Ref. I for intelligent mode accel 3E BE 0 63 Ref. I for intelligent mode decel 3F BF 0 64 Starting frequency for elevator mode 40 C0 0 65 Retry selection 41 C1 0

66 Stall prevention operation level reduction starting frequency 42 C2 0

67 Number of retries at alarm occurrence 43 C3 0 68 Retry waiting time 44 C4 0 69 Retry count display erasure 45 C5 0 70 Special regenerative brake duty 46 C6 0 71 Applied motor 47 C7 0 72 PWM frequency selection 48 C8 0 73 0-5V/0-10V selection 49 C9 0 74 Filter time constant 4A CA 0

75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection 4B CB 0

76 Alarm code output selection 4C CC 0 77 Parameter write disable selection 4D None 0 78 Reverse rotation prevention selection 4E CE 0

O pe

ra tio

n se

le ct

io n

fu nc

tio ns

79 Operation mode selection 4F None 0 80 Motor capacity 50 D0 0 81 Number of motor poles 51 D1 0 82 Motor exciting current 52 D2 0 83 Rated motor voltage 53 D3 0 84 Rated motor frequency 54 D4 0 89 Speed control gain 59 D9 0 90 Motor constant (R1) 5A DA 0 91 Motor constant (R2) 5B DB 0 92 Motor constant (L1) 5C DC 0 93 Motor constant (L2) 5D DD 0 94 Motor constant (X) 5E DE 0

Ad va

nc ed

m ag

ne tic

fl ux

ve ct

or co

nt ro

l

96 Auto tuning setting/status 60 E0 0 110 Third acceleration/deceleration time 0A 8A 1 111 Third deceleration time 0B 8B 1 114 Third stall prevention operation current 0E 8E 1 115 Third stall prevention operation frequency 0F 8F 1Th

ird fu

nc tio

ns

116 Third output frequency detection 10 90 1

APPENDICES

210

Data CodesFunc- tion

Parameter Number Name Read Write Link Parameter Extension

Setting (Data code 7F/FF) 117 Station number 11 91 1 118 Communication speed 12 92 1 119 Stop bit length 13 93 1 120 Parity check presence/absence 14 94 1 121 Number of communication retries 15 95 1 122 Communication check time interval 16 96 1 123 Waiting time setting 17 97 1C

om m

un ic

at io

n fu

nc tio

ns

124 CRLF presence/absence selection 18 98 1 128 PID action selection 1C 9C 1 129 PID proportional band 1D 9D 1 130 PID integral time 1E 9E 1 131 Upper limit 1F 9F 1 132 Lower limit 20 A0 1 133 PID action set point for PU operation 21 A1 1PI

D c

on tro

l

134 PID differential time 22 A2 1

135 Commercial power supply-inverter switch-over sequence output terminal selection 23 A3 1

136 MC switch-over interlock time 24 A4 1 137 Start waiting time 25 A5 1

138 Commercial power supply-inverter switch-over selection at alarm occurrence 26 A6 1

C om

m er

ci al

p ow

er su

pp ly

-in ve

rte r

sw itc

h- ov

er

139 Automatic inverter-commercial power supply switch-over frequency 27 A7 1

140 Backlash acceleration stopping frequency 28 A8 1 141 Backlash acceleration stopping time 29 A9 1 142 Backlash deceleration stopping frequency 2A AA 1

Ba ck

la sh

143 Backlash deceleration stopping time 2B AB 1 144 Speed setting switch-over 2C AC 1

D is

- pl

ay

145 Parameter unit language switch-over 2D AD 1

148 Stall prevention level at 0V input 30 B0 1

Ad di

t- io

na l

fu nc

tio ns

149 Stall prevention level at 10V input 31 B1 1

150 Output current detection level 32 B2 1 151 Output current detection period 33 B3 1 152 Zero current detection level 34 B4 1

C ur

re nt

de te

ct io

n

153 Zero current detection period 35 B5 1

154 Voltage reduction selection during stall prevention operation 36 B6 1

155 RT signal activated condition 37 B7 1 156 Stall prevention operation selection 38 B8 1 157 OL signal waiting time 39 B9 1

Su b

fu nc

tio ns

158 AM terminal function selection 3A BA 1

Ad di

tio na

l fu

nc tio

n

160 User group read selection 00 80 2

162 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure selection 02 82 2

163 First cushion time for restart 03 83 2 164 First cushion voltage for restart 04 84 2

R es

ta rt

af te

r in

st an

ta ne

ou s

po w

er fa

ilu re

165 Restart stall prevention operation level 05 85 2

170 Watt-hour meter clear 0A 8A 2

In iti

al m

on ito

r

171 Actual operation hour meter clear 0B 8B 2

173 User group 1 registration 0D 8D 2 174 User group 1 deletion 0E 8E 2 175 User group 2 registration 0F 8F 2U

se r

fu nc

tio ns

176 User group 2 deletion 10 90 2

APPENDICES

211

Data CodesFunc- tion

Parameter Number Name Read Write Link Parameter Extension

Setting (Data code 7F/FF) 180 RL terminal function selection 14 94 2 181 RM terminal function selection 15 95 2 182 RH terminal function selection 16 96 2 183 RT terminal function selection 17 97 2 184 AU terminal function selection 18 98 2 185 JOG terminal function selection 19 99 2 186 CS terminal function selection 1A 9A 2 190 RUN terminal function selection 1E 9E 2 191 SU terminal function selection 1F 9F 2 192 IPF terminal function selection 20 A0 2 193 OL terminal function selection 21 A1 2 194 FU terminal function selection 22 A2 2Te

rm in

al a

ss ig

nm en

t f un

ct io

ns

195 A, B, C terminal function selection 23 A3 2

Ad di

tio na

l fu

nc tio

n

199 User's initial value setting 27 A7 2

200 Programmed operation minute/second selection 3C BC 1

201 Program setting 1 3D BD 1 202 Program setting 1 3E BE 1 203 Program setting 1 3F BF 1 204 Program setting 1 40 C0 1 205 Program setting 1 41 C1 1 206 Program setting 1 42 C2 1 207 Program setting 1 43 C3 1 208 Program setting 1 44 C4 1 209 Program setting 1 45 C5 1 210 Program setting 1 46 C6 1 211 Program setting 2 47 C7 1 212 Program setting 2 48 C8 1 213 Program setting 2 49 C9 1 214 Program setting 2 4A CA 1 215 Program setting 2 4B CB 1 216 Program setting 2 4C CC 1 217 Program setting 2 4D CD 1 218 Program setting 2 4E CE 1 219 Program setting 2 4F CF 1 220 Program setting 2 50 D0 1 221 Program setting 3 51 D1 1 222 Program setting 3 52 D2 1 223 Program setting 3 53 D3 1 224 Program setting 3 54 D4 1 225 Program setting 3 55 D5 1 226 Program setting 3 56 D6 1 227 Program setting 3 57 D7 1 228 Program setting 3 58 D8 1 229 Program setting 3 59 D9 1 230 Program setting 3 5A DA 1

Pr og

ra m

m ed

o pe

ra tio

n

231 Timer setting 5B DB 1 232 Multi-speed setting (speed 8) 28 A8 2 233 Multi-speed setting (speed 9) 29 A9 2 234 Multi-speed setting (speed 10) 2A AA 2 235 Multi-speed setting (speed 11) 2B AB 2 236 Multi-speed setting (speed 12) 2C AC 2 237 Multi-speed setting (speed 13) 2D AD 2 238 Multi-speed setting (speed 14) 2E AE 2

M ul

ti- sp

ee d

op er

at io

n

239 Multi-speed setting (speed 15) 2F AF 2

APPENDICES

212

Data CodesFunc- tion

Parameter Number Name Read Write Link Parameter Extension

Setting (Data code 7F/FF) 240 Soft-PWM setting 30 B0 2

Su b

fu nc

tio n

244 Cooling fan operation selection 34 B4 2

St op

se le

ct io

n fu

nc tio

n

250 Stop selection 3A BA 2

251 Output phase failure protection selection 3B BB 2

252 Override bias 3C BC 2

Ad di

tio na

l fu

nc tio

n

253 Override gain 3D BD 2

261 Power failure stop selection 45 C5 2 262 Subtracted frequency at deceleration start 46 C6 2 263 Subtraction starting frequency 47 C7 2 264 Power-failure deceleration time 1 48 C8 2 265 Power-failure deceleration time 2 49 C9 2

Po w

er fa

ilu re

st op

fu nc

tio ns

266 Power-failure deceleration time switch-over frequency 4A CA 2

Fu nc

tio n

se le

ct io

n

270 Stop-on-contact/load torque high-speed frequency control selection 53 CE 2

271 High-speed setting maximum current 45 CF 2

272 Mid-speed setting minimum current 46 D0 2

273 Current averaging range 47 D1 2

H ig

h sp

ee d

fre qu

en cy

co nt

ro l

274 Current averaging filter constant 48 D2 2

275 Stop-on-contact exciting current low-speed multiplying factor 53 D3 2

St op

o n

co nt

ac t

276 Stop-on-contact PWM carrier frequency 54 D4 2

278 Brake opening frequency 56 D6 2 279 Brake opening current 57 D7 2 280 Brake opening current detection time 58 D8 2 281 Brake operation time at start 59 D9 2 282 Brake operation frequency 5A DA 2 283 Brake operation time at stop 5B DB 2 284 Deceleration detection function selection 5C DC 2Br

ak e

se qu

en ce

fu nc

tio ns

285 Overspeed detection frequency 5D DD 2

286 Droop gain 5E DE 2

D ro

op co

nt ro

l

287 Droop filter constant 5F DF 2

300 BCD code input bias 00 80 3 301 BCD code input gain 01 81 3 302 Binary input bias 02 82 3 303 Binary input gain 03 83 3

304 Selection of whether digital input and analog compensation input are enabled or disabled 04 84 312

-b it

di gi

ta l

in pu

t

305 Data read timing signal on/off selection 05 85 3 306 Analog output signal selection 06 86 3 307 Setting for zero analog output 07 87 3 308 Setting for maximum analog output 08 88 3

309 Analog output signal voltage/current switch- over 09 89 3

310 Analog meter voltage output selection 0A 8A 3 311 Setting for zero analog meter voltage output 0B 8B 3

312 Setting for maximum analog meter voltage output 0C 8C 3

313 Y0 output selection 0D 8D 3 314 Y1 output selection 0E 8E 3 315 Y2 output selection 0F 8F 3 316 Y3 output selection 10 90 3

An al

og o

ut pu

t, di

gi ta

l o ut

pu t

317 Y4 output selection 11 91 3

APPENDICES

213

Data CodesFunc- tion

Parameter Number Name Read Write Link Parameter Extension

Setting (Data code 7F/FF)

318 Y5 output selection 12 92 3

An al

og ou

tp ut

, d ig

ita l

ou tp

ut

319 Y6 output selection 13 93 3

320 RA1 output selection 14 94 3 321 RA2 output selection 15 95 3

R el

ay ou

tp ut

322 RA3 output selection 16 96 3 330 RA output selection 1E 9E 3 331 Inverter station number 1F 9F 3 332 Communication speed 20 A0 3 333 Stop bit length 21 A1 3 334 Parity check yes/no 22 A2 3 335 Communication retry count 23 A3 3 336 Communication check time interval 24 A4 3 337 Waiting time setting 25 A5 3 338 Operation command right 26 A6 3 339 Speed command right 27 A7 3 340 Link start mode selection 28 A8 3 341 CR, LF yes/no selection 29 A9 3

C om

pu te

r l in

k fu

nc tio

n

342 E2PROM write yes/no 2A AA 3 900 FM terminal calibration 5C DC 1 901 AM terminal calibration 5D DD 1 902 Frequency setting voltage bias 5E DE 1 903 Frequency setting voltage gain 5F DF 1 904 Frequency setting current bias 60 E0 1 905 Frequency setting current gain 61 E1 1 990 Buzzer control 5A DA 9

C al

ib ra

tio n

fu nc

tio ns

991 LCD contrast 5B DB 9 Second parameter switch-over 6C EC

Running frequency (RAM) 6D ED

Fr eq

ue nc

y se

tti ng

Running frequency (E2PROM) 6E EE

Monitor 6F Output current monitor 70 Output voltage monitor 71 Special monitor 72

Fr eq

ue nc

y m

on ito

r

Special monitor selection No. 73 F3

Most recent No. 1, No. 2/alarm display clear 74 F4

Most recent No. 3, No. 4 75 Most recent No. 5, No. 6 76

Al ar

m di

sp la

y

Most recent No. 7, No. 8 77 Inverter status monitor/run command 7A FA Operation mode acquisition 7B FB All clear FC Inverter reset FD Link parameter extension setting 7F FF

REVISIONS * The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.

Print Data *Manual Number Revision

Mar., 2000 IB(NA)-0600011-A First edition Nov

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the A500 Mitsubishi works, you can view and download the Mitsubishi A500 FR-B3-NH-37K Inverter Instruction Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Instruction Manual for Mitsubishi A500 as well as other Mitsubishi manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Instruction Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Mitsubishi A500. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Mitsubishi A500 FR-B3-NH-37K Inverter Instruction Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Mitsubishi A500 FR-B3-NH-37K Inverter Instruction Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Mitsubishi A500 FR-B3-NH-37K Inverter Instruction Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Mitsubishi A500 FR-B3-NH-37K Inverter Instruction Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Mitsubishi A500 FR-B3-NH-37K Inverter Instruction Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.